|ij.: 

• 

!:      : 

• 

U  F 

f  £C3 

I   A&  • 


OC-HBLF 


§  ii  mi  in ' 


$B    b37    411 


HANDBOOK  OF  THE 


4.7-INCH  GUN  MATERIEL 


MODEL  OF  1906 


WITH  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  ITS  CARE 


(TWENTY-FIVE  PLATES) 


NOVEMBER  19,  1910 
REVISED  DECEMBER  11,  1914 
REVISED  SEPTEMBER  15,  1917 


WASHINGTON 
.  xORNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 
1917 


No.  1771 


HANDBOOK  OF  THE 

4.7-INCH  GUN  MATERIEL 

MODEL  OF  1906 
WITH  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  ITS  CARE 


(TWENTY-FIVE  PLATES) 


NOVEMBER  19,  1910 
REVISED  DECEMBER  11,  1914 
REVISED  SEPTEMBER  15,  1917 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

1917 


V?' 


War  Department, 
Office  of  the  Chief  of  Ordnance, 

Washington,  September  15,  1917. 
This  manual  is  published  for  the  information  and  government  of  the  Regular 
Army,  National  Guard,  and  National  Army  of  the  United  States. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

William  Grozier, 
Brigadier  General,  Chief  of  Ordnance. 
(3) 


370989 


LIST  OF  CONTENTS. 


Page. 

List  of  plates 7 

List  of  equipment 7 

Gun: 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 9 

Description 9 

Care  of 17 

Ammunition: 

Cartridge  case 18 

Primer 18 

Powder  charge 20 

Projectiles: 

Shell 20 

Shrapnel 21 

Sempb  tracer 21 

Fuzes: 

Combination 22 

Frankford  Arsenal  combination 22 

Base  detonating 25 

Marking  on  ammunition  packing  boxes 26 

Allowance  of  ammunition 26 

Blank  ammunition 27 

Range  tables 29 

Hand  fuze  setter 32 

Drill  cartridge 33 

Reloading  and  cleaning  outfit 34 

Misfires  and  hangfires 34 

Carriage: 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 34 

Nomenclature  of  parts 35 

Description 41 

Dismounting  and  assembling 55 

Care  and  cleaning  of  recoil  cylinders  and  other  parts 62 

4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  limber,  model  of  1905: 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 65 

Nomenclature  of  parts 65 

Description 67 

4.7-inch  gun  limber  and  caisson,  model  of  1908: 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 69 

Nomenclature  of  parts 69 

Description  of  limber 73 

Description  of  caisson 73 

4.7-inch  gun  caisson,  model  of  1916: 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 77 

Nomenclature  of  parts 77 

Description 79 

(5) 


4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  forge  limber,  model  of  1908,  and  4.7-inch  gun 
and  G-inch  howitzer  store  limber,  model  of  ]  908 : 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 80 

Nomenclature  of  parts 80 

Description  of  forge  limber 85 

Description  of  store  limber 87 

Battery  and  store  wagons,  model  of  1908: 

Nomenclature  of  parts 88 

Description 91 

Description  of  several  tools  and  accessories 94 

Cyclometer 95 

Padlocks  and  bolt  snaps 95 

Artillery  harness. 95 

Steel  collars 97 

Collar-lifting  device 99 

Care  and  preservation  of  leather 99 

Sights  and  quadrant: 

Line  sight 101 

Front  sight 101 

Rear  sight 102 

Panoramic  sight,  model  of  1904 103 

Panoramic  sight,  model  of  1915 106 

Range  quadrant 112 

Use  of J 114 

Care  of 115 

Adjustment  of 119 

Spare  sights  and  quadrant 121 

Adjusting  instruments 122 

Targets 122 

General  information: 

Painting  artillery  materiel 122 

Oils  for  artillery  materiel 123 

Repairs  for  field  artillery ? 124 

Suggestions  for  care  and  maintenance  of  materiel 125 

Supplies  in  general 128 

Method  of  loading  a  battery  for  transportation  by  rail 129 

Total  equipment  of  one  field  battery  together  with  expendable  supplies 132 

Index 147 


LIST  OF  PLATES. 


Faces  page. 

I.  4.7-inch  gun,  model  of  1900 9 

II.  Breech  mechanism  and  nomenclature 10 

III.  Common  steel  shell,  shrapnel,  cartridge  case,  and  primer 18 

IV.  Combination  fuze,  31  seconds 22 

V.  Fuze  setter,  hand 32 

VI.  Carriage,  side  elevation  (carriages  1  to  40,  inclusive) 41 

VII.  Carriage,  plan  (carriages  1  to  40,  inclusive) 41 

VIII.  Carriage,  vertical  sections  (carriages  1  to  40,  inclusive) 42 

IX.  Views  of  carriages  with  serial  numbers  above  40 43 

X.  Traversing  gear 48 

XI.  Elevating  gear  (carriages  1  to  40,  inclusive) 50 

XII.  4.7-inch  gun  and  fi-inch  howitzer  limber,  model  of  1905 67 

XIII.  4.7-inch  gun  limber,  model  of  1908 73 

XIV.  4.7-inch  gun  caisson,  model  of  1908 75 

XV.  4.7-inch  gun  caisson,  model  of  1916 79 

XVI.  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  forge  limber,  model  of  1908 85 

XVII.  4  7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  store  limber,  model  of  1908 87 

XVIII.  Battery  and  store  wagons,  model  of  1908 91 

XIX.  Artillery  harness 95 

XX.  Spare  parts  for  steel  collar 98 

XXI.  Collar-lifting  device 99 

XXII.  Rear  sight 102 

XXIII.  Panoramic  sight,  model  of  1904 103 

XXIV.  Panoramic  sight,  model  of  1915 106 

XXV.  Range  quadrant 112 

list  of  equipment  of  one  4.7-inch  gun  battery,  on  war  footing. 


Number. 


Equipment. 


Property 

classification. 


Class. 


4.7-inch  guns,  model  of  1906 

4.7-inch  gun  carriages,  model  of  1906 

4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  limbers,  model  of  1905 

4.7-lnch  gun  limbers,  model  of  1908 

4.7-inch  gun  caissons,  model  of  1908  or  1916 

4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  forge  limber,  model  of  1908 

Battery  wagon,  model  of  1908 

4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  store  limber,  model  of  1908 

Store  wagon,  model  of  1908 * 

Sets  of  artillery  harness  (lead) 

Sets  of  artillery  harness  (wheel) 

Set  of  pack  harmless  and  special  pack  equipment 

Set  of  fire-control  equipment 


IV 


IV 


IV 

IV 
V 


tion. 


»  This  set  of  pack  harness  and  special  pack  equipment  will  be  issued  to  carry  the  fire-control  equip- 
ment until  the  reel  (2-horse)  is  available. 

(?) 


HANDBOOK  OF  THE  4.7-INCH  GUN  MATERIEL,  MODEL  OF  1906. 


THE    4.7-INCH    GUN,    MODEL    OF    1906. 

WEIGHTS,   DIMENSIONS,    ETC. 

Weight pounds. .     2, 688 

Caliber inches. .        4. 7 

Total  length do. ...  134. 92 

Length  of  bore do 129. 22 

Length  of  rifle  portion  of  bore do 111.  9 

Number  of  grooves 42 

"    Width  of  grooves inch. .  0. 2116 

Depth  of  groove do 0. 04 

Width  of  lands do ... .      0. 14 

Twist  of  rifling,  right  hand,  1  turn  in  50  calibers  at  origin  to  1  turn  in  25  cali- 
bers at  14.9  inches  from  muzzle,  thence  uniform. 

Rifling,  semicubic  parabola  in  form. 

Weight  of  projectile,  filled  and  fuzed pounds. .  60 

Weight  of  powder  charge ounces. .  95 

Weight  of  cartridge  case pounds. .        7. 4 

Capacity  of  cartridge  case cubic  inches. .        251 

Muzzle  velocity feet  per  second. .     1, 700 

Maximum  pressure  per  square  inch pounds. .  33, 000 

Maximum  range,  approximately yards. .  11, 000 

Center  of  gravity  of  gun  from  rear  face  of  breech inches. .  51 

DESCRIPTION. 
[Plate  I.] 

The  gun  is  built  up  consisting  of  a  tube,  jacket,  locking  hoop,  and 
clip.  Guns  numbered  1  to  21,  inclusive,  are  of  gun  steel;  those 
after  No.  21  are  of  nickel  steel.  The  jacket  envelops  the  rear  portion 
of  the  tube  and  projects  beyond  it  to  form  the  breech  recess  or  seat 
for  the  breechblock.  A  lug,  known  as  the  recoil  lug,  projects  from 
the  under  surface  of  the  jacket  at  its  extreme  rear  end  and  affords  a 
point  of  attachment  for  the  recoil  cylinder  of  the  carriage.  To  this 
lug  is  also  attached  the  spring  rod  yoke,  to  the  ends  of  which  are 
secured  the  spring  rods.  A  lug  in  the  right  of  the  jacket  at  its  rear 
end  provides  a  point  of  support  for  the  block  carrier,  which  is  held 
in  place  by  the  hinge  pin.  A  seat  for  the  extractor  is  also  formed  in 
this  lug,  passing  through  it  into  the  breech  recess. 

0) 


10 

Tho  I'X'Kmi ::  li«».»;) 's  function  is  to  secure  the  jacket  from  any  longi- 
tudinal motion  to  the  rear  with  respect  to  the  tube.  It  is  joined  to 
the  forward  end  of  the  jacket  by  means  of  a  left-hand  screw  thread 
of  one  and  one-eighth  turns.  A  shoulder  in  the  hoop  bears  against 
a  shoulder  on  the  tubo.  The  locking  hoop,  in  addition  to  being 
screw  threaded,  is  also  assembled  with  a  shrinkage. 

The  clip  is  a  short  hoop  shrunk  on  the  tube  near  the  muzzle.  A 
cylindrical  surface  having  a  shoulder  is  formed  on  the  tube  as  a  seat 
for  tho  clip.  In  addition  to  the  shrinkage,  the  clip  is  secured  by  a 
pin  driven  transversely  through  the  hoop  near  its  rear  end. 

On  each  side  of  tho  gun  and  extending  the  full  length  of  the  jacket 
and  locking  hoop  is  formed  a  supporting  clip.  The  bottom  surfaces 
of  these  clips  are  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  bore  and  are  in  contact 
with  the  top  surfaces  of  the  cradle  rails  on  which  the  gun  slides  during 
recoil.  On  the  underside  of  the  gun  and  extending  the  entire  length 
of  the  jacket,  locking  hoop,  and  clip  are  formed  recoil  guides  or  clips 
which  fit  under  and  secure  the  gun  to  the  rails  of  the  cradle  and  also 
serve  to  guide  the  gun  during  recoil. 

When  the  gun  is  assembled  upon  the  carriage,  a  sheet-steel  dust 
guard  is  secured  to  the  front  face  of  the  locking  hoop  and  the  rear 
face  of  the  clip,  thus  protecting  from  dust  and  dirt  the  bearing  sur- 
faces of  the  guide  rails  between  those  points.  Eight  oil  holes  closed 
by  handy  oilers  are  provided  for  oiling  the  guide  rails  and  recoil 
surfaces. 

BREECH    MECHANISM. 

[Plate  II.] 

The  breechblock  is  of  the  interrupted-screw  type,  and  is  provided 
with  four  threaded  and  four  slotted  sectors.  The  front  end  of  the 
axial  recess  in  the  block  for  the  hub  of  the  block  carrier  is  closed  by 
a  bushing.  Three  vent  holes  leading  from  a  cavity  in  the  bushing 
to  the  rear  through  the  breechblock  permit  the  escape  of  gas  from 
a  ruptured  primer.  On  a  semicircular  boss  on  the  rear  face  of  the 
breechblock  are  cut  gear  teeth,  in  which  the  gear  teeth  of  the  operat- 
ing lever  bevel  gear  mesh.  The  upper  end  of  the  circular  boss  on 
which  the  gear  teeth  are  cut  serves  as  a  stop  to  limit  the  rotation  of 
the  block  in  the  unlocked  position.  This  upper  end  of  the  circular 
boss  comes  in  contact  with  a  hardened  steel  stop  riveted  to  the  inner 
face  of  the  block  carrier.  A  radial  lug  or  tooth  projects  from  the 
inner  surface  of  tho  breechblock  and  engages  an  L-shaped  slot 
cut  in  the  hub  of  the  block  carrier,  so  that  when  the  mechanism  is 
unlocked  no  relative  movement  between  the  breechblock  and  the 
block  carrier  can  take  place. 

In  order  to  surely  maintain  this  relation  between  the  breechblock 
and  the  block  carrier,  a  block  latch,  pivoted  on  the  inner  face  of 
the  carrier  in   tho  lower  left-hand  quadrant,   engages  a  notch  or 


11 

shoulder  cut  in  the  rear  face  of  the  block  adjacent  to  the  circular 
hub  on  which  the  gear  teeth  are  cut.  This  latch  is  so  pivoted  that 
as  the  mechanism  is  swung  free  from  the  gun  it  moves  forward 
sufficiently  to  engage  the  notch  in  the  block,  and  also  to  cause  the 
forward  plane  of  the  latch  to  project  beyond  the  front  of  the  block 
carrier;  consequently  when  the  mechanism  is  swung  to  the  closed 
position  the  front  face  of  the  latch  comes  in  contact  with  the  rear  face 
of  the  breech  of  the  gun,  thus  forcing  the  latch  out  of  the  notch 
in  the  breechblock  back  into  a  recess  in  the  carrier,  and  by  continuing 
the  motion  of  closing  the  mechanism  the  breechblock  is  free  to  rotate 
on  the  hub  of  the  carrier  and  engages  its  threads  with  those  in  the 
gun.  When  the  breechblock  is  in  the  locked  position,  a  lug  on  the 
firing-lock  case  engages  the  front  face  of  the  tooth  or  lug  on  the  breech- 
block, which  locks  the  breechblock  to  the  block  carrier.  This  engage- 
ment between  the  lug  on  the  breechblock  and  the  lug  on  the  firing- 
lock  case  serves  to  lock  the  block  carrier  to  the  breechblock  and  pre- 
vent displacement  due  to  a  blowback.  This  is  accomplished  through 
the  medium  of  four  additional  lugs  on  the  firing-lock  case,  which  are 
arranged  to  interlock  with  corresponding  lugs  on  the  block  carrier. 
The  breechblock  is  mounted  eccentrically  in  the  breech  of  the  gun, 
with  reference  to  the  axis  of  the  bore,  and  is  concentrically  mounted 
on  a  hub  on  the  block  carrier,  in  which  the  firing-lock  case  is  fitted. 

The  firing-lock  case  is  eccentrically  fitted  in  the  hub  of  the  block 
carrier  in  such  a  position  that  the  axis  of  the  firing  pin  is  always  in 
line  with  the  bore  of  the  gun.  The  bushing  in  the  front  end  of  the 
breechblock,  through  which  the  firing  pin  passes,  when  in  the  fired 
position  is  fitted  eccentrically  with  reference  to  the  breechblock  and 
is  provided  with  a  cavity  of  such  dimensions  that  the  breechblock 
is  permitted  to  revolve  freely  about  the  firing  pin,  which  is  fixed  in 
the  hub  of  the  block  carrier  and  does  not  rotate.  The  point  of  the 
firing  pin,  when  at  rest,  is  always  within  the  enlarged  cavity  in  the 
bushing,  and  when  the  block  is  revolved  to  the  unlocked  position, 
the  hole  in  the  bushing  through  which  the  point  of  the  firing  pin 
passes  is  moved  to  one  side,  due  to  the  eccentric  arrangement  of  the 
breechblock,  thus  masking  the  point  of  the  pin  and  preventing  any 
possible  contact  between  the  firing  pin  and  the  primer  in  the  car- 
tridge case  when  the  block  is  unlocked.  The  block  will  be  practically 
fully  locked  before  any  contact  between  the  firing  pin  and  the  primer 
can  take  place.  The  firing  pin  is  provided  with  a  shoulder  a  short 
distance  in  rear  of  the  forward  end,  which  comes  in  contact  with  the 
rear  face  of  the  bushing  if  an  attempt  is  made  to  fire  the  gun  when 
the  breech  is  unlocked.  This  is  done  to  prevent  any  blow  from 
coming  on  the  point  of  the  firing  pin  and  injuring  the  same. 

The  loading  tray  is  located  in  the  breech  recess  and  serves  to  pro- 
tect the  two  lowest  threaded  sectors  in  the  breech  recess  from  being 


12 

bruised  by  the  cartridge  when  loading  the  gun.  Its  middle  portion 
is  cut  away  in  order  to  clear  the  lowest  threaded  sector  on  the  block 
when  the  latter  is  closed.  It  is  locked  to  the  gun  when  the  breech  is 
open  by  the  tray  latch  which  is  located  in  the  rear  lower  face  of  the 
jacket  and  engages  a  slot  in  the  rear  lip  of  the  tray  The  latch  is 
so  placed  that  as  the  block  carrier  strikes  the  face  of  the  breech  it 
forces  the  latch  to  disengage  its  seat  in  the  tray.  As  the  block 
rotates,  its  lowest  threaded  sector  which  engages  the  tray  causes 
the  latter  to  rotate,  its  front  and  rear  lips  sliding  in  seats  provided 
for  that  purpose  in  the  breech  recess. 

FIRING  MECHANISM. 

The  firing  mechanism  belongs  to  that  type  known  as  a  continuous- 
pull  mechanism — that  is,  the  mechanism  is  cocked  and  fired  by  the 
pull  on  the  lanyard  or  the  downward  pressure  on  the  firing  handle. 
This  arrangement  gives  greater  safety  against  prematures  and  per- 
mits of  a  quick  repetition  of  the  blow  from  the  firing  pin  in  case  of 
a  misfire. 

FIRING  PIN. 

The  firing  pin  is  mounted  in  the  firing-lock  case.  Near  its  front 
end  it  is  provided  with  a  collar  which  serves  to  guide  the  pin  axially, 
and  as  a  shoulder  for  the  front  end  of  the  firing  spring.  It  also 
serves  as  a  means  for  preventing  the  forward  movement  of  the 
firing  pin  until  the  firing  spring  has  been  compressed  by  the  action 
of  the  lanyard  or  firing  handle.  The  rear  end  of  the  firing  pin  is 
rectangular  in  cross  section  and  is  provided  with  a  double  lug  against 
which  the  trigger  fork  engages  at  a  point  between  its  upper  end  and 
its  axis.  The  engagement  serves  as  a  means  of  forcing  the  firing  pin 
to  its  retracted  or  normal  position,  after  the  pin  has  been  released 
and  forced  forward.  Opposite  the  double  lug  for  the  trigger  fork, 
the  firing  pin  is  provided  with  a  smaller  lug,  which  fits  into  a  slot  in 
the  firing-spring  sleeve  and  serves  to  hold  the  sleeve  in  its  proper 
position  for  assembling  the  trigger  fork.  This  provides  a  space 
between  the  rear  face  of  the  sleeve  and  the  double  lug  on  the  firing 
pin.  Through  this  space  the  trigger  fork  may  be  inserted  by  hand  to 
its  proper  position. 

FIRING-PIN   SPRING. 

The  firing-pin  spring  is  threaded  over  the  firing  pin  from  the  rear 
end.  Over  this  is  assembled  the  firing-spring  sleeve  in  such  a  manner 
that  when  it  is  seated  in  its  proper  position  the  firing-pin  spring  is 
put  under  an  initial  tension  by  being  compressed  between  the  collar 
on  the  front  end  of  the  firing  pin  and  a  shoulder  or  seat  formed  on 
the  inside  of  the  sleeve  at  its  rear  end.  The  rear  end  of  the  firing 
spring  has  a  tang  which  fits  in  a  recess  drilled  in  the  bearing  surface 
of  the  firing-spring  sleeve 


13 


SEAR. 


The  sear,  which  is  in  the  form  of  a  leaf  spring,  is  seated  in  a  slot  in 
the  firing-lock  case.  It  is  provided  with  a  thickened  forward  end, 
having  a  notch  cut  in  it,  in  which  a  hardened  portion  of  the  periphery 
of  the  collar  on  the  firing  pin  engages.  Immediately  in  rear  of  this 
Qotch  in  the  sear  an  inclined  surface  is  provided,  upon  which  the 
forward  end  of  the  firing-spring  sleeve  acts  in  its  forward  motion  to 
compress  the  firing-pin  spring  and  fire  the  gun.  After  the  sleeve 
under  the  action  of  the  trigger  fork  has  traveled  the  required  distance 
forward  to  produce  the  proper  compression  to  the  firing-pin  spring, 
the  sear  is  forced  outward,  thus  releasing  the  engagement  between 
the  sear  and  the  collar  of  the  firing  pin.  The  firing  pin  being  released 
moves  forward  under  the  action  of  the  firing-pin  spring  and  fires  the 
gun.  On  the  rear  end  of  the  sear  a  cylindrical  projection  is  formed 
which  fits  into  a  hole  drilled  into  the  firing-lock  case.  This  serves  to 
hold  the  sear  in  place. 

TRIGGER   PORK. 

The  trigger  fork  is  seated  in  the  rear  of  the  firing-lock  case  and  is 
constrained  from  displacement  laterally  by  the  walls  of  the  firing- 
lock  case.  It  engages  the  squared  end  of  the  trigger  shaft.  The 
trigger  fork  is  bifurcated  on  the  end  which  engages  the  firing  pin  and 
sleeve,  and  it  is  seated  so  that  the  flat  sides  of  the  firing  pin  pass 
between  the  bifurcated  end  of  the  fork  and  the  rear  face  of  the 
bifurcated  end  bears  against  the  front  faces  of  the  double  lug  on  the 
firing  pin  at  a  point  located  about  halfway  between  the  end  of  the 
trigger  fork  and  its  axis.  This  point  of  contact  between  the  firing 
pin  and  trigger  fork  is  important,  as  it  helps  to  maintain  the  proper 
operation  of  the  firing  pin  in  its  return  action  after  firing.  The 
extreme  bifurcated  ends  of  the  trigger  fork  are  made  in  the  form  of  a 
circle,  and  these  ends  bear  against  a  flat  surface  on  the  rear  end  of  the 
firing-spring  sleeve  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the  sleeve.  The  fork 
does  not  touch  the  firing-spring  sleeve  at  any  other  point.  The 
firing  spring  is  under  tension  at  all  times  and  exerts  an  equal  pressure 
between  the  collar  on  the  front  end  of  the  firing  pin  and  its  seat  in 
the  rear  end  of  the  firing-spring  sleeve.  The  pressure  on  the  firing- 
pin  collar  is  transmitted  to  the  trigger  fork  at  the  bearing  between 
the  latter  and  the  double  lug  on  the  firing  pin,  while  the  pressure  on 
the  spring  seat  in  the  sleeve  is  transmitted  to  the  trigger  fork  at  its 
extreme  bifurcated  ends.  These  two  forces  are  equal  and  opposite 
in  direction,  but  have  different  lever  arms  with  respect  to  the  axis 
of  rotation  of  the  fork.  The  fork  is,  therefore,  acted  upon  by  a 
varying  couple  the  moment  of  which  is  sufficient,  when  the  trigger 
shaft  is  released,  to  rotate  the  trigger  fork  to  the  rear,  carrying  with 
it  the  firing  pin  through  the  medium  of  the  double  lug  on  its  rear  end. 
10161—17- 2* 


14 

This  motion  continues  until  the  iiring-pin  collar  engages  the  sear,  at 
which  time  the  spring,  sleeve,  trigger  fork,  and  firing  pin  are  in  the 
normal  positions  and  the  faring  mechanism  again  ready  for  action. 

TRIGGER   SHAFT. 

The  trigger  shaft  is  assembled  in  a  projection  which  forms  a  part 
of  the  firing-lock  case  and  is  held  in  place  by  a  wire  detent.  Its 
function  is  to  rotate  the  trigger  fork  forward  in  firing.  It  has  at  its 
upper  end  a  squared  portion  on  which  the  fork  is  mounted.  At  its 
lower  end  are  two  projections,  the  larger  of  which  is  provided  with  a 
hole  for  the  attachment  of  a  lanyard  by  which  the  gun  should  be  fired 
until  the  spade  at  the  end  of  the  trail  is  sufficiently  embedded  in  the 
ground  to  hold  the  carriage  in  place.  The  other  projection  on  the 
trigger  shaft  is  acted  upon  by  the  firing  pallet,  which  is  an  extension 
of  the  firing-handle  shaft.  This  latter  arrangement  serves  as  a 
means  of  firing  the  gun  from  a  seat  on  the  carriage. 

FIRING-LOCK   CASE. 

The  firing-lock  case  is  designed  to  contain  the  complete  firing  mech- 
anism. By  this  means  the  entire  firing  mechanism  can  be  replaced 
in  an  instant.  It  contains  the  firing  pin,  firing-pin  spring,  firing- 
spring  sleeve,  sear,  trigger  fork,  trigger  shaft,  and  detent.  It  is 
provided  with  four  lugs  by  which  it  is  locked  in  place  in  the  hub  of 
the  block  carrier,  and  one  lug  forward  of  the  other  four,  which  engages 
behind  a  lug  on  the  breechblock.  This  lug,  together  with  the  other 
four  which  lock  the  case  to  the  carrier,  serves  to  lock  the  block  and 
carrier  together. 

The  firing-lock  case  is  held  from  displacement  due  to  rotation  by  a 
spring  catch  or  locking  bolt.  This  locking  bolt  is  fitted  in  a  projec- 
tion of  the  firing-lock  case  and  the  inner  end  enters  a  recess  or  seat 
in  the  rear  face  of  the  block  carrier. 

OPERATING   LEVER. 

The  handle  and  body  of  the  lever  is  recessed  to  receive  the  lever 
latch.  The  inner  end  of  the  lever  is  provided  with  beveled  gear 
teeth,  which  mesh  with  corresponding  teeth  on  the  breechblock  and 
serve  as  a  means  for  opening  and  closing  the  mechanism.  The  lever 
is  seated  between  two  lugs  on  the  block  carrier  and  is  held  in  place 
by  a  pivot. 

BLOCK   CARRIER. 

The  block  carrier  is  hinged  at  its  right  side  to  the  gun  by  means  of 
the  hinge  pin.  It  is  provided  with  a  central  inwardly  projecting  hub, 
upon  which  the  breechblock  is  concentrically  mounted.  The  hub  is 
bored  out  eccentrically  to  receive  the  firing-lock  case,  which  is  held 


15 

in  place  from  axial  displacement  by  four  lugs  formed  on  the  firing- 
lock  case  and  four  lugs  formed  on  the  inside  of  the  bore  of  the  block 
carrier.  In  the  forward  end  of  the  central  hub  a  slot  is  cut  which 
extends  to  the  rear  and  terminates  in  an  L.  This  receives  the  lug 
on  the  breechblock  and  holds  the  block  from  displacement  when  the 
mechanism  is  open.  Two  lugs  are  formed  on  the  rear  face  of  the 
carrier  just  below  its  center.  They  form  a  seat  for  the  operating 
lever.  On  the  inner  face  in  the  lower  left-hand  quadrant  a  seat  and 
pivot  for  the  block  latch  is  provided.  In  the  upper  right-hand  quad- 
rant on  the  inner  face  a  hardened  steel  block  stop  is  riveted.  This 
limits  the  rotation  of  the  block  in  the  open  position.  On  the  right 
side  of  the  carrier  a  projecting  pallet  is  attached  which  serves  to 
operate  the  extractor. 

BLOCK   LATCH. 

A  recess  in  the  latch  contains  a  spring  which  presses  against  the 
inner  face  of  the  block  carrier,  forcing  the  latch  forward  into  its 
locking  recess  in  the  block,  when  the  breech  is  open.  When  the  block 
is  locked,  the  latch  rests  against  the  rear  face  of  the  jacket.  The 
latch  serves  to  prevent  rotation  of  the  block  when  in  its  open  position. 

THE    EXTRACTOR, 

The  extractor  is  located  in  a  seat  formed  in  the  jacket.  It  is  oper- 
ated by  the  block  carrier,  the  pallet  on  the  latter  serving  to  give  it 
a  quick  throw  at  the  end  of  the  swing  of  the  carrier  in  opening  the 
mechanism.  The  extractor  rolls  on  its  forward  or  convex  face  and 
is  prevented  from  being  displaced  by  its  trunnions,  which  slide  in 
grooves  formed  in  the  top  and  bottom  of  the  extractor  seat.  A  lip 
in  the  extractor  engages  the  rim  of  the  cartride  case  and  serves  as  a 
means  for  ejecting  the  same. 

OPERATING-LBVER   LATCH. 

The  latch  is  fitted  in  a  seat  formed  in  the  operating  lever  and  serves 
to  lock  the  handle  from  rotation,  which  in  turn  prevents  rotation  of 
the  block.  The  latch  rotates  about  a  long  steel  pivot,  which  is  so 
fitted  that  it  interlocks  with  the  lever  latch  under  the  action  of  the 
lever-latch  spring. 

HINGE   PIN. 

This  is  a  hardened  steel  pin,  and  is  held  from  displacement  by  a 
spring  catch  fitted  to  its  lower  end.  A  handy  oiler  seated  in  its  top 
surface  supplies  oil  to  a  spiral  groove  formed  on  its  surface. 

ACTION   OP  THE    BREECH   MECHANISM. 

To  open  the  breech,  grasp  the  operating-lever  handle ;  at  the  same 
time  compress  the  lever-latch  handle.  This  releases  the  latch  from 
the  catch  on  the  block  carrier.     Rotate  the  operating  lever  to  the 


16 

rear.  During  the  first  part  of  this  movement  (67§°)  the  block  and 
loading  tray  are  rotated  to  their  unlocked  positions,  at  which  time 
the  stop  on  the  block  comes  in  contact  with  the  stop  on  the  block 
carrier  and  the  tray  latch  opposite  its  seat  in  the  loading  tray.  The 
block  latch  will  drop  into  its  notch  in  the  block  and  the  tray  latch 
engage  the  tray  at  the  moment  of  swinging  the  block  carrier  from 
the  gun.  The  block  is  now  locked  against  further  rotation  in  either 
direction.  During  a  further  rotation  of  the  operating  lever  of  about 
101°  the  block  and  block  carrier  swing  about  the  hinge  pin  clear  of 
the  breech  recess,  the  block  carrier  operates  the  extractor,  unseating 
the  cartridge  case  before  the  end  of  the  90°  movement,  and  finally, 
as  the  pallet  on  the  block  carrier  engages  the  extractor,  the  latter  is 
given  a  quick  throw  which  ejects  the  case  free  of  the  gun. 

When  another  round  is  inserted,  the  rim  of  the  cartridge  case  comes 
in  contact  with  the  extractor  and  forces  it  partly  home.  In  closing 
the  mechanism  the  movements  are  simply  the  reverse  of  opening; 
as  the  block  comes  in  contact  with  the  breech  face  of  the  gun  the  block 
latch  is  forced  rearward,  the  tray  latch  forward,  unlocking  the  block 
from  the  block  carrier  and  the  loading  tray  from  the  gun.  Further 
rotation  of  the  operating  lever  rotates  the  breechblock  and  loading 
tray,  causing  the  threads  of  the  former  to  engage  those  of  the  gun. 
This  engagement  of  threads  moves  the  block  forward,  due  to  the  pitch 
of  the  threads,  and  firmly  seats  the  cartridge  in  the  chamber.  At  the 
final  motion  of  the  operating  lever  its  latch  engages  the  catch  on  the 
rear  face  of  the  block  carrier,  locking  the  block  in  the  closed  position. 
The  gun  is  now  ready  to  fire. 

TO    DISMANTLE   THE    FIRING    MECHANISM. 

Take  hold  of  the  locking  bolt  situated  at  the  lower  end  of  the  firing- 
lock  case,  pull  it  to  the  rear,  then  revolve  the  firing-lock  case  upward 
about  45°  and  pull  it  gently  to  the  rear.  This  will  remove  from  the 
gun  the  firing-lock  case  with  the  firing  mechanism  complete.  Press 
the  trigger-shaft  detent  until  it  disengages  from  the  notch  in  the 
firing-lock  case.  This  will  allow  the  trigger  shaft,  with  its  detent, 
to  be  withdrawn.  Then  gently  press  on  the  front  of  the  firing  pin, 
forcing  it  back  into  the  firing-lock  case.  This  will  allow  the  trigger 
fork  to  be  removed.  Then,  with  one  finger  placed  on  the  front  end 
of  the  sear,  force  it  outward;  at  the  same  time  grasp  the  front  end 
of  the  firing  pin.  Give  it  a  sharp  pull.  This  will  remove  the  firing- 
pin  spring  and  sleeve  from  the  firing-lock  case.  Then  place  the  front 
end  of  the  firing  pin  against  a  block  of  wood,  bear  down  on  the  firing- 
spring  sleeve  until  the  spring  is  compressed  sufficiently  to  disengage 
the  slot  in  the  rear  end  of  the  sleeve  from  the  small  lug  on  the  rear 
end  of  the  firing  pin .     Slightly  turn  the  sleeve,  and  it  can  be  separated 


17 

from  the  spring  and  pin.  By  an  unscrewing  motion  the  spring  can 
be  removed  from  the  pin.  The  sear  can  be  removed  by  gently  press- 
ing it  toward  the  center  of  the  firing-lock  case. 

To  assemble,  reverse  these  operations,  taking  care  before  driving 
too  hard  on  the  end  of  the  trigger  shaft  that  the  square  hole  in  the 
trigger  fork  is  in  position  to  receive  the  tapered  end  of  the  trigger 
shaft.  No  tools  are  required  for  assembling  or  dismantling  the  firing 
mechanism  except  possibly  a  small  rod  or  stick  to  pry  out  the  trigger 
fork. 

TO   DISMANTLE  THE   BREECH  MECHANISM. 

Grasp  the  operating  lever  and  open  the  mechanism;  when  the 
mechanism  is  open,  force  the  block  latch  out  of  its  seat  in  the  block 
by  pressing  it  into  its  seat  in  the  carrier.  Take  hold  of  the  block 
and  revolve  it  to  the  left  until  it  stops;  then  pull  it  to  the  rear  off 
the  carrier.  The  block  latch  can  now  be  readily  removed.  After 
the  firing-lock  case  has  been  removed,  the  operating  lever  can  be 
removed  by  forcing  its  pivot  up  from  beneath  by  a  gentle  pressure. 
The  lever  latch  can  be  removed  by  pressing  in  on  the  latch  at  a  point 
near  its  lower  end  and  opposite  its  pivot.  A  hole  in  the  latch  is 
cut  eccentric  with  reference  to  the  pivot,  and  a  shoulder  on  the  pivot 
prevents  their  displacement  until  the  latch  is  forced  in  and  the  hole 
is  concentric  with  the  pivot.  When  this  occurs,  the  pivot  can  be 
readily  pulled  out  and  the  latch  removed.  To  remove  the  block  car- 
rier, force  the  hinge  pin  up  by  hand  until  it  can  bo  caught  by  the  head; 
if  the  pin  sticks,  by  swinging  the  block  carrier  back  and  forth  it 
can  readily  be  loosened.  The  extractor  can  now  be  removed  from 
its  seat.  Pressing  on  the  tray  latch  sufficiently  to  force  it  into  its 
seat  permits  the  loading  tray  to  be  removed  from  the  breech  recess. 
Reverse  these  operations  for  assembling  the  mechanism.  No  tools 
are  required  for  dismantling  this  breech  mechanism. 

CARE   OF   THE   GUN. 

After  firing,  the  bore  of  the  gun  should  be  cleaned  to  remove  the 
residue  of  smokeless  powder,  and  then  oiled.  In  cleaning,  wash 
the  bore  with  a  solution  made  by  dissolving  one-half  pound  of  sal 
soda  in  1  gallon  of  boiling  water.  After  washing  with  tho  soda  solu- 
tion, wipe  perfectly  dry,  and  then  oil  the  bore  with  a  thin  coating  of 
the  slushing  oil  furnished  for  the  purpose.  A  slush  brush  for  use  in 
oiling  the  bore  will  be  issued  by  the  Ordnance  Department  upon 
requisition. 

The  breech  mechanism  should  be  kept  clean  and  well  oiled.  It 
should  be  dismounted  from  time  to  time  for  examination  and  oiled 
when  assembled. 


18 

AMMUNITION. 

Fixed  ammunition  is  used  in  the  4.7-inch  gun  and  is  made  up  with 
either  shrapnel  or  high-explosive  common  steel  shell.  The  rounds 
as  made  up  vary  slightly  in  length  with  the  type  of  projectile  used. 
The  ammunition  chests  of  the  battery  are  of  sufficient  size  to  take 
either  kind  of  ammunition  furnished,  so  that  the  number  of  each  kind 
to  be  carried  is  a  matter  for  regulation  by  proper  authority.  Each 
round  is  issued  with  projectile  filled  and  fuzed.  The  weight  of  the 
projectile  is  60  pounds,  and  the  total  weight  of  each  round  is  about 
73.8  pounds.  The  components  of  each  round  are  the  cartridge  case 
with  primer,  the  powder  charge,  projectile,  and  fuze. 

A  cast-iron  shell  has  been  designed  having  the  same  center  of 
gravity  and  the  same  exterior  dimension  as  the  common  steel  shell. 
These  cast-iron  shell  are  at  present  used  without  bursting  charge  for 
proof  firing,  etc.  A  high-explosive  shrapnel,  having  a  base  charge  of 
black  powder  and  a  head  charge  and  matrix  of  high-explosive  com- 
pound, is  being  designed  and  tested  with  a  view  to  its  adoption  to 
supersede  the  ordinary  shrapnel  and  high-explosive  shell. 

CARTRIDGE    CASE. 
[riate  III.] 

The  cartridge  case  is  a  solid  drawn  brass  case  16.6  inches  long. 
It  has  a  capacity  of  251  cubic  inches,  and  weighs  with  primer  7.875 
pounds.  The  head  or  base  of  the  case  has  a  projecting  flange  or 
rim  under  which  the  lip  of  the  extractor  engages. 

The  center  of  the  base  is  bored  out  to  form  a  seat  into  which  the 
primer  is  forced.  The  primer  seats  are  mandreled  to  near  the  fin- 
ished dimensions  with  a  tapered  steel  plug  to  toughen  the  metal  of  the 
cartridge  case  around  the  primer  seat  and  then  reamed  to  finished 
size.  This  toughening  is  necessary  to  prevent  expansion  of  the  seat 
under  gas  pressure  with  a  consequent  looseness  of  the  primer  in  sub- 
sequent firings.  The  primer  is  inserted  in  the  case  by  means  of  a 
primer  inserting  press  to  avoid  injury  to  the  primer  seat  or  explosion 
of  the  primer.  Special  decapping  tools  are  issued  for  use  in  removing 
exploded  primers  from  cartridge  cases. 

A  circular  groove  is  to  be  cut  in  the  base  of  the  cartridge  case  and 
is  painted  red  to  indicate  rounds  of  shrapnel,  but  is  not  painted  with 
rounds  of  high-explosive  shell. 

THE   PRIMER. 

[Plate  III.] 

To  insure  the  ignition  of  smokeless-powder  charges  in  cartridge 
cases  it  is  necessary  that  the  primers  either  contain  in  themselves,  in 
addition  to  the  percussion  composition,  an  auxiliary  charge  of  black 


PLATE  III. 


r- BASE  COVER  GROOVE 


BASE  DETONATING  FVZ£  MEDIUM  CALIBER. 
STEEL  SHELL 


COMMON  STEEL  SHELL  MODEL  OF '/SOS. 


LOOSE  BUCK  POWDER.  r-SHRARNEL  BALLS.        


CENTRA  TUBE 
r-STEEL  CASE. 


—  STEEL  HEAD. 
31  SECOND  COMB/NATION  FUZE 


r-BBASS  COVER. 


SW/IPWL 


PERCVSS/ON  CAR 
KM  PRESSED  POWDER 
BODY    i — VBA/TS 


BRASS  0/ffPRR/7GM 


HE/ID  OF  C/ISE 


taint 


I       I      I 


6 8 /O        /NCRES. 

I       I       I       I  =T=UffigrV^ 


19 

powder,  or  that  an  auxiliary  charge  of  such  powder  be  placed  at  the 
rear  of  the  cartridge  case  to  communicate  the  flame  from  the  per- 
cussion primer  and  thoroughly  ignite  the  smokeless  powder.  The 
percussion  primer,  known  as  the  "110-grain  percussion  primer," 
contains  an  igniting  charge  of  110  grains  of  black  powder  in  addition 
to  the  essential  elements  of  a  percussion  primer. 

The  "110-grain  percussion  primer"  is  shown  in  Plate  III,  and  con- 
sists of  a  brass  case  resembling  in  shape  a  small-arms  cartridge  case. 
The  head  or  rear  end  of  the  primer  case  is  countersunk,  forming  a  cup- 
shaped  recess,  in  which  is  seated  the  cap  or  percussion  primer  proper. 
The  latter  consists  of  the  cup,  the  anvil,  and  the  percussion  com- 
position, assembled  as  shown  on  Plate  III.  The  percussion  compo- 
sition is  known  as  the  "No.  42"  mixture,  and  contains  the  following 
ingredients : 

Per  cent. 

Flowers  of  sulphur 21. 965 

Antimony  sulphide 30. 829 

Potassium  chlorate 47. 206 

The  percussion-cap  recess  is  connected  with  the  interior  of  the 
primer  case  by  a  small  vent.  The  body  of  the  case  contains  110 
grains  of  black  powder,  constituting  the  rear  " priming"  or  igniting 
charge  for  the  smokeless  powder.  This  black  powder  is  inserted 
under  a  pressure  of  36,000  pounds  per  square  inch,  and  is  pressed 
into  the  primer  body  around  a  central  wire,  which  is  then  withdrawn, 
leaving  a  longitudinal  hole  the  full  length  of  the  primer.  Eight  radial 
holes  are  drilled  through  the  primer  and  compressed  powder,  afford- 
ing 16  vents  for  the  free  exit  of  the  black-powder  flames.  After 
filling  the  case  the  front  end  is  closed  by  a  cardboard  wad  covered 
with  shellac,  and  the  radial  perforations  in  the  body  of  the  case  are 
covered  by  a  tin-foil  wrapper  to  retain  in  the  case  any  loose  black 
powder,  as  well  as  to  exclude  all  moisture. 

In  action  the  blow  of  the  firing  pin  explodes  the  percussion  cap, 
which  ignites  the  black  powder;  the  flames  of  the  latter  shoot  out 
through  the  vents  in  the  primer  case  and  ignite  the  smokeless-powder 
charge. 

The  primer  just  described  is  known  as  the  "110-grain  percussion 
primer"  and  is  used  only  with  smokeless-powder  charges. 

A  shorter  primer,  known  as  the  "saluting  primer  percussion,"  is 
issued  for  use  in  blank  cartridges.  The  percussion  elements  and  the 
dimensions  of  the  seat  in  the  cartridge  case  for  both  types  of  primers 
are  identical.  The  primer  charge  of  the  saluting  primer  consists  of  20 
grains  of  loose  rifle  powder,  held  in  place  by  a  paper  wad  shellacked 
in  the  mouth  of  the  primer  case.  The  "20-grain  saluting  primers" 
are  issued  in  hermetically  sealed  tin  boxes,  25  in  a  box.  The  boxes 
should  not  be  opened  nor  the  cases  primed  until  shortly  before  they 
are  required  for  use. 


20 

The  large  primer-inserting  press  is  provided  for  inserting  both 
types  of  primers,  which  must  be  carefully  pressed,  and  not  hammered, 
into  their  seats  in  the  cartridge  cases.  Special  decapping  tools  are 
also  issued  for  removing  old  primer  cases  from  cartridge  cases  without 
injury  to  the  latter. 

THE   POWDER   CHARGE. 

The  powder  is  a  nitrocellulose  powder  composed  of  multiperforated 
(7  perforations)  cylindrical  grains.  The  charge  varies  slightly  for 
different  lots  of  powder,  but  is  approximately  95  ounces.  The  granu- 
lation is  determined  so  that  the  charge  placed  loosely  in  the  cartridge 
case  will  practically  fill  the  space  in  rear  of  the  projectile.  In  making 
up  the  cartridges  a  brass  diaphragm  is  soldered  in  place  next  to  the 
powder  charge  to  avoid  the  possibility  of  moisture  reaching  the 
powder  charge,  thus  holding  the  powder  charge  in  contact  with  the 
primer.  The  charge  gives  a  muzzle  velocity  of  1,700  feet  per  second, 
with  a  maximum  pressure  in  the  bore  not  exceeding  33,000  pounds 
per  square  inch. 

Service  smokeless  powder  must  not  be  used  for  blank  charges.  For 
that  purpose  the  Ordnance  Department  furnishes  special  powder. 
This  is  at  present  " black  saluting  powder."  Effort  is  being  made  to 
develop  a  smokeless  "maneuver  powder,"  which,  when  used  in  blank 
charges,  will  simulate  the  flash  and  report  of  service  rounds. 

PROJECTILES. 

COMMON    STEEL   SHELL. 

[Plate  III.] 

The  common  steel  shell  is  shown  in  Plate  III.  It  is  provided  with 
an  ogival  head  struck  with  a  radius  of  2  calibers,  and  is  fitted  with  a 
copper  rotating  band  forced  into  an  annular  groove  1.9  inches  from 
the  base. 

Between  the  band  and  the  base  are  cut  three  circumferential 
grooves,  the  front  one  of  which  is  filled  with  material  insuring  a  water- 
proof joint  in  the  assembled  cartridge.  This  groove  and  the  middle 
groove  are  used  as  crimping  grooves.  The  rear  groove,  which  is  some- 
what deeper  than  the  others,  is  to  allow  the  projectile  to  be  readily 
gripped  to  remove  it  from  the  limber  or  caisson  when  it  is  used  for 
separate  loading  ammunition  in  the  4.7-inch  howitzer.  In  assembling 
the  ammunition  the  shell  is  forced  into  the  cartridge  case  up  to  the 
band,  and  the  metal  of  the  cartridge  case  is  then  set  into  the  crimping 
grooves  at  several  points,  securely  fixing  the  projectile  in  the  case. 
The  base  of  the  shell  is  tapped  for  a  base  detonating  fuze,  medium 
caliber,  and  is  fitted  with  a  copper  base  cover  secured  in  the  base  cover 
groove  by  lead  calking  wire.     The  base  cover  consists  of  a  copper 


21 

cover  and  a  lead  disk,  lying  between  the  cover  and  the  projectile. 
This  base  cover  seals  the  joint  between  fuze  and  shell  against  the 
entrance  of  powder  gases  into  the  shell  cavity.  The  latter  contains  a 
bursting  charge  of  3.36  pounds  of  trinitrotoluol.  The  weight  of  the 
shell  with  bursting  charge  and  fuze  is  60  pounds.  The  shell  is  always 
issued  filled  and  fuzed. 

SHRAPNEL. 

iriate  raj 

The  shrapnel  is  a  base-charged  shrapnel  fitted  with  a  combination 
fuze.  The  case  is  of  forged  steel  with  solid  base.  The  rotating  band 
is  forced  into  an  annular  groove  cut  in  the  case  1.9  inches  from  the 
base.  The  front  or  mouth  of  the  case  is  closed  by  a  steel  head, 
screwed  in  and  tapped  to  take  the  service  31-second  combination 
time  and  percussion  fuze.  The  method  of  assembling  the  shrapnel 
to  the  cartridge  case  is  the  same  as  that  described  above  for  the 
common  steel  shell.  The  bursting  charge  is  composed  of  a  charge 
of  loose  black  powder  (9.44  ounces).  The  bursting  charge,  thus 
arranged,  is  covered  by  a  steel  diaphragm.  The  diaphragm  supports 
a  steel  central  tube  which  extends  forward  to  the  fuze,  and  thus 
affords  a  conduit  for  the  flames  from  the  fuze  to  the  bursting  charge. 
At  the  lower  end  of  the  central  tube  a  stopper  of  dry  guncotton  is 
fitted  to  assist  the  ignition  of  the  bursting  charge  and  to  prevent  the 
loose  powder  charge  from  getting  into  the  tube.  Tho  shrapnel  filling 
is  composed  of  711  balls,  each  approximately  230  grains  in  weight. 
The  balls  are  approximately  0.54  inch  in  diameter.  The  balls  are 
poured  around  the  central  tubes  and  rest  upon  the  steel  diaphragm. 
The  interstices  contain  a  smoke-producing  matrix,  the  lower  half  being 
white  naphtha]ene  and  the  upper  half  melted  rosin.  This  matrix,  in 
addition  to  serving  as  a  smoke  producer,  also  assists  to  prevent  defor- 
mation of  the  lead  balls. 

In  action  the  case  is  not  ruptured  upon  the  explosion  of  the  burst- 
ing charge;  the  head  is  stripped  and  the  balls  are  shot  out  of  the  case 
with  an  increase  of  velocity  of  about  275  feet  per  second.  The 
remaining  velocity  of  the  shrapnel  at  9,700  yards  is  approximately 
892  feet  per  second,  and  the  timo  of  flight  31.6  seconds,  so  that  at 
that  range,  with  the  increase  of  velocity  due  to  the  bursting  charge, 
this  shrapnel  with  the  31-second  fuze  is  an  efficient  projectile.  The 
weight  of  the  shrapnel,  with  fuze,  is  60  pounds. 

SEMPLE   TRACER. 

The  Semple  tracer  is  a  brass  tube  about  3  inches  long  0.625  inch 
in  diameter,  tnreaded  at  one  end  in  order  that  it  may  be  readily 
attached  to  the  base  of  the  common  shrapnel,  a  limited  number 
of  which  will  probably  be  tapped  to  receive  the  tracer. 


22 

The  tube  is  filled  with  an  illuminating  composition  and  is  pro- 
vided with  a  percussion  primer  and  a  firing  pin  for  igniting  the 
illuminate.  The  firing  pin  is  driven  into  the  primer  of  the  tracer 
when  the  piece  is  fired  by  the  pressure  of  the  powder  gas.  A  counter 
bore  0.375  inch  in  diameter  and  0.02  inch  deep  and  filled  with  red 
paint  will  be  formed  in  the  base  of  the  cartridge  case  to  show  that 
such  rounds  are  fitted  with  tracers. 

FUZES. 

COMBINATION    FUZES. 

These  fuzes  are  point  fuzes  with  combination  time  and  percussion 
elements  for  use  with  shrapnel.  They  are  of  the  type  known  as  the 
ring  or  "dial"  fuze,  in  which  the  time  train  is  set  by  turning  a  gradu- 
ated ring  which  carries  part  of  the  time  train.  These  fuzes  may  be 
reset  as  often  as  desired. 

FRANKFORD    ARSENAL   COMBINATION    FUZE. 

[Plate  IV.] 

This  fuze  consists  of  the  following  parts,  assembled  as  shown  in  the 
drawing : 

a  Body,  bronze. 

b  Closing  cap,  brass. 

b'  Vents  in  closing  cap. 

b2  Safety  split  pin. 

c   Upper  time-train  ring,  Tobin  bronze. 

cf  Washer  for  time-train  ring,  graduated,  felt  cloth. 

d  Time-train  ring,  graduated,  Tobin  bronze. 

d/  Washer  for  body,  felt  cloth. 

d2  Rotating  pin,  brass. 

e    Concussion  plunger. 

ef  Concussion  resistance  ring,  brass. 

/   Firing  pin,  brass. 

g  Vent  leading  to  upper  time  train. 

h  Compressed  powder  pellet. 

i    Upper  time  train,  compressed  powder. 

j    Compressed  powder  pellet,  in  vent  leading  to  lower  time  train. 

Y  Compressed  powder  pellet  in  lower  time-train  vent. 

h  Lower  time  train,  compressed  powder. 

I    Brass  disk,  crimped  in  place. 

m  Compressed  powder  pellet  in  vent  o. 

o  Vent  leading  to  magazine. 

p  Powder  magazine. 

q  Percussion  plunger. 

r   Percussion  primer. 

8   Vents  leading  from  percussion  primer  to  magazine. 

u  Bottom  closing  screw,  brass. 

v  Washer  for  closing  screw,  muslin. 

w  Washer  for  closing  screw,  brass. 


I 


§ 

^ 


1 


8 
P 


CV4 


* 

I 
1 


23 

The  body  a  of  this  fuze  is  machined  from  a  bronze  casting.  The 
time-train  rings  c  and  d  are  turned  from  hard-rolled  rods  of  Tobin 
bronze.  An  annular  groove  in  the  shape  of  a  horseshoe  is  milled  in 
the  lower  face  of  each  of  the  time-train  rings.  Meal  powder  is  com- 
pressed into  these  grooves  under  pressure  of  51,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,  forming  a  time  train,  the  total  length  of  which  is  12.35 
inches. 

The  time  element  of  this  fuze  is  composed  principally  of  the  follow- 
ing parts:  The  time  or  concussion  plunger  e,  the  concussion  resistance 
ring  ef,  the  firing  pin/,  the  vent  g,  leading  to  the  upper  time  train, 
the  compressed  powder  pellet  h,  the  upper  time  train  i,  the  vent  7, 
the  lower  time  train  k,  the  compressed  powder  pellet  m  in  the  vent 
0,  leading  to  the  powder  magazine  p. 

The  plunger  e  is  cylindrical  in  shape  and  contains  the  percussion 
composition  in  a  recess  at  its  base.  The  weight  of  the  plunger  rests 
upon  the  concussion-resistance  ring  e',  which  keeps  the  primer  from 
contact  with  the  firing  pin.  At  discharge  of  the  gun  the  resistance 
of  the  ring  is  overcome  and  the  primer  is  exploded  by  contact  with 
the  firing  pin. 

As  stated  above,  the  annular  grooves  into  which  the  meal  powder 
of  the  time  train  is  pressed  are  in  the  shape  of  a  horseshoe,  a  solid 
portion  being  left  between  the  ends  of  the  groove  in  each  ring  or 
disk. 

The  upper  time-train  ring  c  is  prevented  from  rotating  by  the  pins 
x,  which  are  halved  into  the  fuze  body  and  the  inner  c i re n inference 
of  the  ring. 

The  vent  g  is  drilled  through  the  walls  of  the  concussion-plunger 
chamber,  and  is  exactly  opposite  a  hole  in  the  inner  surface  of  the 
upper  time  train  leading  to  the  end  of  the  train  from  which  the 
direction  of  burning  is  anticlockwise. 

The  hole  j  is  drilled  through  the  upper  face  of  the  lower  time-train 
ring  d  to  the  end  of  the  lower  time-train  groove,  front  which  the 
direction  of  burning  is  clockwise.  The  lower  time-train  ring  is 
movable  and  is  graduated  on  its  outer  edge  in  a  clockwise  direction 
from  0  to  31.6;  these  divisions  are  subdivided  into  five  equal  parts. 
A  radial  pin  d2  is  provided  in  the  lower  ring  for  engagement  with  a 
notch  in  the  fuze  setter  for  setting  the  fuze.  A  line  on  the  lower 
flange  of  the  fuze  stock  is  the  datum  line  for  fuze  settings. 

The  vent  0  is  drilled  through  the  flange  of  the  fuze  stock  to  the 
powder  magazine  p,  and  leads  to  the  same  end  of  the  lower  time  train 
as  the  vent  j — that  end  from  which  the  direction  of  burning  is  clock- 
wise— when  the  fuze  is  at  its  "zero"  setting. 

The  action  of  the  fuze  as  a  time  fuze  is  as  follows : 

Assume  first  the  "zero"  setting  as  shown  on  the  figure.  At  dis- 
charge of  the  gun  the  concussion  plunger  arms  and  fires  its  primer. 


24 

The  flame  from  the  primer  passes  out  through  the  vent  g,  igniting 
the  pellet  h,  the  end  of  the  upper  time  train  i,  down  through  the  vent  j, 
to  the  end  of  the  lower  time  train  k,  and  thence  through  the  vent  o 
to  the  magazine  p,  the  flame  from  which  is  transmitted  to  the  base 
charge  in  the  shrapnel.  It  will  be  seen  that  for  the  "zero"  setting 
of  the  fuze  the  origin  of  both  upper  and  lower  time  trains  are  in 
juxtaposition.  Assume  any  other  setting,  say  twelve  seconds:  The 
vent  j  has  now  changed  its  position  with  respect  to  the  vent  h,  lead- 
ing to  the  beginning  of  the  upper  time  train  and  the  vent  o,  leading 
to  the  powder  magazine  p,  both  of  which  points  are  fixed  by  the  angle 
subtended  between  the  0  and  the  12  settings.  The  flame  now 
passes  out  through  vent  g  and  burns  along  the  upper  time  train 
in  an  anticlockwise  direction  until  the  vent  j  is  reached,  where  it 
passes  down  to  the  beginning  of  the  lower  time  train  and  burns  back 
in  a  clockwise  direction  to  the  position  of  the  vent  o,  whence  it  is 
transmitted  by  the  pellet  of  compressed  powder  m  to  the  powder 
magazine  p. 

For  the  31.6-second  setting  the  vent  j,  leading  to  the  beginning  of 
the  lower  time  train,  is  opposite  the  end  of  the  upper  time  train  and  the 
end  of  the  lower  time  train  is  opposite  the  vent  o,  leading  to  the 
powder  magazine.  It  will  now  be  seen  that  to  reach  the  magazine 
p  and  burst  the  shrapnel  the  entire  length  of  time  train  in  both  rings 
must  be  burned. 

As  already  stated,  the  annular  grooves  in  the  lower  face  of  each 
ring  for  the  powder  trains  do  not  form  complete  circles,  a  solid  por- 
tion being  left  between  the  ends  of  the  grooves  in  each.  This  solid 
portion  is  utilized  to  obtain  a  setting  at  which  the  fuze  can  not  be 
exploded,  known  as  the  "  safety  point.". 

This  point  is  marked  by  a  line  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  movable 
time  train,  surmounted  by  an  "S"  and  is  located  about  halfway 
between  the  zero  mark  and  the  31.6-second  graduation.  When  this 
point  is  brought  opposite  the  line  on  the  lower  flange  of  the  fuze 
body  the  vent  j  is  covered  by  the  solid  metal  between  the  ends  of  the 
upper  train,  and  the  vent  o,  leading  to  the  powder  magazine  p,  is 
covered  by  the  solid  metal  between  the  ends  of  the  lower  or  movable 
time  train. 

At  the  safety  setting  it  will  be  seen  that  the  upper  train  may  burn 
entirely  out  in  case  of  accidental  firing  of  the  time  plunger,  or  in 
case  it  may  be  desired  to  burst  the  shrapnel  by  impact  or  percussion, 
without  the  flame  being  able  to  reach  the  magazine  p. 

The  cloth  washers  c'  and  d'  are  glued  to  the  upper  face  of  the 
graduated  time-train  ring  and  to  the  upper  face  of  the  flange  on  the 
fuze  stock.  These  surfaces  are  corrugated,  as  shown,  to  make  the 
washers  adhere  more  strongly.  The  function  of  the  washers  is  to 
make  a  gas  check  and  prevent  premature  action  of  the  fuzes. 


25 

The  compressed  pellet  /',  in  the  vent  leading  from  the  outside  to 
the  beginning  of  the  lower  time  train,  is  to  release  the  pressure  of  the 
gases  due  to  the  burning  train.  The  gases  from  both  time  trains 
escape  into  the  outer  air  through  the  annular  spaces  shown  in  the 
illustration  and  the  vents  b'  in  the  closing  cap. 

The  percussion  element  of  this  fuze  as  shown  in  the  plate  consists 
of  a  centrifugal  percussion  plunger  q  and  an  ordinary  percussion 
primer  r. 

The  centrifugal  plunger  (1)  is  provided  with  a  slot  to  receive  the 
firing  pin  (2),  which  is  mounted  on  a  fulcrum  (3)  and  kept  in  the 
unarmed  position  by  two  safety  pins  (4)  in  recesses  on  opposite  sides 
of  the  plunger  and  held  in  the  hole  in  the  firing  pin  by  the  tension 
of  the  springs  (5).  These  springs  are  designed  to  suit  the  velocity 
of  rotation  of  the  particular  projectile  in  which  the  fuze  is  used.  The 
centrifugal  force  due  to  the  rotation  of  the  projectile  forces  the  pins 
outward  against  the  tension  of  the  springs  and  releases  the  firing  pin, 
which  is  rotated  by  the  same  centrifugal  force  into  its  armed  position. 
The  entire  plunger  and  housing  is  hold  to  the  rear  by  two  spring 
housings  (6).  These  hold  the  plunger  and  pin  away  from  the  primer 
during  handling,  transportation,  and  flight. 

The  system  of  vents  through  the  walls  of  the  fuze  shown  in  figure 
3  conduct  the  flame  from  the  percussion  primer  to  the  magazine  p. 

The  bottom  closing  screw  closes  the  percussion-plunger  recess  and 
keeps  the  powder  in  the  magazine.  The  muslin  washer  v  is  coated 
with  shellac  and  held  in  place  by  the  brass  washer  w,  over  the  outer 
edge  of  which  a  projecting  lip  is  crimped. 

These  fuzes  are  issued  assembled  in  shrapnel.  For  transportation 
in  limbers  and  caissons  the  fuze  should  always  be  set  at  the  safety 
point. 

The  fuze  is  provided  with  a  waterproof  hood  of  thin  brass,  her- 
metically sealed.  The  hood  should  bo  stripped  off  before  an  attempt 
is  made  to  set  the  fuze.  Remove  the  safety  wire  before  sotting  the 
fuze,  and  if  the  round  is  not  fired  the  safety  wire  should  bo  replaced. 
If  the  safety  wire  can  not  be  replaced  the  round  should  not  bo  carried 
in  ammunition  chests  or  roughly  handled  and  should  be  fired  at 
the  next  firing.  &  £J 

BASE   DETONATING   FUZE. 

The  base  of  the  shell  is  tapped  for  the  medium  caliber  base  detonat- 
ing fuze.  The  percussion  plungor  of  which  is  similar  to  that  used 
in  the  combination  fuze.  Under  no  conditions  should  this  fuze  be 
disassembled  when  recovered  in  unexploded  shell,  as  fatal  accidents 
are  known  to  have  occurred  by  so  doing. 
10161—17 3* 


26 

MARKING   OF  AMMUNITION   PACKING   BOXES. 

Both  ends  and  sides  of  the  box  are  marked  with  conspicuous 
characters  to  facilitate  the  rapid  identification  of  the  ammunition 
contained  therein.  The  conspicuous  marking  consists  of  the  following 
symbols : 


4.7  G* 


The  shell  and  flame  are  always  in  red  for  mobile  artillery  ammuni- 
tion. 

The  numeral  "4.7"  refers  to  the  caliber,  and  the  letter  UG" 
differentiates  ammunition  for  the  4.7-inch  gun  from  ammunition  for 
the  4.7-inch  howitzer.  The  numeral  " 4.7"  and  the  letter  "G"  are  in 
yellow  for  shrapnel  and  black  for  high  explosive  shell. 

The  star  when  present  in  the  conspicuous  marking  indicates  that 
the  projectiles  are  provided  with  tracers.  A  red  star  indicates  a 
night  tracer  and  a  black  star  a  day  tracer. 

In  addition  to  the  conspicuous  marking  the  quantity  and  type 
of  ammunition  are  indicated  without  symbols  by  the  marking 
"1  fixed  common  shrapnel,"  etc.,  so  that  in  case  one  is  not  familiar 
with  the  conspicuous  marking  system  he  can  immediately  ascer- 
tain the  key  by  this  additional  marking.  Similarly  the  word  "Tracer" 
is  added  in  amplification  of  the  star  symbol. 

Also  on  both  ends  of  the  box  the  word  "Lot"  followed  by  a  number 
appears.  This  refers  to  the  ammunition  lot,  and  in  case  of  any 
trouble  arising  with  regard  to  the  functioning  of  the  ammunition 
this  lot  number  should  be  quoted  in  the  report. 

On  the  sides  of  the  box  similar  markings  are  found  accompanied 
by  a  pictorial  stenciled  symbol  indicating  the  type  of  projectile,  the 
tracers,  and  the  fact  that  the  ammunition  is  fixed. 

For  blank  ammunition  when  packed  assembled,  the  numeral 
"4.7"  and  the  letter  "G"  are  in  blue. 

ALLOWANCE   OF  AMMUNITION. 

Shell  and  shrapnel  ammunition  is  issued  by  the  Ordnance  Depart- 
ment in  moisture-proof  boxes  having  a  zinc  lining,  hermetically 
sealed,  each  box  containing  one  round.  A  load  for  a  four-mule 
Army  wagon  varies  from  23  to  28  boxes,  and  for  a  six-mule  wagon 
from  32  to  37  boxes,  depending  upon  the  condition  of  the  roads. 

The  annual  allowance  of  ammunition  for  the  instruction  of  Field 
Artillery  is  prescribed  from  time  to  time  in  War  Department  orders. 
These  orders  give  full  information  as  to  the  allowance  of  fixed  and 
blank  ammunition  for  the  4.7-inch  guns,  drill  cartridges,  subcaliber 
cartridges,  revolvers  and  shotguns  and  care  of  the  same,  disposition 
«>f  empty  s!'olK  etc. 


ov 


27 

BLANK    AMMUNITION. 

Blank  metallic  ammunition  is  for  uae  in  salute  firing,  morning  and 
ening  gun  firing,  maneuver  firing,  etc.,  and  consists  of  the  following 

components:  A  brass  cartridge  case,  a  percussion  primer,  a  charge  of 

black  powder,  and  a  tight-fitting  felt  wad. 

THE    CARTRIDGE    CASE. 

The  cartridge  case  for  blank  ammunition  for  the  4.7-inch  gun 
is  identical  with  the  service  cartridge  case. 

Cartridge  cases  are  issued  unprimed  and  primers  should  not  be 
inserted  until  the  ammunition  is  to  be  prepared  for  use. 

Cartridge  cases  that  have  become  deformed  in  service  should  be 
turned  in  to  the  post  or  arsenals  designated  in  current  orders  for 
resizing  and  re-forming. 

THE    PRIMER. 

The  saluting  primer  (percussion)  is  used  in  the  preparation  of 
blank  metallic  ammunition  for  the  4.7-inch  gun.  The  primer 
should  be  a  tight  fit  in  the  primer  seat  in  the  cartridge  case,  and  must 
be  pressed  into  place  with  the  primer-inserting  press  provided  for  the 
purpose,  and  not  hammered  in.  No  primer  should  be  used  that  is 
not  a  tight  fit  in  its  seat  in  the  case. 

Cartridge  cases  should  be  primed  just  before  the  insertion  of  the 
powder  charge,  and  under  no  circumstances  will  primers  be  inserted 
after  the  powder  charge  has  been  inserted. 

Primers  are  issued  in  hermetically  sealed  tin  boxes,  which  should 
not  be  broken  open  until  the  primers  are  to  be  used,  as  they  deterio- 
rate when  exposed  to  atmospheric  influences. 

THE   CHARGE. 

The  charge  to  be  used  in  the  preparation  of  blank  metallic  ammu- 
nition for  the  4.7-inch  gun  is  1J  pounds  of  saluting  powder. 

PREPARATION   OF   BLANK   METALLIC   AMMUNITION. 

Blank  metallic  ammunition  will  be  assembled  at  posts  or  in  the 
field  under  the  personal  supervision  of  a  commissioned  officer,  who 
will  be  held  responsible  that  it  is  prepared  in  the  manner  prescribed 
in  current  orders.  For  detailed  information  and  instructions  for  the 
preparation  of  blank  ammunition,  see  O.  O.  pamphlet  No.  1658. 

For  this  purpose  there  are  issued  cartridge  cases,  saluting  powder 
in  bulk,  tight-fitting  felt  wads,  rubberine,  or  other  quick-drying 
paint,  primers,  and  reloading  and  cleaning  outfits. 

Before  assembling  the  cartridge  cases  should  be  carefully  inspected 
to  see  that  they  are  in  sound  condition  and  thoroughly  clean  and  dry. 


28 

They  should  also  be  tested  by  trying  them  in  the  gun,  to  aetermine 
whether  they  have  become  deformed.  Any  cases  that  do  not  readily 
enter  the  chamber  in  the  gun  or  that  are  otherwise  seriously  deformed 
should  be  laid  aside  for  resizing.  After  inspecting  the  cartridge  cases 
the  blank  ammunition  should  be  prepared  as  follows: 

(a)  Insert  the  primers  with  the  primer-inserting  press. 

(b)  Pour  into  the  cartridge  case  the  proper  weight  of  black  saluting 
powder  and  shake  it  down  well. 

(c)  Insert  the  felt  wad  and  press  it  down  hard  until  it  rests  squarely 
on  the  powder  charge. 

(d)  Give  the  upper  surface  of  the  felt  wad  and  the  inside  of  the 
cartridge  case  just  above  the  wad  a  good  coat  of  the  rubberine  or 
other  quick-drying  paint  furnished  for  the  purpose,  using  a  brush, 
and  allow  the  case  to  stand  until  this  coat  is  dry.  Then  apply  another 
coat  of  rubberine  paint  in  a  similar  manner.  The  object  of  using 
rubberine  paint,  which  is  strongly  adhesive,  is  to  thoroughly  seal  the 
joint  between  the  wad  and  the  case  to  prevent  any  powder  grains 
from  leaking  out,  and  at  the  same  time  to  firmly  hold  the  wad  in 
place.  Care  should  be  taken  that  no  paint  gets  into  the  powder 
charge,  as  it  may  form  a  mixture  which  will  burn  rather  than  explode 
and  may  ignite  the  next  round,  causing  a  premature  explosion. 

PRECAUTIONS jTOjBE  OBSERVED. 

Firings  with  blank  metallic  ammunition  will  be  greatly  facilitated 
by  a  careful  observance  of  the  following: 

Before  all  firings  a  careful  examination  should  be  made  of  the 
assembled  rounds  to  see  that  the  felt  wads  have  not  become  displaced 
or  the  cartridge  cases  dented  or  deformed  by  careless  handling.  If 
the  cartridge  cases  have  been  properly  resized  and  are  clean,  no  diffi- 
culty should  be  experienced  in  inserting  them  in  the  gun,  provided 
the  chamber  of  the  latter  is  clean.  The  continued  insertion  of  car- 
tridge cases  that  are  not  clean  causes  an  accumulation  in  the  gun 
chamber  which  may  make  the  insertion  of  subsequent  rounds  difficult 
or  impossible. 

In  firing  blank  ammunition  the  gun  chamber  will  be  sponged  after 
each  round  with  a  damp  sponge,  to  extinguish  sparks  and  remove 
powder  residue  resulting  from  the  previous  round,  before  the  inser- 
tion of  another  round. 

Care  will  be  taken  to  see  that  the  sponges  are  not  worn  and  that 
they  thoroughly  fit  the  chamber.  The  interval  between  rounds  in 
firing  blank  ammunition  should  be  sufficient  to  allow  thorough 
sponging  of  the  chamber  and  examination  to  ascertain  that  all  sparks 
have  been  extinguished. 

Wads  for  the  preparation  of  blank  metallic  ammunition  are  made 
to  tightly  fit  in  the  cartridge  case.  No  wads  should  be  used  that  are 
not  a  tight  fit  in  the  case. 


29 


CARE    OF   CARTRIDGE    CASES. 


As  soon  after  firing  as  practicable  the  fired  primers  should  be 
removed  from  the  cartridge  case  by  means  of  the  decapping  tool  fur- 
nished with  the  reloading  outfit.  The  case  should  be  thoroughly 
washed  in  a  strong  solution  of  lye  or  soft  soap  to  remove  all  powder 
residue.  It  should  then  be  thoroughly  rinsed  and  dried  and  lightly 
oiled. 

If  the  cartridge  cases  are  carefully  cleaned  and  washed  immediately 
after  firing,  not  only  will  less  labor  be  required  but  the  life  of  the 
cases  will  be  greatly  prolonged. 

A  good  solution  for  washing  cartridge  cases  may  be  prepared  by 
using  ingredients  in  the  following  proportions : 

1  gallon  of  water. 
2\  ounces  soft  soap. 
5}  ounces  soda. 

The  mixture  should  be  boiled  and  stirred  until  the  ingredients  are 
entirely  dissolved. 

In  washing  cartridge  cases  this  solution  should  be  used  hot  and  in 
sufficient  quantity  to  completely  immerse  the  cases. 

Primers  that  misfire  should  be  turned  in  with  the  cases  to  the 
ordnance  establishment  prescribed  in  the  target-practice  order. 

Resizing  of  cartridge  cases. — The  resizing  of  4.7-inch  cartridge 
cases  that  have  become  deformed  in  service  is  done  at  designated 
ordnance  establishments. 


Range  table  for  th*  4.7-inch  gun. 
IShell  and  shrapnel,  weight  60  pounds.    M.  V.— 1,700  feet  per  second.] 


1 

2 

S 

4         5 

6 

7 

8 

• 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

16 

It 

« 

E 

+3 
.2 

5 

o         o 

v.       H 

1. 

a* 

1. 
"3 
1 

£ 

3 
§ 

3 

i 

n 

o   . 

il 

11 

! 

■ 

I 

i 

i 

B 

1 
> 

•a 

a 

i 
it 

3 

d 

I 

•3 
1 

a 

> 

Yds. 
100 
200 
300 
400 
500 
600 
700 
800 
900 

1,000 

1,100 
1,200 
1,300 
1,400 
1,500 
1,600 
1,700 
1,800 
1.900 
2,000 

e          / 

0    00.0 
0      5.5 
0    11.1 
0    17.0 
0    23.1 
0    29.4 
0    35.8 
0    42.5 
0    49.4 

0  56.4 

1  3.5 
1    10.6 
1     17.7 
1     24.9 
1    32.1 
1    39.4 
1    46.8 

1  54.3 

2  1.8 
2      9.3 

Yds. 
18.2 
17.9 
H.6 
17.3 
17.0 
16.7 
16.4 
16.1 
15.9 
15.6 

15.3 
15.0 
14.7 
14.5 
14.2 
13.9 
13.6 
13.4 
13.1 
12.8 

Yds.   Yds. 
1.2     0.1 
2.4       .2 
3.6       .3 

4.8  .4 

5.9  .o 

7.0  .6 

8.1  .7 
9.1        .8 

10.1       .9 

11.1  1.0 

12.  ol     1.2 

12.9     1.4 
13.8     1.7 
14.7     2.0 
15.6     2.3 
16.5     2.7 
17.4     3.1 
18.3     3.6 

19.2  4.2 
20.0     4.8 

Yds. 

0.1 

.3 

.6 

1.5 
2.2 
3.1 
4.2 
5.5 
7.0 

8.8 
10.8 
13.0 
15.4 
18.0 
20.7 
23.5 
26.4 
29.3 
32.3 

Stcs. 

0.18 

.36 

.54 

.72 

.91 

1.10 

1.24 

1.48 

1.67 

1.87 

2.07 
2.27 
2.47 
2.68 
2.89 
3.10 
3.31 
3. 53 
3.75 
3.98 

Dies. 

0.3 

.4 

:S 

1.0 
1.3 

1.6 
1.9 
2.2 
2.5 

2.8 
3.1 
3.4 
3.7 
4.0 
4.2 
4.5 
4.8 
5.1 
5.4 

mis. 

0.1 

'.2 
.3 
.4 
.4 
.5 
.6 
.7 
.7 

.8 
.9 
1.0 
1.1 
1.2 
1.3 
1.4 
1.5 
1.6 
1.7 

mis. 
0.1 
.1 
.2 
.2 
.3 
.3 
.4 
.4 
.5 
.5 

.6 
.6 
.7 
.7 
.8 
.8 
.9 
1.0 
1.0 

e        / 

0    5.4 
0  10.9 
0  16.6 
0  22.5 
0  28.6 
0.34.9 
0  41.4 
0  48.1 

0  55.0 

1  2.1 

1    9.2 
1  16.3 
1  23.5 
1  30.7 
1  38.0 
I  45.3 

1  52.7 

2  0.2 
2    7.7 
2  15.3 

/  on— 
565 
282 

187 

F.S. 
1,681 
1,662 
1,644 

Ft. 
1.4 
2.8 
4.2 
5.6 
7.0 
8.4 
9.8 
11.2 
12.6 
14.0 

17 
21 
25 
30 
35 
40 
45 
51 
57 
64 

139 

1.62.1 

1101.607 

91 

77 
66 
58 

1,588 
1,570 
l,5o2 
1.53.-> 





ol|l,ol7 

46!  1,499 
411,481 
37  1,464 
341,447 
321,430 
291,413 
27  1,396 
251,379 
231,363 
221,347 

3.43 

0.7820 

3.37 

.8049 

30 


Range  table  for  the  j. 7-inch  gun — Continued. 

IShell  and  shrapnel,  weight  80  pounds.    M.  V. =  1,700  feet  per  second.] 


c§ 


tC       '       ZZ 


Yds.  ° 
2,100  2 
2,200  2 
2,300  2 
2,400,  2 
2,500  2 
2,600;  2 
2,7O0|  3 
2,800  3 


31 


c  <* 
X 


2,900i  3 
3,000  3 

3.1001 

3,200 
3,300 
3,400; 
3,500 
3,600 
3,700 
3,800 
3,900 
4,000 

4,100 
4,200 
4,300 
4,400 
4,500 
4,600 
4,700 
4,800 
4,900 
5,000 


5,100  7 

5,200  7 

5,300  8 

5,400  8 

5,500  8 

5,600  8 

5,700  9 

5,800  9 

5,900  9 

6,000  9 

6,10010 
6,20010 
6,30010 
6,40010 
6,50011 
6,60011 
6,700  11 
6,80011 
6,900  12 
7,00012 

7,10012 

7,20012 
7,300  13 
7,40013 
7,50013 
7,60014 
7,70014 
7,80014 
7,900  14 
8,00015 


17.1 
25.1 
33.2 
41.6 
50.2 
59.0 
7.9 
17.2 
26.7 
36.3 

46.1 
56.0 

5.9 
16.0 
26.3 
36.8 
47.5 
58.5 

9.7 
21.1 

32.7 
44.4 
56.3 
8.3 
20.6 
33.0 
45.5 
58.2 
11.1 
24.2 

37.4 
51.0 

4.9 
19.0 
33.5 
48.2 

3.1 
18.1 
33.4 
48.9 

4.4 
20.0 
35.6 
51.1 

6.7 
22.3 
37.9 
53.4 

9.0 
24.6 

40.1 
55.9 
11.9 
28.1 
44.4 
1.0 
17.9 
35.0 
52.5 
10.3 


Yds. 
12.5 
12.3 
12.0 
11.7 
11.4 
11.2 
10.9 
10.7 
10.4 
10.2 

10.0 
9.8 
9.6 
9.5 
9.3 
9.2 
9.0 
8.9 
8.8 
8.6 

8.5 

8.4 

8.3 

8.2 

8.1 

8.0 

7.9 

7. 

7.7 

7 

7.5 
7.4 
7.3 
7.2 
7.2 
7.1 
7.0 
7.0 
6.9 
6.8 

6.8 
6.7 
6.6 
6.6 
6.5 
6.5 
6.4 
6.4 
6.3 
6.3 

6.2 

6.2 

6 

6 

6.0 

6.0 

5.9 

6.9 

5.8 

6.8 


o 


Yds 
20.8 
21.6 
22.4 
23.2 
24.0 
24.8 
25. 
26.3 
27.0 
27.7 

28.4 
29.0 
29.6 
30.2 
30.7 
31.2 
31.7 
32.2 
32.7 


33.6 

34 

34.6 

35.0 

35.4 

35.8 

36.2 

36.6 

37.0 

37.4 


B-3        R. 


~ 


I 


Yds. 

5.5 

6.2 

6.9 

7.6 

8.4 

9.2 

10.1 

11.0 

11.9, 

12.9 

14.0 
15.2 
6.4 
17.7i 
19.0 
20.3 
21.7 
23.1 
24.5 
26.0 

27.5 
29.0 
30.5 
32.1 
33.7 
35.3 
36.9 
38.6 
40.3 
42.0 


37.7  43.7 

38.0  45.3 
38.3  47.0 
38.6  48.7 
38.9  50.4 

39.2  52.1 

39.5  53.9 

39.8  55.7 

40.1  57.5 

40.3  59.3 

40.6  61.1 

40.9  63.0 

41.2  64.9 


41.5 
41.9 
42.2 
42.5 
42.8 
43.1 
43.4 


66.9 
68.9 
70.9 
73.0 
75.2 
77.4 
79.5 


43.7  81.7 
44.0  83.9 
44.3  86.1 
44.6  88.4 
44.9!  90.7 
45.21  93.0 
45.5!  95.3 

45.8  97.71 
46.2  100.1 
46.4102.6 


Yds. 
35.4 
38.6J 
41.8! 
45.0 
48.3 
51.6 
55.0 
58.5 
62.0 
65.6 

69.2 
72.8 
76.5 
80.2 
84.0 
87.8 
91.7 
95.7 
99.7 
103.8 

107.8 
111.8 
115.8 
119.9 
124.0 
128.2 
132.4 
136.6 
140.9 
145.2 

149.5 
153.8 
158.1 
162.4 
166.7 
171.0 
175.3 
179.6 
183.8 
188.0 

192.2 
196.4 
200.6 
204.7 
208.8 
212.9 
217.0 
221.1 
225.2 
229.3 

233.4 
237.5 
241.6 
245.7 
249.8 
253.9 
257.9 
261.9 
265.9 
269.9 


Sees. 
4.21 
4.44 
4.67, 
4.91! 
5.15! 
5.39 
5.63i 
5.88 
6.13 


6.64 

6.90 

7.16 

7.42 

7. 

7. 

8.23 

8.51 


Divs 
5.7 
6.0 
6.3 
6.6 
6.9 
7.2 
7.5 
7.8 
8.1 
8.4 

8  7; 
9.0 


10.0 
10.3; 
10.6 
10.9 
11.3 
11.6 


11.9 
12.2 
9.95]  12. 6j 
10.24  12.9 
10.531  13.2 


2 


10.82 
11.12! 
11.42 
11.73 


13.5 
13.9 
14.2 
14.5! 


12.04   14.9 


15.9! 
16.2 
16.6 
16.9! 
17.3 


12.36  15.2, 

12.68  15.6;, 

13.00! 

13.32! 

13.65 

13.98 

14.31 

14.64  17.6 
14.97  18.0 
15.30  18.3 

15.63  18.6 

15.96  19.  Oj 

16.29  19.3 

16.63  19.7! 

16.971  20.0 

17. 3l!  20.4 

17.65  20.7 
18.00  21.1 
18.35  21.4 
18.70  21.8 

19.05  22.1 

19.40  22.5 

19.75  22.8 

20.10  23.2 

20.45,  23.5 

20.81  23.9 

21.17  24.2 

21.53  24.6 

21.89  25.0 

22.25  25.3 


9 

10 

^•o 

hi 

af! 

IE 

\- 

S£ 

•c 

<u  a 

u 

Mils. 

Mils. 

1.8 

1.2 

1.9 

1.2 

2.0 

1.3 

2.1 

1.4 

2.2 

1.4 

2.3 

1.5 

2.4 

1.6 

2.6 

1.7 

2.7 

1.8 

2.8 

1.8 

3.0 

1.9 

3.1 

1.9 

3.3 

2.0 

3.4 

2.1 

3.6 

2.2 

3.7 

2.2 

3.9 

2.3 

4.0 

2.3 

4.2 

2.4 

4.4 

2.5 

4.5 

2.5 

4.7 

2.6 

4.9 

2.7 

5.0 

2.7 

5.2 

2.8 

5.4 

2.9 

5.6 

2.9 

5.7 

3.0 

5.9 

3.1 

6.1 

3.1 

6.3 

3.2 

6.5 

3.3 

6.7 

3.3 

6.9 

3.4 

7.2 

3.4 

7.4 

3.5 

7.6 

3.6 

7.8 

3.6 

8.0 

3.7 

8.3 

3.8 

8.5 

3.8 

8.8 

3.9 

9.0 

3.9 

9.2 

4.0 

9.5 

4.0 

9.7 

4.1 

9.9 

4.1 

10.2 

4.2 

10.4 

4.2 

10.7 

4.3 

10.9 

4.3 

11.2 

4.3 

11.4 

4.4 

11.7 

4.4 

11.9 

4.5 

12.2 

4.5 

12.5 

4.5 

12.7 

4.6 

13.0 

4.6 

13.2 

4.6 

11 


12       IS 


c  3  ~ 

+*  O 

"So  &. 

(=  2 


It 


15 


1,187 
1,175 
1,163 
1,151 


7.41,085 
7.21,077 
6. 91 1,069 
6.61,061 
6.4  1,054 
6.21,047 
6.01,040 
5.7  1,034 
5.6  1,027 
5.4  1,021 

5. 2J  1,015 
5.01,009 
4.9,1,003 

4.7!  997 
4.6i     I 


931 
929 


358, . 
381. 
405! . 
430. 
456! . 
482!. 


630 


1,414 


1,527 
1,585 
1,644 
1,704 
1,766 
1,828 
1,:  " 

1,956 
2,020 
2,084 


3.19 


3.15 


985 
979 
974 


964       976     3 


1,064 
1,110 
1,157 
1,206 
1,256 
1,307 


3.13 


31 

Range  table  for  the  4-7-inch  gun — Continued. 
[Shell  and  shrapnel,  weight  60  pounds.    M.  V.— 1,700  feet  per  second.] 


•si 


Y<ls.  :  ° 
8.10015 
8,200,15 
8. 300, 16 
8,40016 
8,500,16 

8,eraie 

8,700  17 
8,800,17 
8,90017 
9,000il8 

l),  100  IS 
9,20018 
9,300  19 
9,400  19 
9,500,19 
9,600  20 
9,700  20 
9,800  20 
9,900  21 
10,000.21 

10,100  22 
10,200  22 
10,300  22 
10,400  23 
10,500:23 
10,600)24 
10,700  24 
10,800  25 
10,90026 
11,000  2.-) 


J      2 


28. 2|     5.7 


1* 


S5B    1  - 


46.1 
4.1 
22.2 
40.3 
58.4 
16.6 
34.8 
53.3 
12.0 

31.0 
50.4 
10.2 
30.4 
51.1 
12.2 
33.8 
55.8, 
18.2! 
41.0 

4.3 
28.0 
52.1 
16.  7 
41.7 

7.2 
33.1 
18.7 

53.3 


5.6 
5.6 

5.5 
5.5 

5.4 
5.3 

,2 
if 

4.5 
4.4 

4.3 
4.2 
t  1 
4.1 
4.0 

3.8 
3.7 
3.7 


46.  7  105.  1 
47.1107.7 
47.4  110.3 
47.8113.0 
48.1  115.8 

48.  5  118.  «i 
48.8  121.5 

49.1  121.5 
49.5127.4 

49.  8  130.  4; 

50.11133.5' 

51.0  142. 91 

51.3  145.0 
51.6148.1 
51.8151.2 
52.0154.3, 
52.2157.4 

52.4  ieo.fi 

52.  7  163. 6 

53.2  170.1 
53.4178.5 
53.7  177.0 
53.9180.6 
54.2184.3' 
54,  1188.1 
54.7101.9 


273.  9 
277.9 
281.9 
286.0 
290.1 
294.2 
298.3 
302.4 
808.  6 
310.8 

315.0 
319.3 
323.6 
327.9 
332.2 

340.8 
845.  1 

349.4 
353.7 

357.9 

370.  7 
875.0 

393.2 
808.  S 


30.24  . 

32.06. 

33.02;. 
33.  51  . 
84.00L 

35.00. 


10         11 


12        13       14 


Din. 

22.62  25.7 

22.99  26.1 

23  36  26.4 

23.73  26.8 

24.10  27.1 

-  27.5 

24.86  27.9 

25.25  28.3 

25.64  28.6 

26.04  29.0 

26.44  29.4 

26.84  29.7 

27.25  30.1 
30.5 
28.0s 
28.50 
28.93 


sf 
si 


S  I  3    I  — 


Mils 
13.5 
13.7 
14.0 
14.3 
14.0 
11.0 
15.2 
15.5 
15.8 
10.  1 

16.4 
16.7 

17.1 
17.  4 
17.8 
18.1 
18.5 
18.8 
19.2 
19.5 


1 

If 
i 


18 


19.9 
20.3 
20.8 
21.2 

22.1 
22.5 
23.0 
21.4 
23.9 


Mil* 

4.715 

4.7  15 
4.  7  16 

4.  8  16 

4. 8  16 
I.S17 

4.9  17 
4.917 

4.0  1S 
5.018 

5.018 
5.018 

5.1  19 
5.1  19 
5.219 
5.320 

5.3  20 

5.4  21 

5.4  21 

5.5  21 

5.522 

5.6  22 
5.623 

5.7  23 

5.7  23 

5.8  24 

5.8  24 

5.9  25 
5.9  25 
6.026 


35. 9 

11.') 
30.0 
48.1 

6.3 
24.5 
42.8 

1.8 
20.0 


2.  1 

2.  a 

2.  8 

2.2 
2.2 
2.1 
2.1 

2.0 
2.0 
2.  0 


007  2,157 

004  2.3'Hi 

903  2.3S2 

902  2,461 

901  2,541 

900  2,624 

899  2,707 

898  2,790 

897  2,875 


1.9 

895  2.963 

58.4 

1.9 

894  3,053 

18.2 

1.8 

893  3,146 

38.4 

1.8 

893  3,241 

1.8 

892   3,339 

20.2 

1.7 

892   3,440 

41.8 

1.7 

892   3,544 

3.8 

1.7 

892   3,651 

l.i. 

892  3,700 

49.0 

1.6 

892  3,872 

12.3 

1.6 

892   3,987 

0.1 

1.5 

892   4,107 

1.5 

893   4,231 

24.7 

1.5 

893   4,360 

49.7| 

1.5 

894   4,493 

15.2 

1.4 

894   4,631 

11.  1 

1.4 

895  4,773 

1.4 

896   4,920 

34.11 

1.3 

897   5,071 

1.3 

897   5,227 

Class  27,  Div.  23,  drg.  5. 

THE  HAND  FUZE   SETTER,   MODEL  OF   1913. 

[Plate  V.] 

INSCRIPTION. 


16 


(*]& 
« 


3.35  0.8105 


8.48   .7860 


8.88  .7680 


The  fuze  setter  is  a  device  provided  for  the  rapid  and  accurate 
setting  of  fuzes. 

The  hand  fuze  setter  provided  for  the  4.7-inch  gun  consists  prin- 
cipally of  an  aluminum  case  having  a  serrated  rim  forming  a  handle 
for  turning;  a  range  ring  mounted  on  the  range-ring  carrier  which 
is  operated  by  the  knob  on  the  range  worm;  a  corrector  scale  mounted 
on  the  corrector-scale  support,  which  is  operated  by  the  knob  on  the 
corrector  worm  and  a  guide  plate  which  rests  on  the  projectile. 

A  slot  is  cut  in  the  range-ring  carrier,  which  engages  with  the  pin 
on  the  graduated  time  train  ring  of  the  fuze.  A  stop  pin  is  attached 
to  the  corrector-scale  support  and  engages  with  the  stop  pin  of  the 
fuze  to  limit  the  motion  of  the  fuze  setter. 


32 

The  range  worm  and  corrector  worm  are  mounted  eccentrically 
in  the  range-worm  case  and  the  corrector-worm  case.  Upon  rotation 
this  provides  an  adjustment  to  accommodate  slight  variations  in 
machine  operations  and  to  take  up  for  wear  between  the  teeth  of 
the  worms  and  gears. 

The  range-worm  adjusting  screw  and  the  corrector-worm  adjusting 
screw  have  fiber  washers  fitted  in  the  end,  which  bear  on  the  collar 
of  the  range  and  corrector  worms  for  taking  up  the  end  motion 
and  to  provide  sufficient  friction  to  resist  accidental  turning. 

Clamp  plugs  are  provided  for  locking  the  range  and  corrector 
worm  cases  and  the  range-worm  and  corrector-worm  adjusting  screws. 

OPERATION. 

Turn  the  knob  of  the  corrector  worm  until  the  index  on  the  case 
registers  with  the  line  on  the  corrector  scale  which  indicates  the 
desired  correction  for  height  of  burst. 

To  set  a  fuze,  remove  the  waterproof  cap  and  safety  wire.  Place 
the  hand  fuze  setter  over  the  fuze  and  turn  until  the  slot  in  the  range- 
ring  carrier  engages  with  the  pin  on  the  graduated  time  train  ring 
of  the  fuze.  The  base  plate  and  the  upper  part  of  the  range-ring 
carrier  will  then  bear  firmly  on  the  projectile.  Then  turn  the  fuze 
setter  in  a  clockwise  direction  as  indicated  by  the  arrow  on  the  top 
of  the  case  until  the  stop  pin  on  the  corrector-scale  support  engages 
with  the  stop  pin  on  the  fuze  and  further  motion  is  prevented. 

An  index  to  register  with  a  line  on  the  fuze  to  indicate  when  the 

stop  pin  on  the  fuze  and  fuze  setter  are  in  contact  is  attached  to  the 

corrector  scale. 

HAND    FUZE    SETTER. 

[Plate  V.] 
OLD   MODEL. 

This  hand  fuze  setter  consists  of  the  following  principal  parts: 
Range-ring  carrier,  base,  case,  range  ring,  corrector  scale,  plunger, 
plunger  spring,  clamping  shoe,  and  clamp  screw. 

On  the  top  of  the  base  is  mounted  the  range-ring  carrier,  to  which 
is  secured  by  four  screws  the  graduated  range  ring.  On  the  interior 
conical  surface  of  the  carrier  is  cut  a  notch,  which  engages  the  fixed 
pin  of  the  graduated  time  train  ring  of  the  fuze. 

The  range-ring  carrier  is  loosely  mounted  on  top  of  the  base  and  is 
held  in  place  by  means  of  the  case  in  such  manner  that  it  can  be 
freely  revolved,  so  that  the  desired  relation  between  the  time-train- 
ring  notch  cut  therein  and  the  fixed  plunger  in  the  base  may  be 
readily  obtained  for  the  desired  setting  of  the  fuze. 

In  the  case,  which  is  securely  fixed  to  the  base,  is  fitted  the  clamp- 
ing screw  and  shoe,  by  means  of  which  the  range-ring  carrier,  with 
its  graduated  range  ring,  may  be  securely  clamped.     On  the  top 


33 

surface  of  the  case  is  fitted  the  corrector  scale;  this  is  held  in  place 
by  two  screws.  If  after  a  setting  has  been  made  for  a  given  range 
it  is  found  that  the  shrapnel  does  not  burst  at  the  desired  point  in 
its  trajectory,  the  clamping  screw  is  released  and  the  range-ring 
carrier  is  revolved  forward  or  backward  as  desired  until  the  gradua- 
tion mark  on  the  range  ring  comes  opposite  the  proper  graduation 
mark  on  the  corrector  scale.  For  makiug  the  adjustment  for  differ- 
ent heights  of  burst,  the  corrector  scale  has  been  graduated  and 
fitted  to  the  case  in  such  manner  that  if  a  lower  point  of  burst  is 
desired  the  range  graduation  on  the  range  ring  should  be  set  to  one 
of  the  lesser  graduation  marks  on  the  corrector  scale,  and  if  a  higher 
point  of  burst  is  desired,  then  the  graduation  on  the  range  ring  should 
be  set  to  one  of  the  higher  graduations  on  the  corrector  scale. 

ADJUSTMENT. 

As  the  parts  are  adjusted  by  the  manufacturer  before  issue  and 
ample  provision  made  for  lubricating  the  parts  by  filling  the  interior 
of  the  case  with  a  heavy  grease,  there  should  be  but  little  need  for 
adjustment  for  a  long  time. 

Two  oil  holes  closed  by  screws  are  provided  in  the  case  for  emer- 
gency use  only. 

Reference  marks  are  placed  on  the  case  and  worm  cases  to  indicate 
the  normal  adjustment. 

ADAPTABILITY   TO   OTHER   GUNS. 

This  fuze  setter  is  adaptable  to  all  projectiles  using  the  31-second 
combination  fuze  by  using  suitable  range  ring,  corrector  scale,  guide 
plate,  and  index  bar.  The  corrector  scale  for  guns  has  60  gradua- 
tions, 30  being  the  normal.  The  range  ring  for  guns  has  but  one  scale 
graduated  thereon.  The  index  bar  for  guns  has  a  fixed  projecting 
arm*  on  which  the  index  is  engraved.  The  guide  plates  are  suitably 
marked  for  the  projectile  to  which  they  are  fitted.  The  range  rings 
and  corrector  scales  are  marked  with  the  name  of  gun. 

4.7-INCH   GUN   DRILL   CARTRIDGE. 

The  drill  cartridge  is  a  dummy  cartridge  for  use  in  drilling  can- 
noneers in  the  service  of  the  gun. 

The  principal  parts  are:  Wood  body,  bronze  base,  body  guard, 
stop  pin,  graduated  ring,  point  nut,  and  bolt  extending  through 
entire  length. 

It  is  the  shape  of  the  service  shrapnel  ammunition,  and  is  fitted 
at  the  point  with  a  movable  ring  graduated  the  same  as  the  ring 
upon  the  Frankford  Arsenal  31-second  combination  fuze. 

This  arrangement  is  for  the  instruction  of  cannoneers  in  fuze 
setting. 


34 

THE   RELOADING   AND    CLEANING   OUTFIT. 

This  outfit  consists  of  the  following  parts,  and  is  furnished  each 
battery  and  to  each  post  where  a  saluting  gun  is  kept. 

Primer-inserting  press,  large. 

Bushing. 

Powder  measure,  saluting. 

Decapping  tool,  with  guide. 

Cleaning  brush.  )  Class  V.  section  5. 

Hammer. 

Case  holder. 

Case-holder  stand. 

Storage  chest. 

The  bushing  is  used  in  the  primer-inserting  press  for  the  insertion  of 
new  primers. 

The  decapping  tool  and  case  holder  and  stand  are  used  for  removing 
exploded  primers  from  the  cartridge  cases.  A  light  blow  on  the  rod 
with  a  piece  of  wood  or  the  bronze  hammer  generally  removes  the 
primer. 

A  powder  measure  to  suit  the  saluting  charge  for  the  gun  is  fur- 
nished, and  when  level  full  holds  the  required  charge. 

The  cleaning  brush  is  furnished  for  cleaning  the  cartridge  cases  after 
they  have  been  used  and  should  be  ordered  to  suit  the  size  of  case  for 
which  intended. 

MISFIRES    AND    HANGFIRES. 

"Misfires"  and  "hangAres"  are  of  exceedingly  rare  occurrence  with 
this  ammunition.  In  case  of  the  failure  of  the  cartridge  to  fire  when 
the  trigger  is  pulled  the  breechblock  should  not  he  opened  until  after 
the  expiration  of  at  least  one  minute.  The  gun  may  be  immediately 
recocked  without  opening  the  breech  mechanism  and  the  cartridge 
tried  again.  Defective  cartridges  should  be  reported  to  the  arma- 
ment officer.  • 

THE    4.7-INCH    GUN    CARRIAGE,    MODEL    OF    1906. 

WEIGHTS,    PRINCIPAL  DIMENSIONS,   ETC. 

Weight  of  carriage,  complete pounds. .  4, 732 

Weight  of  gun  and  carriage,  complete do 7, 420 

Weight  of  gun  and  carriage  on  limber,  gun  in  battery do 312 

Weight  of  gun  and  carriage  on  limber,  gun  in  traveling  position do 1, 282 

Diameter  of  wheel inches. .  60 

Width  of  track do. . . .  60 

Length  of  recoil  of  gun  on  carriage do 70 

Height  of  axis  on  gun do 51.29 

Height  of  line  of  sight do. . . .  53. 62 

Length  of  sight  radius do 36. 75 

Maximum  angle  of  elevation  (gun  on  carriage) degrees. .  15 

Maximum  angle  of  depression  (gun  on  carriage) do 5 

Amount  of  traverse  of  gun  on  carriage milliemes. .  140 

Free  height  of  spring  column feet..  12£ 


35 

NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS. 

{Details  marked  *  apply  to  carriages  with  serial  numbers  1  to  40,  inclusive,  only.    Details  marked  t  apply 
to  carriages  with  serial  numbers  above  40  only.] 


Nam-"      i  ..  i 


Cradle,  complete,  including: 
Cradle,  including— 

Cradle  band,  front 

Cradle  band,  rear 

Trunnion  band 

Spring  cylinder,  right 

Spring  cylinder,  left 

Spring  cylinder,  reinforce,  right., 

Spring  cylinder,  reinforce,  left 

Spring  cylinder  head,  right 

Spring  cvlinder  head  .left 

Cradle  rails.  1  ri-ht .  I  left 

Cradle  rail  liner ,  top,  1  right .  1  left , 

Cradle  rail  liner,  bottom,  1  right, 
1  left. 

Recoil  cvlinder  lock,  complete, 
including— 

Lock  bracket 

Lock  catch 

Lock  pin 

0.125  by  1.5  split  pin 

Swing  bolt  forks 

Shoulder  guard  bracket 

Guide  bracket 

Guide 

Firing  handle  bracket 

Firing  handle  bracket  reinforce... 

Front  sight  bracket  support 

Rear  sight  bracket  support 

Range  quadrant  fastening 

Elevating  bevel  gear  stop 

Cylinder  cover  hinges 

Spring  cvlinder  cover 

Swing  bolts  with  pins  and  split  pins  . . 

Extension  rail  pin , 

Shoulder  guard  pin 

Shoulder  guard 

Recoil  indicator 

Extension  rail  plunger 

Extension  rail  plunger  ring 

Extension  rail  plunger  spring 

Extension  rail, complete,  including — 

Extension  rail  body 

Extension  rail  liners,   1  right, 
1  left. 

Extension  rail  bearing  plates, 
1  right,  1  left. 

Extension  rail  top  plate 

E  xtension  rail  diaphragm 

Latch  base 

Latch  plunger 

Latch  spring 

Plunger  ring 

Extension  rail  bolts  and  nuts 

Extension  rail  bolt  pins 

Extension  rail  body 

Extension  rail  bearings,  1  right, 
1  left. 

Extension  rail  separator 

Extension  rail  separator  rivet ... 

Extension  rail  bracket 

Extension  rail  latch  socket 

Extension  rail  pin 

Spring  cylinder  covers 

Dust  guard 

Dust  guard  pads 

Button  head  cap  screws 

Recoil  indicator  throw 

Recoil  indicator  throw  pins 


Location,  etc. 


Property 
classifica- 
tion. 


Front  connections  for  cylinders. 
Rear  connections  for  cylinders. , 
Pivots  cradle  in  pintle  yoke.. . . 


On  rear  end  of  spring  cylinder,  right... 

On  rear  end  of  spring  cylinder,  left 

In  rear  end  of  spring  cylinder,  right.... 

In  rear  end  of  spring  cylinder,  left 

Riveted  to  bands  and  spring  cylinders. 

Riveted  to  cradle  rails  at  top 

Riveted  to  cradle  rails  at  bottom 


Class. 


Riveted  to  cradle  band,  front. 
Pinned  to  bracket 


Riveted  to  spring  cylinders  at  front 

Riveted  to  spring  cylinder  reinforce,  left.. 

Riveted  to  spring  cylinder,  right 

Riveted  to  guide  bracket. 


Riveted  tospring  cylinder  reinforce, right. 
Riveted  to  firing  handle  bracket 

JRIveted  to  spring  cylinder,  left 

Riveted  to  spring  cylinder,  right 

Shrunk  on  cradle  band,  rear 


Riveted  to  spring  cylinders  at  front. 
Bolted  to  front  end  of  cylinders. 


Pins  rail  to  spring  cylinder  cover 

Pinned  to  bracket  on  spring  cvlinder,  left. . 
Slides  in  guide  on  spring  cylinder,  right.. 
Secures  rail  to  cover 


Secured  to  spring  cylinder  cover. 
Riveted  to  rail  body 


Riveted  to  outside  of  rail  body. 


Riveted  to  rail  body 

Riveted  in  rear  end  of  body. 
Riveted  to  bottom  of  rail . . . 
In  latch  base 


Secure  rail  to  cradle  band,  front. 

Secure  bolts  to  rail  bracket 

Rolted  to  cradle  band,  front 

Riveted  to  sides  of  body 


Riveted  to  rear  end  of  body 

Riveted  to  spring  cylinders 

Secures  cylinder  cover  and  rail 

Pinned  to  front  ends  of  cylinders 

On  extension  rail  between  clips  on  gun. 

Pinned  to  dust  guard 

Secure  dust  guard 

Pinned  to  dust  guard 


IV 


Sec- 
tion. 


w 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


No. 

Name  of  part. 

Location,  etc. 

Property 
classifica- 
tion. 

Class. 

Sec- 
tion. 

Cradle,  complete,  including— Continued. 
Recoil    and    counterrecoil    arrange- 
ment, including— 
Recoil   cylinder,   complete,    in- 
cluding— 
Recoil  cylinder 

In  cradle  bands  between  spring  cylinders. 
On  front  end  of  recoil  cylinder 

IV 

Cylinder  head 

Stuffing  box 

On  rear  end  of  recoil  cylinder 

In  end  of  stuffing  box . . . 

5 

Rings,     Garlock    hydraulic 
waterproof  packing. 

Filling  and  drain  plugs 

Gaskets 

t3 

In  cylinder  head  and  stuffing  box 

is 

Under  plugs 

Filling  and  drain  plugs 

Gaskets 

In  cylinder  head  and  stuffing  box 

♦a 

Under  filling  and  drain  plugs 

Piston  rod 

In  cylinder 

Piston 

On  front  end  of  piston  rod 

Piston  rod  nut 

Secures  rod  to  gun  lug  and  spring  rod  yoke. 
In  front  end  of  piston  rod 

Counterrecoil  buffer... 

Counterrecoil  buffer  nut 

Secures  buffer  to  cylinder  head 

n 

Outer  counterrecoil  springs 

Middle  counterrecoil  springs 

Inner  counterrecoil  springs 

Spring  stirrups,  outer 

Spring  stirrups,  inner 

Assembled  in  spring  cylinders 

6 

In  spring  stirrups,  outer 

A 

In  spring  stirrups,  inner 

? 

Connect  outer  and  middle  springs 

2 

Connect  middle  and  inner  springs 

2 
2 
2 
2 

*2 
*2 
*2 
*2 
4 

Spring  stirrup  flanges,  outer 

Spring  stirrup  flanges,  inner 

Spring  stirrup  heads,  outer 

Spring  stirrup  heads,  inner 

Outer  stirrup  reinforces,  front .... 

Outer  stirrup  reinforces,  rear 

Inner  stirrup  reinforces,  front 

Inner  stirrup  reinforces,  rear 

Spring  separators,  outer 

On  front  end  of  spring  stirrup,  outer 

On  front  end  of  spring  stirrup,  inner 

On  rear  end  of  spring  stirrup,  outer 

On  rear  end  of  spring  stirrup,  inner 

Secures  flange  to  spring  stirrup,  outer 

Secures  head  to  spring  stirrup,  outer 

Secures  flange  to  spring  stirrup,  inner 

Secures  head  to  spring  stirrup,  inner 

Between  outer  springs 

4 

Spring  separators,  intermediate. . . 
Spring  separators,  inner 

Between  middle  springs 

4 

Between  inner  springs 

2 

Spring  rods ' 

In  inner  springs 

? 

On  front  ends  of  rods. .  . . 

2 

Spring  rod  plugs  and  nuts 

Spring  rod  keys 

On  rear  ends  of  rods 

2 

Seated  in  plugs 

Spring  rod  yoke 

Connects  spring  rods  and  gun 

3 

Firing  mechanism,  complete,  including— 
Firing  shaft 

Assembled  in  firing  handle  bracket 

On  shaft 

Firing  handle 

Shaft  trip  collar 

do 

....do 

Trip  collar  pin 

Shaft  return  spring 

In  firing  handle  bracket. .  . 

Handle  return  spring 

do 

Trip  latch  plunger .  " 

In  firing  handle 

Trip  latch 

On  end  of  plunger 

Trip  latch  pin 

Pins  plunger  in  latch 

Trip  latch  spring 

Adjusting  screw 

In  firing  handle  bracket 

? 

Pintle  yoke,  complete,  including— 

Pintle  yoke,  with  4  handy  oilers 

Supports  the  gun  at  the  trunnion  band ' 

3 

B olts  and  nuts 

Secure  pintle  yoke  to  traversing  bracket...! 
Cap  over  trunnions. . . 

2 

Trunnion  caps,  with  pins  and  handy 

oilers. 
Trunnion  cap  bolts 

2 

1 
1 

Pintle  bearing,  complete,  including— 
Pintle  bearing 

On  axle  between  axle  bearings 

Pintle  bearing  liner 

In  pintle ! 

Secure  pintle  bearing  to  trail j 

4 

Bolts  and  nuts 

Trail  tie  bolt  and  nut . . 

1 

Axle 

::::„;:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: 

? 

Trail,  complete,  including— 

Flasks,  1  right,  1  left 

Form  sides  of  trail 

2 

Axle  bearings,  1  right,  1  left.. . . 

Riveted  to  front  end  of  flasks { 

? 

Axle  bearing  bolts  and  nuts. . . 

Clamp  bearings  to  axle 

1 
1 

Traversing  transom  liner,  front 

Traversing  transom,  rear 

Bearing  surface  on  traversing  transom,  : 

front. 
Second ,  in  trail ,  riveted  to  flasks 

1 

Traversing  transom  liner,  rear 

Bearing  surface  on  traversing  transom  j 
bracket.                                                     ' 

37 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


No. 


Name  of  part. 


Trail,  complete,  including— Continued. 

Traversing  t  ransom  bracket 

Tool  box  front  transom 

Tool  box  rear  transom 

Tool  box  top  plate 

Fastener  (female)  (for  extension  rail 
carrier). 

Hinge  (for  extension  rail  carrier) 

Tool  box  cover  plate 

Name  plate 

Tool  box  bottom  plate 

Toolbox  bottom  bole,  cover 

Trail  cover  plate 

Cover  plate  front  liner 

Cover  plate  rear  liner 

Trail  end  reinforce  plate 

Spade  brackets,  1  right,  1  left 

Spado-key  bracket 

Seat  supports,  1  right,  1  left 

Seats 

Cover  hinges 

Tool  box  fastening,  complete,  in- 
cludes— 
Clips 


On  traversing  transom,  rear 

Third,  in  trail,  riveted  to  flasks... 

Fourth,  in  trail 

Riveted  to  flasks  and  transom 

Riveted  to  tool  box  rear  transom. 


Stops 

Handle 

Lock  eye 

Chain  rivet 

Yale  lock,  No.  840,  with  bolt  snap  and 
chain. 

Traveling  lock  cover  fastener,  com- 
plete. 

Traveling  lock  cover  plate 

Chain  rivet 

Traveling  lock  cover  pin 

Traveling  lock  cover  chain 

Sponge  stop 

Spongc-staiT  fastening 

Sponge-statI  hasp 

Hir 


Riveted  to  trail  cover  plate 

Hinged  to  tool  box  top  plate 

On  tool  box  top  plate 

Forms  floor  of  tool  box 

Riveted  to  tool  box  bottom  plate 

Top  of  lower  trail 

}  Reinforce  trail  cover  plate  at  traveling 
lock. 

Inside  lower  trail 

Riveted  to  flasks  and  trail  cover  plate 

Riveted  to  lower  end  of  trail 

Riveted  to  flasks 

On  supports  at  side  of  trail 

On  cover  plates 


On  tool  box  cover  plate. 
Riveted  to  transom 


Riveted  to  tool  box  rear  transom. 
On  trail  cover  plate 


Hinged  to  trail  cover  plate 

Riveted  to  traveling  lock  cover  plate. 

Fastens  traveling  lock  cover  plate 

Secures  the  pin 

On  right  flask 


imgo  pm 

Bolt  with  0.135  twisted  coil  chain 
and  ring. 

Sponge-staff  double  fastening 

Sponge-staff  double  hasp 

Hinge  pin 

Bolt  with  0.135  twisted  coil  chain 
and  ring. 

Sponge-staff  socket 

Bar  and  sponge  staff  socket 

Liners  (wheel  guards) 

Liner  screws  (wheel  guard) 

Maneuvering  bar  support 

Maneuvering  bar  support  pins 

Fastening  lever 

Fastening  lever  pin 

Fastening  spring 

Maneuvering  bar  stop 

Trail  handles,  2  short,  2  long 

Trail  prop  brackets,  1  right,  1  left 

Trail  prop  stops.  1  right,  Heft ! 

Prop  chain  bracket 

Prop  hook  button j 

Azimuth  scale  bracket j 

Azimuth  scale  strip 

Traveling  lock,  complete,  including— 

Traveling  lock  frame 

Traveling  lock  legs 

Lock  pins 


On  right  flask  of  trail. 


On  left  side  of  trail. 


On  right  side 

On  left  side 

On  sponge  staff  sockets. 


Riveted  to  left  flask. 


Pinned  in  support . . 

Secures  spring 

Pinned  in  lever 

Riveted  to  left  flask. 
Riveted  to  flasks 


IV 


.do. 


Riveted  to  bottom  flanges  of  flasks... 
Riveted  to  bottom  flange  of  left  flask. 

On  right  flask 

Riveted  to  left  flask 

On  bracket 


Riveted  to  flasks 

Hinged  in  traveling  lock  frame . 


Leg  prop. 
■  -olt. 


Lockbol 

Lock  bolt  sleeve 

Lock  bolt  nut 

Lunette  transom 

Lunette  transom  bushing 

Lunette  transom  rivets 

Lunette  trail  reinforce,  1  right,  1  left. . 
Elevating  and  traversing  lock  lever 

guide. 
Elevating  and  traversing  lock  lever 
fastening. 


Supports  one  traveling  lock  leg. 
Secures  gun  to  traveling  lock. . . 


Riveted  to  lower  ends  of  flasks. 
In  lunette  transom 


Riveted  to  trail  flasks 

Riveted  to  tool  box  top  plate. 

Riveted  to  left  trail  flask 


38 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


Name  of  part. 


Spade,  complete,  including— 

Spade  frame 

Spade  braces,  1  right,  1  left 

Float 

Floats,  1  right,  1  left 

Spade  edge 

Spade  points 

Spado  braces,  1  right,  1  left 

Bearing  plates,  1  right,  1  left 

Spado  plate 

Spado  reinforce 

Spade  key,  complete 

Spade  pin,  with  nut 

Spade,  center  bearings,  1  right,  1  loft. 

Spade,  rear  bearings,  1  right,  1  left... 
Handspikes,  complete,  including— 

Handspike  webs,  1  right,  1  left 

Lower  bands 

Middle  bands 

Tips 

Handspike  bodies,  2  inner,  2  outer... 

Chain  eye 

Trail  prop,  complete,  including— 

Prop  tubes 

Prop  foot , 

Prop  bra ccs 

Prop  eyes,  with  pins , 

Trail  prop  chain,  complete,  including— 

Prop  chain 

Prop  hook , 

Prop  chain  swivel,  with  pin 

Extension  rail  carrier,  complete,  includ- 
ing— 

Bottom  plate , 

Bed 

Stop 

Hanger  pin 

Hanger 

Fastener  (male) 

Pin,  including  body,  spring,  head, 
and  rivet. 

Chain , 

Chain  rings 

Catch 

Catch  support 

Catch  spring 

Catch  pin 

Elevating  mechanism,  complete,  includ- 
ing— 

Elevating  gear  bracket,  with  2  handy 
oilers. 

Bushings 

Elevating  screw  cover 

Elevating  screw  cover  with  split  pin. . 

Elevating  screw  cover  springs 

Outer  elevating  screw 

Inner  elevating  screw 

Elevating  pin 

Elevating  yoke  sides,  1  right,  1  left. . . 

Elevating  yoke  transom  with  1  spring 
cover,  No.  1. 

Elevating  yoke  bushings 

Bolts  and  nuts  (8  short,  2  long) 

Elevating  bevel  gear  with  pins 

Keys 

Elevating  bevel  gear  lug 

Elevating  pinion  shafts  with 2  nuts.. 

Elevating  bevel  pinions 

Elevating  handwheels,  complete,  in- 
cluding— 

Wheel  bodies 

Counterbalances , 

Instruction  plates 

Spindles 

Sleeves 

Reinforce  pieces , 

Hubs 


Property 
classifica- 
tion. 


Location,  etc. 


Class. 


tion. 


Interior  framework  of  spade 

Riveted  to  spade  frame 

do 

Forms  point  of  spade 

Riveted  to  spade  edge  and  frame. . 

Riveted  to  floats 

Riveted  to  floats  and  framo 

Riveted  to  float 

Braces  spade  edge 

Locks  spades  in  position 

Hinges  spade  to  trail 

Riveted  to  spade  braces 

Riveted  to  spade  brace  and  frame. 

Pinned  to  spade 


On  left  handspike  body. 
Hinged  under  trail 


Riveted  to  trail  bottom  plate. 


Suspends  carrier  from  hinge.. 
Riveted  to  trail  bottom  plate. 
Hinge  pin  in  fasteners 


Secures  pin. 


IV 


Secures  extension  rail  to  bed . 


Trunnioned  in  elevating  yoke  sides 

Forced  in  bracket 

Closes  lower  end  of  elevating  gear  bracket. . 
do 


Assembles  inner  screw  to  rear  cradle  band . 

I  Bolted  to  traversing  bracket  to  form  frame 
for  elevating  mechanism. 

In  elevating  yoke  sides 


Assembled  in  bracket 

Riveted  to  elevating  bevel  gear. 

do 

Assembled  in  bracket 

Pinned  to  inner  ends  of  shafts.. 


On  outside  ends  of  shafts. 


39 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


No. 


Name  of  part. 


Location,  etc. 


Bolted  to  pintle  yoke.. 


Riveted  to  trail  flasks. . . 

do 

Bolted  to  trail  transoms. 


Assembled  in  lock  bar  bearings.. 

On  lock  bar 

On  lock  bar  lever 

In  handle 


In  lock  bolt  casing. 


Traversing  mechanism,  complete,  includ- 
ing— 
Traversing    bracket    with    1-spring 
cover,  No.  1. 

Traversing  yoke 

Bolts  and  nuts,  2  short,  I  long 

Azimuth  pointer On  traversing  bracket 

Traversing  screw  bracket Bolted  to  left  flask 

Bolts  and  nuts,  2  long,  1  short 

Traversing  screw  bracket  cap Bolted  to  bracket 

Bolts  and  nuts ~ 

Traversing  screw   bearing   with    1     Swivels  in  traversing  screw  bracket, 
handy  oiler. 

Traversing  screw,  with  1  nut Assembled  in  bearing  and  nut 

Traversing  nut  with  handy  oiler |  Swivels  in  traversing  yoke 

Traversing  handwheel,  complete,  in- 
cluding— 

Wheel  body J  On  end  of  traversing  screw , 

Counterbalance 

Instruction  plate 

Spindle 

Sleeve 

Reinforce  piece 

Hub 

Elevating  and  traversing  lock,  complete, 
including— 

Lock  bar  bearing,  1  right,  1  left 

Bearing  braces,  1  right,  1  left 

Lock  bolt  casing 

Bolts  and  nuts,  2  long,  2  short 

Lock  bars 

Lock  bar  lever 

Lever  handle 

ITandle  bushing 

Handle  plunger 

Plunger  spring 

Lock  bolt 

Lock  bolt  end 

Link- 

Link  pins,  1  long,  1  short 

Elevating  and  traversing  lock  spring . . 

Lever 

Fulcrum  pin 

Brake  mechanism,  complete,  Including— 
Brake  shaft  bracket,  right,  with  1 

handy  oiler. 
Brake  shaft  bracket,  left,  with    1 
handy  oiler. 

Bushings 

Bolts  and  nuts 

Bolts  and  nuts 

Segment  rack 

Boltsand  nuts 

Brake  shaft 

Brake  cranks  and  nuts  and  pins 

Brake  crank  washers 

Brake  lever  hinge,  with  pin 

Brake  lever 

Brake  lever  spring  bracket 

Brake  lever  catch 

Brake  lever  spring 

Brake  beams 

Brake  beam  hinge  pins 

Brake  shoes 

Brake  shoe  pins 

Brake  rods,  complete, including — 

Brake  rods 

Brake  rod  springs 

BraVe  spring  cover 

Brake  rod  ends 

BraVe  spring  cover  ends 

Brake  rod  bushings 

0.25  by  3.5  split  pins 

Brake  rod  pins 

Brake  rod  keys 


Property 
classifica- 
tion. 


Class. 


Pinned  to  lock  bolt  end . 


In  lock  bolt  casing 

Pinned  to  lock  bolt  casing. 


Keyed  to  axle. 


In  brackets 

Clamp  brackets  to  axle 

Through  brackets  and  shieH 

Bolted  to  brake  shaft  bracket,  right. 


IV 


Assembled  in  brackets. 
On  brake  shaft , 


On  brake  shaft 

ninged  to  brake  shaft 

hRi veted  to  brake  1  ever 

Assembled  in  brake  lever  hinge. 
Hinged  t  o  pintle  bearing 


On  ends  of  brake  beams. 


Secured  to  brake  beams  and  brake  cranks. . 


Equalize  pressure  on  brake  shoes. . 


Secure  rod  to  brake  beams . 
Seated  in  brake  rod 


10161—17 4* 


40 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


No. 


Name  of  part. 


Location,  etc. 


Riveted  to  top  shield 

Over  panoramic  sight  port 
Secures  shutter 

Riveted  to  shield  and  shutter. 


Riveted  to  top  shield. 


Riveted  to  main  shield. 
Bolted  to  shield 


Shield,  complete,  including— 

Top  shield,  complete,  including— 

Top  shield 

Top  shield  braces Lock  top  shield  in  either  position. 

Top  shield  hinges,  upper  half,  !  Riveted  to  top  shield  at  bottom. 

with  pins. 
Top  shield  fastenings  with  pins.. 

Shutter  panoramic  sight  port 

Hinge  pin 

Hinges,  sight  port  shutter 

Fillers,  shutter  hinge 

Shutter  latch  base 

Shutter  latch  plunger 

Shutter  latch  spring ! 

Shutter  support Riveted  to  shutter. 

Main  shield,  complete,  including— 

Main  shield,  right 

Main  shield ,  left 

Hood 

Main  shield  side  pieces,  1  right,  1 

left. 

Bolts  and  nuts 

Main  shield  braces,  upper  end — 
Main  shield  braces,  lower  end,  1 

right,  1  left. 

Main  shield  brace  tubes 

Bolts  and  nuts,  2  short,  2  long Secure  shield  braces  to  shield  and  trail. 

Top  shield  brackets '■  Riveted  to  main  shield 

Top  shield  brace  pins j  Through  top  shield  brace  and  bracket . 

Top  shield  brace  pin  chains,  com-  ! 

piete,  including— 

Chains 

End  links 

Rings 

Top  shield  hinges,  lower  half 

Apron  hinges,  upper  half,  with 

pins. 

Shutter,  peep-sight  port 

Hinge  pin 

Hinges,  peep-sight  port  shutter... 

Fillers .  shutter  hinge 

Shutter  latch  base 

Shutter  latch  plunger 


Braces  shield  to  trail. 


Fastened  to  top  shield  brackets. 


Riveted  to  main  shield. 


Over  peep  sight  port. 


Riveted  to  shield  and  shutter. 


Shutter  latch  spring 

Apron,  complete,  including— 


Apron. 

Apron  hinges,  lower  half 

Apron  latch  staples 

Apron  latches,  complete,  including— 

Apron  latch  bodies 

Apron  latch  body  pins 

Apron  latch  levers : 

Apron  latch  lever  pins 

Apron  latch  plungers 

Apron  latch  springs 

Apron  latch  plunger  eyes 

Apron  latch  plunger  eye  pins 

Apron  latch  bushings 

Wheels,  60-inch,  complete,  including— 

Hub  boxes 

Hub  rings 

Hub  liners 

Hub  bands 

Lock  washers 

Wheel  hooks,  1  right,  1  left 

Wheel-hook  bushings 

Hub  caps 

Hub  latches , 

Hub  latch  springs 

Hub  latch  plungers 

Oil  valves,  with  rivets 

Oil  valve  springs 

Oil  valve  washers 

Spokes 

Felloe   segments,    with   rivets   and 
washers. 

Dowels 

Tires 

Tire  bolts  with  washers  and  nuts. . . 
Carriage  bolts  and  nuts 


Riveted  to  top  shield. 


Riveted  to  apron.. 
do 


Suspended  from  brake  shaft  brackets. 


Outer  flanges  of  hubs 

Forced  into  hub  boxe3 

Screwed  on  hub  boxes 

Between  wheel  hook  bushing  and  hub  band 

On  outside  of  hubs 

Under  wheel  hooks , 

On  end  of  hubs , 

Actuate  hub  latch  plungers 


Lock  hub  caps  in  place. 
Slide  in  hub  caps 


Property 
classifica- 
tion. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


IV 


Hold  felloe  segments  together. 


Secure  spokes  to  hubs. 


q* 


41 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


No 


Name  of  part. 


Wheel  fastenings,  complete,  including— 

Bodies 

Wheel  fastening  plungers 

Wheel  fastening  springs 

Wheel  fastening  plugs 

Si^ht  packing,  complete 

5SSSB5t}<*»  «-»  «ua<lram  <*»> 

Holts  and  nuts 

Supports  (for  panoramic  sight  case) 

Bolts  and  nuts,  2  long,  2  short 

Range  quadrant  case,  complete 

Support  pins 

Panoramic  sight  case,  complete 

Support  pins 

Sighting  arrangement,  complete,  includ- 
ing— 

Front  sight,  complete 

Sight  bracket  with  shank  socket 

Sight  shank 

Range  quadrant 

Panoramic  sight 

Teat  wrench  for  panoramic  sight 


Location,  etc. 


At  ends  of  axle. 


In  trail  tool  box 

Bolted  to  right  flask 

For  front  and  rear  supports 

1  right,  1  left,  bolted  to  main  shield . 


Property 
classifica- 
tion. 


Class. 


Pinned  to  supports 

For  range  quadrant  case . 

Pinned  to  supports 

For  panoramic  sight  case. 


On  sight  fastening 

On  rear  support 

In  shank  socket 

On  quadrant  fastening — 
Fitted  to  rear  sight  shank . 
Incase 


IV 


Sec- 
tion. 


DESCRIPTION    OP   THE    CARRIAGE. 

(Plates  VI,  VII,  VIII,  IX,  X,  and  XI.) 

The  4.7-inch  gun  carriage,  model  of  1906,  is  of  the  type  known  as 
the  long  recoil  in  which  the  gun  is  permitted  a  sufficient  length  of 
recoil  on  the  carriage  to  render  the  latter  stationary  under  firing 
stresses.  A  steel  casting  called  a  pintle  bearing  is  mounted  upon  an 
axle  and  braced  by  the  trail  to  form  a  swivel  base  for  a  steel  yoke  pro- 
vided with  bearings  in  which  the  trunnions  of  the  cradle  rest.  The 
cradle  is  a  framework,  with  heavy  rails  which  support  the  gun,  and 
contains  the  hydraulic  cylinder  which  controls  the  gun  in  recoil  and 
the  springs  that  return  the  piece  to  the  original  firing  position. 

For  the  purpose  of  description,  the  carriage  may  be  considered  as 
composed  of  the  following  divisions,  viz,  wheels,  axle,  trail,  and 
spade,  pintle  yoke  and  bearing,  cradle,  recoil  cylinder,  counter-recoil 
spring  system,  traversing  mechanism,  elevating  mechanism,  brake, 
shield,  sights,  firing  mechanism,  recoil  indicator,  and  shoulder 
guard.  The  dust  guard,  actually  attached  between  the  front  clip 
and  jacket  of  the  gun,  is  also  to  be  considered  as  a  part  of  the  carriage. 

WHEELS. 

The  wheels  are  a  modified  form  of  the  Archibald  pattern,  60  inches 
in  diameter.  The  hub  consists  of  a  steel  hub  box  and  hub  ring,  the 
two  having  flanges  which  clamp  the  spokes  and  are  drawn  together  by 
eight  heavy  bolts  and  a  ring  called  a  hub  band,  which  is  threaded  to 
the  hub  box.  The  lock  washer  and  the  wheel  hook  bushing  are 
located  on  the  hub  box  between  the  hub  band  and  the  hub  ring. 
The  wheel  hook  bushing  is  assembled  under  the  wheel  hook  and  by 


42 

means  of  a  flange  secures  the  hook  to  the  wheel.  The  wheel  hook  is 
used  for  attachment  of  ropes  or  chains  in  emergency  traction.  The 
lock  washer  is  located  between  the  wheel  hook  bushing  and  the  hub 
band  and  prevents  the  latter  from  unscrewing. 

A  removable  bronze  liner  is  forced  into  the  hub  box  to  form  a 
wearing  surface,  and  the  outer  end  of  the  hub  is  closed  by  a  bronze 
hub  cap  screwed  on  the  hub  box  and  locked  with  a  small  bolt,  called 
the  hub  latch  plunger,  which  is  withdrawn  and  held  in  the  disengaged 
position  by  the  hub  latch  when  the  cap  is  to  be  unscrewed.  The 
hub  cap  is  also  fitted  with  the  standard  wheel  oil  valve,  which  is 
pulled  out  to  expose  the  opening  for  oiling  the  wheel  and  closes  to 
render  the  hub  dust  proof. 

WHEEL   FASTENINGS. 

The  wheel  fastening,  a  yoke  of  bronze,  fitting  recesses  in  the  outer 
end  of  the  axle  arm,  secures  the  wheel  to  the  axle  and  is  exposed 
when  the  hub  cap  is  removed.  The  yoke  is  secured  to  the  axle  arm 
by  the  wheel  fastening  plunger. 

AXLE. 

The  axle  is  hollow  and  forged  from  a  single  piece  of  steel.  The 
axle  arms  will  take  any  of  the  standard  60-inch  wheels,  being  similar 
fco  all  others  in  the  battery,  and  the  key,  solid  with  the  axle,  holds  the 
trail  axle  bearings,  brake  shaft  brackets,  and  pintle  bearing  in  their 
proper  interrelation. 

THE  TRAIL. 

Hie  flasks  of  the  trail  are  of  channel  section  with  the  flanges 
tarned  inward  and  are  connected  by  several  transoms  and  braced 
by  riveted  plates  to  form  a  rigid  framework.  The  forward  ends  of 
these  flasks  extend  beyond  and  surround  the  axle  and  are  rein- 
forced by  cast-steel  axle  bearings,  which  are  clamped  to  the  axle 
by  bolts.  A  short  distance  in  rear  of  the  axle  are  the  traversing  tran- 
som, front,  and  traversing  transom,  rear,  riveted  to  the  flasks,  the 
first  forming  a  rest  for  the  traversing  bracket  and  the  other  a  seat 
for  the  frame  of  the  elevating  mechanism.  The  space  between  the 
third  and  fourth  transoms  is  utilized  as  a  tool  box,  having  a  floor  and 
a  hinged  lid  with  a  shot-bolt  handle  and  padlock.  The  rest  of  the 
trail  is  covered  with  a  single  plate  which  extends  around  the  lower 
end  and  for  about  2  feet  forward  on  the  underside,  and  has  an  open- 
ing, with  hinged  cover  for  the  traveling  lock,  the  frame  of  which 
constitutes  a  fifth  transom.  The  lunette  transom,  with  its  renew- 
able bushing  bored  to  receive  the  pintle  of  the  limber,  is  riveted  about 
27  inches  from  the  lower  end.  A  spade  bracket  reinforces  the  lower 
end  of  each  flask,  while  the  spade  key  bracket  braced  by  the  trail  end 
reinforce  plate  forms  the  extreme  lower  end  of  trail  and  seat  for  the 
spade. 


43 


SPADE. 


For  carriages  with  serial  numbers  1  to  40,  inclusive,  a  spade  of  the 
following  construction  is  used: 

The  spade  frame  is  a  plate  of  flange  steel  placed  crosswise  the  cen- 
ter line  of  the  trail  with  wings  extending  to  the  front;  between  these 
wings  and  parallel  to  them,  with  flanges  butting  against  and  riveted 
to  the  spade  frame,  are  two  braces,  whose  upper  portions  extend 
above  the  frame  and  receive  steel  fittings  for  attachment  to  the  trail; 
resting  on  the  wings  of  the  frame  and  riveted  to  the  spade  braces  are 
the  floats  which  meet  in  rear  and  with  a  reinforce  called  the  spade 
plate  form  a  heavy  rail  across  the  top  of  the  spade.  The  wings  of  the 
floats  project  on  either  side  of  the  spade  to  give  sufficient  bearing  in 
preventing  the  end  of  the  trail  from  burying  itself  in  the  ground.  A 
hardened-steel  wearing  edge  is  riveted  to  the  lower  edge  of  the  spade 
frame.  In  service,  when  worn  or  broken,  the  spade  edge  may  be 
replaced.  The  spade  reinforce  is  a  V-shaped  beam  of  flange  steel 
riveted  to  the  inside  of  the  spade  frame  and  to  the  spade  braces  for 
the  purpose  of  stiffening  the  construction.  The  fittings  for  attach- 
ment to  the  trail  are  the  center  bearings  and  rear  bearings  which  are 
riveted  to  the  spade  braces.  The  spade  pin  passes  through  the 
center  bearings  and  the  spade  brackets  of  the  trail;  the  rear  bearings 
serve  in  connection  with  corresponding  bearings  in  the  spade  key 
bracket  of  the  trail  and  a  detachable  pin  called  the  spade  key,  to 
lock  the  spade  in  its  position  underneath  the  trail  when  the  carriage 
is  unlimbered. 

For  traveling  the  key  is  removed,  the  spade  is  rotated  about  the 
pin  until  the  rear  bearings  coincide  with  the  forward  holes  of  the 
spade  bracket,  when  the  key  is  inserted  to  lock  the  spade  in  its  new 
position.  The  spado  key  and  spade  pin  also  secure  two  handspikes, 
which  are  arranged  to  fold  with  the  spade  in  limbering. 

For  carriages  with  serial  numbers  above  Jfi  a  spade  of  the  following 
construction  is  used: 

The  spade  frame  is  a  flange  steel  plate  placed  crosswise  the  center 
line  of  the  trail  with  wings  extending  to  the  front  and  riveted  to  the 
frame;  on  its  rear  and  side  wings  is  located  the  float.  Bearing  plates, 
right  and  left,  are  riveted  to  the  float  parallel  with  the  center  line  of 
the  trail  and  to  the  rear  of  the  frame,  and  form  seats  for  the  spade 
pin  and  spade  key.  The  spade  edge  and  spade  points  are  riveted 
to  the  lower  rear  edge  of  the  frame,  and  in  service,  when  worn  or 
broken,  may  be  replaced.  The  spade  reinforce  is  a  T-angle  riveted 
to  the  inside  of  the  spade  frame  and  the  bearing  plates  for  the  pur- 
pose of  stiffening  the  construction.  When  unlimbered  the  spade  pin 
is  secured  in  the  forward  seats  of  the  spade  bearings  and  rear  seats  of 
the  spade  brackets,  and  the  spade  key  is  secured  to  the  rear  seats  of 
the  bearing  plates  and  the  seats  in  the  spade-key  bracket.  For 
traveling  the  key  is  removed,  the  spade  is  rotated  about  the  pin 


44 

until  the  spade  key  seats  in  the  bearing  plates  coincide  with  the 
front  holes  of  the  spade  brackets,  when  the  key  is  inserted  to  lock 
tbe  spade  in  its  new  position.  The  spade  key  and  spade  pin  alsx) 
secure  two  handspikes,  which  are  arranged  to  fold  with  the  spade  in 
limbering. 

This  spade  is  interchangeable  with  the  one  used  on  carriages  with 
serial  numbers  1  to  40  and  will  be  issued  in  case  a  spade  of  the  older 
construction  requires  replacement,  although  it  will  also  be  necessary 
to  replace  the  spade-key  bracket. 

TRAIL   PROP. 

A  trail  prop  for  supporting  the  trail  in  limbering  is  hinged  in  brack- 
ets riveted  underneath  the  flasks  and  arranged  to  swing  forward 
against  the  bottom  of  the  trail  when  not  in  use,  where  it  is  held  by  a 
prop  chain  and  hook.  Four  trail  handles,  two  on  either  side,  are 
riveted  to  the  flasks.        ' 

The  attachments  for  carrying  the  sponge  and  the  head  staff  are 
placed  on  the  right  side  of  the  trail,  those  for  the  two  remaining  sec- 
tions of  the  staff  upon  the  left.  The  lower  attachments  or  sockets 
are  used  as  bases  for  the  wheel  guard  liners  designed  to  prevent  the 
wheels  of  the  limber  from  damaging  the  trail  when  making  short 
turns.  These  are  to  be  renewed  when  worn.  Two  seats  for  the  can- 
noneers serving  the  piece  are  riveted  to  brackets,  one  on  either  side 
of  the  trail. 

A  name  plate  giving  the  name  and  number  of  the  carriage,  model, 
name  of  manufacturer,  year  of  completion,  and  initials  of  inspector 
is  riveted  to  the  tool-box  top  plate.  In  all  reports  and  correspondence 
the  carriage  should  be  designated  by  the  number  and  model  given  on  the 
name  plate. 

PINTLE    BEARING   AND   YOKE. 

The  pintle  bearing  is  a  steel  casting  assembled  between  the  axle 
bearings  of  the  trail  and  supported  partly  by  the  axle  and  partly 
by  the  bearings,  to  which  it  is  secured  by  heavy  bolts.  Two  hinge 
lugs  cast  upon  its  forward  surface  receive  the  inner  ends  of  the  brake 
beams.  It  is  bored  and  lined  with  bronze  to  form  a  horizontal  taper- 
ing seat  for  the  pintle  yoke  and  provided  with  three  clips  which 
engage  mating  parts  on  the  yoke  and  firmly  secure  the  two  together 
while  allowing  rotation  of  the  yoke  about  a  vertical  axis.  Two  arms 
on  the  pintle  yoke  extend  from  its  base  upward  and  form  horizontal 
bearings  for  the  trunnions  of  the  cradle,  having  trunnion  caps  hinged 
at  the  rear  and  fastened  with  tap  bolts  in  front.  Replaceable 
bronze  liners  in  these  bearings  receive  the  weight  and  wear  due  to 
the  trunnions. 

CRADLE. 

Two  parallel  steel  tubes  7  inches  in  diameter  (spring  cylinders), 
connected  by  three  strong  steel  bands,  are  surmounted  by  heavy  steel 
rails,  shaped  to  fit  the  clips  of  the  gun  and  faced  with  bronze  wearing 


45 

surfaces,  to  form  the  cradle.  The  forward  ends  of  the  cradle  rails 
being  turned  upward  form  stops  against  which  the  locking  hoop  of 
the  gun  strikes  in  counter  recoil,  limiting  the  forward  movement  of 
the  gun  on  the  cradle. 

For  carriages  with  serial  numbers  1  to  40,  inclusive,  the  cradle  band, 
front,  carries  the  recoil  cylinder  lock  and  also  has  lugs  to  receive  the 
swing  bolts  of  a  detachable  extension  of  the  inner  ways  of  the  cradle. 
This  extension  rail  is  of  flanged  steel  formed  to  shape  and  built  up. 
It  has  at  its  rear  end  a  bracket  in  which  are  pivoted  the  extension 
rail  bolts,  and  about  one-fourth  of  its  length  forward  of  this  bracket 
are  the  extension  rail  bearings.  The  extension  rail  pin  passes 
through  the  lugs  provided  for  it  on  the  cylinder  covers  and  the  ex- 
tension rail  bearings,  forming  a  front  support  for  the  rail.  The 
separator  rivet  secures  the  sides  of  the  rail  body  together.  The 
extension  rail  is  designed  as  a  guide  for  the  front  clips  of  the  gun,  and 
is  not  intended  to  support  weight.  For  traveling,  after  the  gun  has 
been  retracted  to  its  traveling  position,  the  extension  rail  pin  is 
withdrawn  (to  be  replaced  later  in  the  extension  rail) ,  the  swing  bolts 
are  loosened,  and  the  extension  rail  carried  back  and  slipped  upon 
the  extension  rail  carrier,  which  hangs  from  suitable  fastenings  in  the 
rear  of  the  tool  box  in  the  trail.  The  carrier  consists  of  a  bottom 
plate  hung  by  a  hook,  at  its  rear  end,  to  the  trail  cover  plate  and 
secured  by  a  pin  with  a  spring  catch  at  the  front  end,  passing  through 
the  fastener  (male)  riveted  to  the  bottom  plate  and  the  fastener 
(female)  riveted  to  the  tool-box  rear  transom. 

The  cradle  band,  rear,  is  bored  to  engage  the  head  of  the  inner  ele- 
vating screw  and  has  a  boss  to  admit  the  point  of  the  elevating  and 
traversing  lock  bolt.  The  trunnion  band  has  a  threaded  seat  for  the 
recoil  cylinder.  The  cylinder  covers  close  the  front  ends  of  the  spring 
cylinders  and  act  as  spring  retainers  whenever  the  spring  rods  are 
free,  and  also  support  the  extension  rail.  Cylinder-cover  hinge  pins 
secure  the  covers  to  cylinder-cover  hinges  riveted  to  the  spring  cylin- 
ders. For  carriages  with  serial  numbers  above  Ifi)  the  cradle  band, 
front,  carries  the  recoil  cylinder  lock  only,  and  the  cradle  band,  rear, 
is  bored  to  engage  the  head  of  the  inner  elevating  screw  and  also  has 
a  lug  to  engage  the  elevating  and  traversing  lock  bar.  The  trunnion 
band  has  a  threaded  seat  for  the  recoil  cylinder.  The  cylinder  cover 
closes  the  front  ends  of  the  spring  cylinders  and  acts  as  a  spring 
retainer  whenever  the  spring  rods  are  free,  and  also  supports  the 
extension  rail.  Swing  bolts  pinned  to  the  cover  secure  it  to  the  swing 
bolt  forks  riveted  to  the  spring  cylinders.  The  extension  rail  is  of 
flange  steel  formed  to  shape  and  built  up.  It  is  designed  as  a  guide 
for  the  front  clips  of  the  gun  and  for  that  purpose  has  bronze  liners 
mounted  on  its  top  side.  Bearing  plates  on  the  sides  of  the  rail  at 
the  rear  have  seats  for  the  extension  rail  pin  and  plungers.  This  pin 
fastens  the  rail  to  the  seats  on  the  lower  portion  of  the  cylinder  cover. 


46 

In  the  firing  position,  two  plungers  secure  the  rail  to  the  cylinder 
cover  in  line  with  the  main  cradle  rail.  In  traveling,  after  the  gun 
has  been  retracted  to  its  traveling  position,  the  plungers  are  with- 
drawn from  their  seats  in  the  cylinder  cover,  allowing  the  extension 
rail  to  swing  around  the  pin.  A  latch  secured  to  the  front  end  of  the 
rail  engages  a  latch  socket  riveted  to  the  underside  of  the  cylinders, 
thus  holding  the  rail  out  of  the  way. 

For  all  carriages,  regardless  of  serial  number,  the  rear  ends  of  the 
spring  cylinders  are  flanged  inward  and  riveted  to  its  bronze  heads, 
against  which  rest  the  spring  columns.  The  left  cylinder  has  also 
a  bracket  for  the  shoulder  guard  and  the  right  cylinder  a  bracket  for 
the  firing  mechanism.  On  the  exterior  of  the  left  spring  cylinder  are 
riveted  sight  bracket  supports  for  the  front  and  rear  sights.  On  the 
right  spring  cylinder  are  the  recoil  indicator  guide  and  range  quad- 
rant fastening.  All  of  these  parts  which  are  riveted  together,  and 
including  the  cylinder  covers,  cylinder  cover  hinge  pins,  or  swing 
bolts  and  pins,  and  recoil  cylinder  lock,  are  considered  integral  parts 
of  the  cradle  and  are  included  in  the  designation  of  "one  cradle, 
complete." 

The  recoil  cylinder  is  a  steel  tube  77.4  inches  long  and  4.93  inches 
outside  diameter.  Its  rear  end  is  closed  by  a  forged-steel  stuffing 
box  screwed  into  the  cylinder  with  a  fiber  gasket  to  make  an  oil- 
tight  joint,  and  forming,  with  a  threaded  stuffing-box  gland,  a 
stuffing  box  packed  with  five  rings  of  Garlock's  hydraulic  waterproof 
packing  for  the  piston  rod.  The  cylinder  head  with  a  fiber  gasket 
closes  the  front  end.  The  front  end  of  the  cylinder  is  enlarged  to 
form  a  flange  5.3  inches  in  diameter  and  notched  to  take  a  spanner, 
which  also  fits  a  similar  flange  on  the  cylinder  head.  The  cylinder 
should  be  held  by  a  wrench  on  this  notched  flange  in  assembling  or 
removing  the  heads ;  it  should  never  be  clamped  in  a  vise  or  similarly 
held,  as  its  walls  are  thin,  and  while  amply  strong  for  the  purposes 
for  which  intended,  may  be  deformed  or  flattened  by  such  violent, 
usage.  The  ribs  of  the  flanges  are  lashed  with  copper  wire  to  prevent 
unscrewing.  Both  heads  have  small  holes  through  their  walls, 
closed  by  filling  and  drain  plugs  resting  on  oil-tight  copper  gaskets 
for  the  purpose  indicated  in  the  name  of  the  plugs.  For  carriages 
with  serial  numbers  1  to  Jfi,  inclusive,  the  cylinder  wall  near  the  front 
end  is  provided  with  three  notches  to  receive  the  recoil-cylinder 
lock.  The  notch  into  which  the  lock  should  fall  is  that  which 
brings  the  threaded  part  of  the  cylinder  nearest  to  being  flush  with 
the  front  of  the  trunnion  band,  as  this  insures  proper  relation  of 
the  piston  and  throttling  bars.  For  carriages  with  serial  numbers 
above  Jfi,  the  cylinder  wall  near  the  front  end  is  provided  with  one 
notch  to  receive  the  recoil-cylinder  lock.  The  cylinder  head  forms  a 
socket  for  the  counter-recoil  buffer,  a  tapered  bronze  rod  which 
fits  with  a  small  clearance  into  the  piston-rod  bore  when  the  gun 

_  -1 


47 

is  in  battery.  The  counter-recoil  buffer  is,  for  purposes  of  assemblage, 
a  portion  of  the  cylinder  head,  and  is  assembled  in  or  removed  from 
the  cylinder  with  the  cylinder  head.  On  the  interior  of  the  recoil 
cylinder  are  machined  three  longitudinal  ribs  or  throttling  bars  of 
uniform  width  but  varying  height.  Corresponding  notches  cut  in 
the  piston  form  ports  for  the  passage  of  the  liquid  from  one  side 
of  the  piston  to  the  other.  The  height  of  the  throttling  bars  along 
the  cylinder  determines  the  area  of  these  ports  and  is  calculated  so 
as  to  make  the  resistance  which  the  liquid  offers,  plus  the  resistance 
of  the  springs,  such  that  the  wheels  will  not  jump  from  the  ground 
when  the  piece  is  fired  at  0°  elevation.  This  object  is  accomplished 
by  making  at  each  instant  the  gravity  moment  of  the  system  about 
a  horizontal  axis  through  the  point  of  support  of  the  end  of  the  trail 
greater  than  the  sum  of  the  moments  of  the  piston-rod  pull  and  the 
spring  resistance  about  the  same  axis.  The  piston  rod  is  of  steel, 
fitted  with  a  bronze  piston-rod  head  screwed  on  against  a  shoulder 
at  the  front  end.  The  head  has  three  notches  cut»in  its  perimeter 
which  fit  over  the  throttling-bar  projections  on  the  cylinder  walls. 
The  front  end  of  the  piston  rod  is  bored  out  for  a  sufficient  depth 
to  take  the  counter-recoil  buffer,  which  fits  into  the  bore  with  a 
very  small  clearance.  In  counter  recoil,  the  oil  caught  in  this  bore 
can  escape  only  by  the  small  clearance  mentioned,  with  the  result 
that  the  return  of  the  gun  into  battery  is  so  eased  and  regulated 
that  all  shock  and  consequent  derangement  of  the  aim  of  the  piece 
is  eliminated.  The  rear  end  of  the  piston  rod  is  secured  to  the 
recoil  lug  on  the  gun  and  to  the  spring-rod  yoke  by  its  nut. 

Inside  each  spring  cylinder  of  the  cradle  is  a  column  of  helical 
springs  of  round  wire  in  three  sections,  called  the  outer  counter- 
recoil  springs,  separated  by  thin  washers  called  spring  separators, 
outer.  Within  this  column  is  a  spring  stirrup,  outer,  with  its  front 
end  enlarged  to  retain  a  spring-stirrup  flange,  outer,  which  bears 
against  the  front  end  of  the  outer-spring  column.  The  rear  end  of 
this  spring  stirrup,  outer,  is  contracted  inwardly  to  retain  a  spring- 
stirrup  head,  outer,  another  bronze  ring  against  which  a  second 
column  of  helical  springs  in  three  sections,  called  the  middle  counter- 
recoil  springs,  with  the  intermediate  separators,  bear.  This  in  turn 
contains  a  second  tubo,  the  spring  stirrup,  inner,  enlarged  outwardly 
and  provided  with  a  bronze  spring-stirrup  flange,  inner,  at  the 
forward  end  and  turned  inwardly  with  a  bronze  spring-stirrup  head, 
inner,  at  the  rear  end,  which  connects  and  surrounds  a  third  column 
of  helical  springs,  also  in  three  sections,  called  the  inner  counter- 
recoil  springs,  and  the  inner  separators.  Lastly,  a  spring  rod,  with 
a  bronze  spring-rod  flange  resting  against  a  solid  collar  formed  by 
enlarging  the  forward  end  of  the  rod,  passes  through  the  inner  springs, 
the  flange  bearing  against  the  front  end  of  the  spring,  the  rear  end 


48 

passing  through  a  heavy  cross  piece  behind  the  lug  of  the  gun,  called 
a  spring-rod  yoke,  and  fastened  to  the  same  by  a  nut.  When  the 
gun  with  the  spring-rod  yoke  and  spring  rods  moves  to  the  rear  in 
recoil  the  flanges  on  the  front  of  the  spring  rods  act  on  the  inner 
coils,  the  pressure  being  transmitted  to  the  middle  coils  by  the 
inner  stirrup  and  to  the  outer  coils  by  the  outer  stirrup  and  resisted 
by  the  rear  heads  of  the  spring  cylinders.  In  this  way  the  springs 
work  in  tandem  and  have  a  long  stroke  with  short  assembled  length. 
To  properly  return  the  gun  to  battery  at  high  angles  of  elevation, 
the  springs  are  assembled  with  an  initial  compression  of  1,000  pounds 
on  each  side. 

THE   FIRING   DEVICE. 

The  firing  device  consists  of  a  bracket  bolted  to  the  right  spring 
cylinder  head,  firing  handle,  handle-return  spring,  shaft-return  spring, 
firing-handle  shaft  and  pallet,  shaft  trip  collar,  shaft-retaining  collar, 
adjusting  screw,  trip  latch,  trip-latch  spring,  trip-latch  plunger,  and 
trip-collar  pin.     t 

The  bracket  has  a  cylindrical  portion,  the  cylinder  having  a  central 
diaphragm  or  partition.  In  the  rear  portion  of  this  cylinder  is  fitted 
the  shaft-return  spring  which  acts  on  the  firing-handle  shaft — that  is, 
this  spring  causes  the  firing  handle  shaft  and  pallet  to  return  to  their 
normal  position  after  the  sear  has  been  tripped  and  the  gun  fired, 
whether  the  operator  releases  the  firing  handle  or  not. 

The  firing  handle  is  mounted  loosely  on  the  forward  end  of  the 
firing-handle  shaft  and  pallet  and  is  connected  therewith  by  means 
of  a  shaft  trip  collar  and  latch.  The  collar  is  provided  with  a  squared 
opening  which  fits  over  a  correspondingly  squared  end  on  the  forward 
end  of  the  firing-handle  shaft. 

The  hub  of  the  firing  handle  is  provided  with  a  trip  latch  so  arranged 
that  the  latch  is  engaged  in  a  notch  in  the  periphery  of  the  shaft  trip 
collar. 

By  this  means  the  firing  handle  is  temporarily  attached  to  the 
shaft.  By  a  sufficient  downward  movement  of  the  firing  handle  the 
head  of  the  trip-latch  plunger  is  caused  to  come  in  contact  with  the 
end  of  the  adjusting  screw  located  in  the  firing  bracket.  This  engage- 
ment between  the  adjusting  screw  and  trip-latch  plunger  forces  the 
latter  upward,  thereby  releasing  the  trip  latch  and  permitting  the 
firing-handle  shaft  and  pallet  to  return  to  their  normal  position. 
Upon  the  release  of  the  firing  handle,  the  handle-return  spring  restores 
it  to  its  original  position. 

On  the  rear  end  of  the  firing-handle  shaft  is  formed  the  firing  pallet, 
which  projects  far  enough  to  the  rear  to  engage  a  projection  on  the 
lower  end  of  the  trigger  shaft.  The  firing  pallet  is  of  such  length 
that  the  gun  can  be  fired  when  within  2.5  inches  of  being  in  battery. 
By  pressing  down  on  the  firing  handle  the  following  results :  The  firing- 
handle  shaft  and  pallet  are  rotated,  the  shaft-return  and  handle-return 


49 

springs  are  put  under  additional  tension,  the  trigger  shaft  rotates, 
which  in  turn  rotates  the  trigger  fork,  compressing  the  firing-pin 
spring  through  the  medium  of  the  firing-spring  sleeve  until  the  front 
end  of  the  latter  trips  the  sear  and  releases  the  firing  pin. 

ACTION    OF  THE    MECHANISM   DURING   RECOIL. 

The  action  of  the  carriage  when  the  gun  is  fired  is  as  follows:  The 
gun  moves  to  the  rear  70  inches  on  the  cradle  ways,  carrying  with  it 
the  piston  rod,  spring  rods,  and  spring-rod  yoke  and  compressing  the 
counter-recoil  springs.  As  the  recoil  cylinder  remains  stationary  the 
oil  behind  the  piston  must  pass  to  its  forward  side.  The  energy  of 
recoil  of  the  gun  is  absorbed  by  the  resistance  which  the  oil  offers  to 
being  forced  through  small  openings  past  the  piston  and  by  the  resist- 
ance of  the  counter-recoil  springs.  The  energy  stored  up  by  the 
springs  returns  the  gun  to  its  firing  position.  This  return  movement 
is  eased  and  regulated  by  the  counter-recoil  buffer.  The  piston-rod 
pull  and  spring  resistance  are  transmitted  to  the  carriage,  but  owing 
to  its  weight  and  the  resistance  opposed  to  the  trail  spade  by  the 
earth  the  carriage  remains  stationary. 

RECOIL  INDICATOR   AND   DUST   GUARD. 

The  length  of  recoil  of  the  gun  upon  the  carriage  is  shown  by  the 
recoil  indicator,  a  simple  friction  slide  working  in  the  recoil  indicator 
guide,  which  is  mounted  upon  a  bracket  riveted  to  the  right  spring 
cylinder  in  a  convenient  position  for  observation.  The  slide  is 
actuated  by  the  recoil-indicator  throw  attached  to  a  projecting 
arm  of  the  dust  guard  with  two  pins.  The  bronze  dust  guard  is 
secured  by  three  button-head  screws  to  the  gun  between  the  locking 
hoop  and  front  clip  and  covers  and  protects  the  cradle  rails  from 
dust  and  dirt.  It  recoils  with  the  gun,  and  has  felt  liners  or  wipers 
which  sweep  the  cradle  rails  at  each  stroke  of  recoil  and  counter 
recoil. 

TRAVERSING   MECHANISM. 

The  traversing  mechanism  consists,  first,  of  a  bronze  travers- 
ing nut  pivoted  on  vertical  trunnions  mounted  in  the  traversing 
bracket  and  in  a  part  called  the  traversing  yoke  bolted  to  the 
traversing  bracket;  second,  a  traversing  screw  with  a  handwheel 
mounted  in  a  bearing  also  swinging  on  vertical  trunnions  supported 
by  the  traversing  screw  bracket,  with  cap,  bolted  to  the  left  flask 
of  the  trail. 

The  traversing  bracket  is  a  steel  casting  bolted  at  its  rear  end  to 
the  elevating  yoke  and  at  its  front  end  to  the  under  surface  of  the 
pintle  yoke,  the  combination  rotating  as  one  piece  in  the  pintle 
bearing. 

Longitudinal  movement  of  the  screw  is  prevented  by  a  shoul- 
der on  either  side  of  its  bearing.  When  the  handwheel  is  turned 
the  nut  travels  on  the  screw,  carrying  the  traversing  bracket 
10161—17 5* 


50 

with  it,  angular  motion  of  the  screw  with  reference  to  the  axis  of 
the  carriage  being  permitted  by  the  vertical  pivots  of  the  nut  and 
the  bearing.  An  azimuth  pointer  bolted  to  the  left  side  of  the 
elevating  yoke  indicates  upon  the  azimuth  scale  the  position  of  the 
gun  in  azimuth.  The  scale  is  carried  by  a  bracket  riveted  to  the 
left  flask  of  the  trail.  It  shows  an  allowable  traversing  movement 
of  140  milliemes,  70  on  each  side  of  the  axis  of  the  carriage,  with 
graduations  of  a  least  reading  of  5  milliemes. 

ELEVATING   MECHANISM. 

The  traversing  bracket  is  extended  to  the  rear  by  two  side  plates, 
the  elevating  yoke  sides  and  a  rear  cross  piece  called  the  elevating 
yoke  transom,  of  cast  steel  held  solidly  together  by  five  bolts.  The 
elevating  yoke  transom  has  a  wide  bearing  surface  resting  upon 
the  traversing  transom  liner,  rear,  and  is  provided  with  a  clip  finished 
on  a  radius  from  the  pintle  bearing  center  which  embraces  a  mating 
part  of  the  liner  and  prevents  vertical  motion  of  the  elevating  yoke. 
The  elevating  yoke  sides  are  bored  about  a  horizontal  axis  normal 
to  the  center  line  of  the  yoke  and  fitted  with  bronze  bushings  to 
receive  the  elevating  gear  bracket. 

The  elevating  gear  (PI.  XI)  is  of  the  double  screw  type  and  consists 
of  an  inner  and  an  outer  elevating  screw,  an  elevating  gear  bracket, 
a  bevel  gear,  two  bevel  pinions,  and  two  shafts  with  handwheels. 
The  inner  elevating  screw  is  a  steel  screw,  threaded  with  a  right- 
hand  thread.  It  is  attached  at  its  upper  end  by  the  elevating  pin  to 
the  cradle  band  rear.  The  outer  elevating  screw  is  of  bronze  and  is 
threaded  on  the  exterior  with  a  left-hand  thread,  while  the  bore  is 
threaded  with  a  right-hand  thread  to  take  the  inner  elevating  screw. 
On  the  exterior  are  also  cut  two  longitudinal  keyways  in  which  the 
keys  of  the  bevel  gear  work. 

The  elevating  gear  bracket  is  bored  out  and  threaded  to  take  the 
outer  elevating  screw,  and  is  provided  with  two  trunnions,  which 
rest  in  bearings  in  the  elevating  yoke  sides.  These  trunnions  are 
bored  and  bushed  to  form  bearings  for  the  elevating  pinion  shafts,  of 
which  there  are  two,  one  on  each  side,  projecting  through  slots  in 
the  flasks  of  the  trail.  A  steel  elevating  bevel  pinion  is  pinned  and 
keyed  on  the  inner  end  of  each  pinion  shaft  and  meshes  with  a  bronze 
elevating  bevel  gear  mounted  on  the  outer  elevating  screw  in  a 
seat  slotted  through  the  gear  bracket.  The  bore  of  the  bevel  gear 
is  fitted  with  two  steel  keys,  which  fit  into  the  keyways  in  the  outer 
screw.  This  arrangement  constrains  the  outer  screw  to  rotate  with 
the  bevel  gear  while  permitting  it  a  relative  longitudinal  motion. 
The  revolution  of  the  elevating  handwheel  rotates  the  pinions  and 
through  them  the  bevel  gear.  The  outer  screw  turns  with  the  latter 
and  moves  up  or  down  in  the  elevating  gear  bracket  according  to  the- 


dir 


51 


ection  of  its  rotation.  The  inner  screw  is  prevented  from  rotating 
by  its  attachment  to  the  cradle  and  on  account  of  the  direction  of 
its  threads  moves  into  or  out  of  the  outer  screw  as  the  latter  is 
screwed  into  or  out  of  the  gear  bracket. 

For  carriages  with  serial  numbers  1  to  40,  inclusive,  an  elevating 
screw  cover  of  bronze  is  attached  by  three  springs  to  the  lower  end 
of  the  bracket  to  exclude  dust  from  below,  while  for  carriages  with 
serial  numbers  above  40,  an  elevating  screw  cover  is  attached  to 
the  bracket  threads  and  is  secured  by  a  split  pin.  In  traveling,  the 
elevating  gear  should  be  run  to  the  position  of  maximum  elevation 
to  house  the  screws  in  the  elevating  gear  bracket.  In  this  position, 
for  carriages  with  serial  numbers  1  to  40,  inclusive,  the  face  of  the 
lug  on  the  elevating  bevel  gear  strikes  against  the  elevating  bevel 
gear  stop  on  the  rear  cradle  band,  and  for  carriages  with  serial  num- 
bers above  40,  the  face  of  the  lug  strikes  against  a  lug  integral  with 
foe  rear  cradle  band.  The  mechanism  is  designed  to  give  a  maxi- 
mum elevation  of  15°  and  a  maximum  depression  of  5°. 


ELEVATING    AND  TRAVERSING   LOCK. 


To  relieve  the  pointing  mechanism  from  all  strains  in  traveling, 
an  elevating  and  traversing  lock  is  provided  by  which  the  cradle 
may  be  securely  locked  to  the  trail. 

For  carriages  with  serial  numbers  1  to  40,  inclusive,  this  arrangement 
is  as  follows: 

A  lock  bolt  is  mounted  in  the  lock  bolt  casing  which  is  a  bracket 
bolted  to  the  traversing  transom  rear  and  tool  box  front  transom. 
On  the  end  of  the  lock  bolt  is  riveted  and  pinned  the  lock  bolt  end 
on  which  is  pinned  the  link.  The  lock  bolt  spring  is  located  around 
the  bolt  in  the  casing  and  tends  to  keep  the  bolt  toward  the  front. 
The  lever  fulcrum  is  threaded  and  pinned  to  the  casing  and  acts  as 
a  fulcrum  for  the  lever,  one  end  of  which  is  formed  into  a  handle  and 
the  other  is  pinned  to  the  link.  On  the  tool  box  top  plate  is  riveted 
the  lever  guide  to  which  the  lever  is  attached  when  the  lock  bolt  is 
not  secured  in  its  seat  on  the  bottom  of  the  rear  cradle  band.  The 
bolt  is  arranged  to  enter  its  seat  when  the  gun  is  at  15°  elevation  and 
0°  azimuth. 

Carriages  with  serial  numbers  above  Jfi  have  the  following  arrange- 
ment: 

A  lock  bar  is  seated  in  bearings  riveted  to  each  flask.  To  the  left 
end  of  the  bar  is  pinned  the  lock  bar  lever  on  the  end  of  which  is 
threaded  the  handle  and  in  the  handle  is  located  a  spring  and  plunger. 
When  the  gun  is  at  15°  elevation  and  0°  azimuth  the  lock  bar  may 
be  rotated  until  the  lock  bar  fully  engages  the  lug  of  the  rear  cradle 
band.  In  that  position  the  plunger  in  the  handle  engages  the  lever 
fastening  riveted  to  the  left  flask  and  locks  the  bar. 


52 


TRAVELING   LOCK. 


These  elevating  and  traversing'  locks  are  sufficiently  strong  to  secure 
the  gun  when  traveling  short  distances.  1  or  use  on  long  marches  it 
is  desirable  to  equalize  the  load  on  the  wheels  of  carriage  and  limber. 
The  gun  is  disconnected  from  the  spring  columns  and  piston  rod  and 
retracted  until  the  breech  lug  engages  the  traveling  lock  provided  in 
the  trail.  A  cast-steel  bracket — traveling  lock  frame — is  riveted 
between  the  flasks  some  distance  below  the  tool  box.  Two  cast-steel 
traveling  lock  legs  are  pivoted  in  this  frame,  one  on  each  side,  the 
right  leg  having  a  folding  prop  for  supporting  it  in  an  inclined  posi- 
tion. The  shifting  of  weights  must  be  done  with  the  elevating  and 
traversing  lock  bolt  or  lock  bar  engaged  with  the  cradle  and  the  car- 
riage limbered  to  avoid  lifting  the  weights  of  the  gun  in  limbering 
and  to  avoid  the  tendency  of  the  piece  to  slide  off  the  inclined  cradle 
ways  when  not  held  by  the  springs.  The  spring-rod  and  piston-rod 
nuts  being  removed,  the  spring  yoke  and  piston-rod  nut  should  be 
placed  in  the  tool  box  and  the  spring-rod  nuts  reassembled  on  the 
spring  rods  and  secured  by  their  split  pins  to  prevent  loss.  The  right 
leg  of  the  traveling  lock  being  raised  and  supported  by  its  prop,  the 
gun  is  slipped  back  until  the  breech  lug  stops  against  the  leg.  The 
left  leg  is  now  raised  into  position  in  front  of  the  breech  lug  and  the 
lock  bolt  and  sleeve  inserted  and  secured  by  the  lock-bolt  nut.  The 
traveling  lock  cover  should  be  fixed  in  the  fasteners  provided  for 
either  the  open  or  closed  positions.  No  special  tools  should  ordi- 
narily be  required  for  this  operation,  the  standard  pole  or  other 
improvised  rod  being  used  to  start  the  gun. 


ROAD    BRAKE. 


The  road  brake  is  of  the  lever  type.  Two  brake-shaft  brackets  are 
keyed  to  the  axle,  one  on  each  side  of  the  trail.  Each  is  split  and 
clamped  to  the  axle  with  two  bolts  which  lie  in  notches  in  the  axle 
key  and  prevent  displacement  of  the  brackets  and  longitudinal 
movement  of  the  trail  on  the  axle.  These  brackets  have  bearing 
lugs  with  bronze  bushings  forward  of  the  axle  for  the  brake  cranks, 
arms  extending  to  the  rear  upon  which  are  suspended  the  apron 
latches,  and  lugs  to  which  is  bolted  the  main  shield  plate.  The 
brake-shaft  bracket,  right,  has  also  a  fan-shaped  flange  to  which  is 
bolted  a  forged-steel  brake  segment.  Two  brake  beams  of  cast  steel 
are  pivoted  in  lugs  on  the  front  of  the  pintle  bearing  and  at  their 
outer  ends  carry  brake  shoes  of  cast  iron  hinged  on  vertical  pivots. 
Brake  rods  in  tension  connect  the  forward  ends  of  the  brake  beams 
to  the  brake  cranks  upon  the  brake  shaft.  These  rods  are  in  several 
pieces;  the  brake-rod  passes  through  a  stiff  helical  brake-rod  spring 
and  the  end  of  a  bronze  brake-spring  cover  and  is  screwed  into  the 
brake-rod  end  which  is  joined  to  the  brake  beam  by  the  brake-rod 


53 

pin.  The  brake-spring  cover  end  is  screwed  into  the  brake-spring 
cover,  the  spring  being  compressed  between  the  forward  end  of  the 
cover  and  a  flange  on  the  brake-rod,  which  is  arranged  to  have  a 
small  longitudinal  movement  against  the  pressure  of  the  spring. 
Adjustment  to  compensate  for  wear  of  the  brake  shoes  is  secured  by- 
varying  the  distance  the  brake-rod  end  is  screwed  upon  the  brake 
rod.  The  brake-rod  springs  insure  the  desired  pressure  of  the  brake 
shoes  on  tires  of  wheels  having  variable  radii.  The  hubs  of  the  brake 
cranks  form  sleeves,  assembled  from  the  outside  in  the  bearings  of 
the  brake-shaft  brackets.  The  brake  shaft  is  squared  at  the  ends  to 
enter  the  brake  cranks  and  is  pinned  to  them  to  prevent  longitu- 
dinal displacement.  The  squared  right  end  of  the  shaft  also  carries  a 
sleeve  to  which  is  hinged  the  brake  lever.  When  the  brakes  are  set, 
the  lever  is  held  by  the  teeth  of  the  brake-segment  rack  engaging  the 
brake-lever  catch,  a  small  steel  piece  riveted  to  the  brake  lever,  and 
which  may  be  replaced  when  broken  or  worn.  A  spring  holds  the 
lever  and  catch  in  contact  with  the  segment.  The  brake  is  to  be  used 
as  a  firing  as  well  as  a  road  brake. 

THE    8HIELD. 

The  shield  for  the  protection  of  the  crew  is  hardened  steel  plate 
0.15  inch  thick,  made  in  three  parts — the  apron,  the  main  shield,  and 
the  top  shield.  The  main  shield  is  divided  by  the  opening  for  the 
gun  and  cradle,  the  two  sides  being  joined  at  the  top  by  a  flange-steel 
hood,  riveted  on.  It  is  rigidly  attached  by  bolts  to  the  brake  shaft 
brackets  and  is  braced  by  two  main  shield  braces  reaching  from  its 
upper  corners  to  the  trail  flasks.  The  port  in  the  left  plate  for  the 
peep  sight,  when  the  sight  is  not  being  used,  is  covered  by  the  peep- 
sight  port  shutter.  A  catch  on  the  rear  of  the  shutter  secures  it  in  a 
closed  position.  To  its  lower  edge,  which  is  about  3  inches  below 
the  center  line  of  the  axle,  is  hinged  the  apron,  20  inches  long.  For 
traveling  this  is  swung  up  to  the  rear  and  held  by  two  apron  latches 
attached  to  the  arms  of  the  brake-shaft  brackets. 

The  apron-latch  bodies  are  pivoted  to  the  arms  of  the  brake-shaft 
brackets;  the  lower  end  of  the  latch  body  is  formed  into  a  hook 
which  engages  an  apron-latch  staple  riveted  in  the  apron,  and  holds 
the  latter  in  its  traveling  position.  To  prevent  accidental  disengage- 
ment of  the  hook  from  the  staple,  the  opening  of  the  hook  is  closed  by 
the  apron-latch  plunger  seated  in  the  body  and  pressed  outward 
into  action  by  a  coiled  spring.  A  grip  lever,  called  the  apron-latch 
lever,  is  provided  for  withdrawing  the  plunger  from  the  hook  opening 
when  it  is  desired  to  disengage  the  hook  from  the  staple. 

The  top  shield  is  hinged  to  the  main  shield  and  braced  to  two 
brackets  on  the  main  shield  by  the  top  shield  braces,  which  serve 
to  fasten  the  top  shield  in  either  the  raised  or  folded  positions. 


54 

Raised,  the  upper  edge  of  the  top  shield  is  about  69.25  inches  above 
the  ground,  sufficient  to  afford  protection  from  long  range  or  high 
angle  fire  to  cannoneers  on  the  trail  seats.  Folded,  the  top  is  low- 
ered to  the  rear  to  allow  the  panoramic  sight  line  to  sweep  above  it. 
The  port  in  the  top  shield  for  the  panoramic  sight  may  also  be  closed, 
when  the  sight  is  not  in  use,  by  the  panoramic  sight-port  shutter, 
similar  in  design  to  the  shutter  used  on  the  main  shield. 

SHOULDER  GUARD. 

For  the  protection  of  the  cannoneer  sighting  the  gun  a  shoulder 
guard  is  attached  to  the  left  spring  cylinder  at  its  rear  end.  The 
shoulder-guard  bracket  is  riveted  to  the  cylinder,  but  the  guard 
itself  is  detachable  and  is  secured  in  place  by  a  steel  pin. 

SIGHT   AND   RANGE    QUADRANT  TRAVELING   CASES. 

A  leather-lined  flange-steel  box,  called  the  panoramic  sight  case, 
attached  to  the  rear  face  (left  side)  of  the  main  shield,  provides  a 
place  for  the  panoramic  sight  in  traveling.  This  box  has  a  hinged 
lid,  secured  by  a  hasp  and  turnbuckle,  and  is  provided  with  the 
usual  padlock  with  chain  for  locking  the  box.  The  bronze  supports 
for  the  sight  case  are  fastened  to  the  shield  by  four  bolts.  The  sight 
case  is  supported  between  springs  compressed  in  the  supports  and 
held  in  place  by  pins  acting  as  spring  rods.  The  mounting  is  such 
that  the  sight  is  well  protected  from  injury  due  to  shocks  and  jars. 
A  similar  case,  called  the  range  quadrant  case,  is  mounted  in  essen- 
tially the  same  manner  in  supports  bolted  to  the  right  flask  of  the 
trail,  and  is  provided  for  the  safe  transport  of  the  range  quadrant. 
Packing  blocks  located  in  the  tool-box  in  the  trail  form  a  seat  for  the 
rear  right  shank.  Canvas  covers  are  provided  for  the  front-sight 
and  rear-sight  brackets,  the  rear-sight  shank,  and  the  sponge.  They 
should  be  kept  in  place  when  these  parts  are  not  in  use. 

DESCRIPTION   OP   ONE    OF  THE   ACCESSORIES. 

Spring  compressor  No.  4  is  now  furnished  for  all  carriages.  It 
consists  of  a  rope  about  5  feet  7  inches  long,  having  at  one  end  a 
swivel  and  socket  for  attachment  to  the  spring  rod,  and  at  the  other 
end  a  socket  for  attachment  to  a  plug  on  a  10-foot  length  of  rope. 
This  10-foot  rope  is  used  only  for  passing  the  spring  compressor  through 
the  spring  columns.  The  spring  compressor  eye  replaces  it  for  attach- 
ing the  compressor  rope  to  the  lifting  hook  of  the  duplex  chain  block. 
The  operation  is  described  on  page  58. 

This  spring  compressor  is  carried  in  the  battery  wagon,  and  two 
will  be  furnished  per  battery. 

A  list  of  the  tools  and  accessories  furnished  with  each  carriage  will 
be  found  on  page  132. 


55 

DISMOUNTING   AND   ASSEMBLING   GUN    AND    CARRIAGE. 

To  remove  the  recoil  indicator  throw:  Withdraw  the  pins  which 
attach  the  throw  to  the  dust  guard.  The  pins  may  he  reassembled 
in  the  throw,  with  the  split  pins  spread  to  prevent  loss  if  the  throw 
is  to  remain  disengaged  any  length  of  time. 

To  dismount  the  gun:  Remove  the  recoil  indicator  throw,  unscrew 
the  piston  rod  and  spring  rod  nuts,  remove  the  spring  rod  yoke,  and 
shove  the  gun  to  the  rear  until  the  clips  are  free  from  the  cradle. 
The  weight  of  the  gun  is  carried  by  the  duplex  chain  block  and  the 
chain  sling  provided  for  this  purpose.  If  the  gun  is  dismounted  in  the 
gun  shed,  the  block  may  be  attached  to  the  roof;  if  in  the  field,  it 
may  be  slung  from  the  branches  of  a  tree  or  some  improvised  tripod. 
In  either  case,  the  chain  sling  is  looped  around  the  gun,  in  front 
beyond  the  front  clip,  and  in  the  rear  between  the  clips  and  the  gun 
lug.  Burlap  should  be  placed  between  to  protect  the  various  parts. 
It  should  be  noted  that  the  center  of  gravity  is  located  about  51 
inches  from  the  rear  face  of  the  breech. 

To  mount  the  gun:  Reverse  the  order  of  dismounting.  The  dust 
guard  is  to  be  assembled  with  the  gun. 

In  moving  the  gun  on  or  off  the  cradle,  particular  care  must  be 
taken  to  support  the  breech  end,  so  that  the  gun  clips  are  in  prolonga- 
tion of  the  cradle  rails.  The  firing  shaft  is  also  quite  liable  to  injury 
during  this  maneuver,  and  care  should  he  taken  to  prevent  its  being 
struck  by  the  muzzle  of  the  gun  or  by  implements  in  the  hands  of 
the  cannoneers.  The  cradle  should  be  placed  at  the  desired  eleva- 
tion and  azimuth  before  beginning  either  of  these  maneuvers  and  not 
changed  during  its  progress,  since  the  working  of  either  the  elevating 
or  traversing  mechanisms  when  the  gun  is  only  part  way  in  battery 
brings  an  excessive  and  unnecessary  strain  and  wear  upon  these 
parts. 

To  dismount  the  extension  rail  on  carriages  with  serial  numbers  1  to 
40,  inclusive:  The  gun  being  ordinarily  in  retracted  position,  with- 
draw the  extension  rail  pin,  loosen  the  nuts  of  the  extension  rail 
bolts,  and  swing  them  free  of  the  clips  of  the  band,  draw  the  rail  for- 
ward and  replace  the  extension  rail  pin  in  the  extension  rail.  The 
extension  rail  is  carried  in  the  trail. 

To  assemble  the  extension  rail  in  the  trail  for  the  same  numbered  car- 
riages: Pull  the  pin  in  the  forward  fasteners  of  the  extension  rail 
carrier,  shove  the  carrier  to  the  rear  and  disengage  the  hook,  slide 
the  extension  rail  on  the  carrier,  starting  the  front  end  of  the  rail  on 
the  forward  end  of  the  carrier  until  the  catch  of  the  carrier  locks  the 
two  together;  assemble  the  hook  of  the  carrier  in  the  trail  first,  and 
then  engage  the  forward  fasteners  and  pin. 

To  remove  the  extension  rail  of  carriages  with  serial  numbers  above 
40:  The  gun  being  ordinarily  in  the  retracted  position,  disconnect 


56 

the  extension  rail  plungers  and  allow  the  extension  rail  to  swing 
downward  around  the  extension  rail  pin.  Swing  the  extension  rail 
rearward  until  the  latch  plunger  on  the  extension  rail  engages  the 
usion  rail  latch  socket  on  the  cradle.  Assemble  in  the  reverse 
order. 

To  dismount  the  recoil  cylinder:  Bring  the  cradle  to  approximately 
0°  elevation,  remove  the  extension  rail  and  piston  rod  nut.  Release 
the  recoil  cylinder  lock  on  the  underside  of  the  cradle  band  front  by 
pulling  the  split  pin  and  allowing  the  lock  to  drop  out  of  the  slot  in 
the  cylinder  (for  carriages  1  to  40,  inclusive,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
mark  the  slot  with  chalk  or  pencil  for  identification  in  assembling), 
unscrew  the  cylinder  from  its  seat  in  the  trunnion  band,  moving  the 
end  of  the  spanner  wrench  from  the  right  side  of  the  carriage  toward 
the  left,  and  withdraw  the  cylinder  forward  from  the  cradle. 

Do  not  allow  the  threads  on  the  cylinder  or  piston  rod  to  strike 
the  front  band  or  become  damaged  in  any  way.  Should  the  piston 
rod  stick  in  the  gun  lug,  it  may  be  started  by  light  blows  from  a 
block  of  wood  after  the  cylinder  is  partially  withdrawn  from  the 
cradle.  The  front  end  of  the  piston  rod  is  close  to  the  front  head 
of  the  cylinder  when  both  are  in  firing  position.  Hence  battering 
the  rear  end  of  the  piston  rod  will  result  in  driving  the  piston  against 
the  front  cylinder  head  to  the  probable  damage  of  both. 

To  assemble  the  recoil  cylinder:  Reverse  the  operation  of  dismount- 
ing, screwing  the  cylinder  into  the  trunnion  band  and  assembling 
the  cylinder  lock  in  the  notch.  For  carriages  with  serial  numbers 
1  to  40,  inclusive,  this  notch  should  be  that  one  which  brings  the 
threaded  part  of  the  cylinder  nearest  flush  with  the  front  of  the 
trunnion  band  and  the  filling  plug  in  the  stuffing  box  on  top. 

To  drain  the  recoil  cylinder:  For  carriages  with  serial  numbers  1 
to  40,  inclusive,  bring  the  cradle  to  0°  elevation  or  slight  depression, 
remove  the  drain  plug  in  the  front  cylinder  head  and  loosen  the  one 
in  the  stuffing  box.  Should  the  front  plug  not  be  in  the  lowest 
possible  position,  the  cylinder  may  be  rotated  by  loosening  the 
recoil  cylinder  lock,  or  the  cylinder  may  be  entirely  dismounted. 
As  soon  as  thoroughly  drained,  replace  the  drain  plug  and  tighten 
securely. 

For  carriages  with  serial  numbers  above  40,  elevate  the  cradle 
to  nearly  maximum  elevation  and  remove  the  drain  plug  near  the 
lowest  element  of  the  stuffing  box,  and  loosen  the  filling  plug  near 
the  top  element  of  the  box.  After  the  cylinder  is  thoroughly  drained, 
replace  the  lower  drain  plug  and  tighten  securely. 

To  fill  the  recoil  cylinder:  If  the  cylinder  is  not  completely  fitted, 
loss  of  stability  will  occur  and  higher  stresses  than  normal  will  be 
developed  in  the  carriage;  for  this  reason  the  cylinder  should  be  filled 
with  the  greatest  care;  a  commissioned  officer  should  himself  verify  that 


57 

the  cylinder  is  full  and  that  no  air  is  left  in  it,  with  the  exception  of  the 
void  noted  below. 

The  easiest  way  to  fill  the  cylinder  is  to  fiU  it  when  disassembled 
from  the  carriage.  If  this  is  impracticable,  fill  as  follows:  Depress  the 
gun  to  maximum  depression  and  remove  the  top  filling  plug  in  the 
stuffing  box.  FiU  slowly  through  this  hole,  using  the  filling  funnel 
furnished  with  the  store  limber.  When  apparently  full,  allow  a  few 
minutes  for  the  oil  to  settle  and  pocketed  air  to  escape  and  then  refill. 
When  satisfied  that  the  cylinder  is  entirely  full,  remove  the  funnel  and 
elevate  the  gun  enough  to  allow  about  10  cubic  inches  {about  one-third 
pint)  of  oil  to  escape,  thus  providing  a  void  for  the  expansion  of  the 
oil.      Then  screw  the  filling  plug  in  tightly. 

It  may  happen  that  after  firing  a  few  rounds  the  gnu  will  not 
return  to  battery.  This  may  be  due  to,  first,  weakness  of  springs; 
second,  stuffing  box  gland  being  screwed  up  too  tightly;  or,  third, 
the  oil  having  expanded,  due  to  heat. 

In  either  ease  the  cause  must  be  ascertained  and  remedied;  if  due 
to  expansion  of  oil,  it  is  proven  by  the  fact  that  the  gun  can  not  be 
pushed  into  battery  by  force  exerted  on  the  breech.  In  that  case 
depress  to  maximum  depression  and  remove  the  filling  ping.  Ti.e 
oil  will  now  escap  ■.  permitting  the  gun  to  return  to  battery. 

Approximately  32  pints  of  oil  are  required  for  filling  the  cylinder. 
Hydroline  oil  of  a  specific  gravity  of  0.85  is  furnished  by  the  ( Ordnance 
Department  for  use  in  these  cylinders;  it  is  characterized  by  its  low 
freezing  point  and  by  its  noncorrosive  action  on  metals.  The  <>il 
used  in  the  cylinder  is  to  be  clean  and  free  from  grit  and  dirt;  to 
insure  this  it  is  to  be  strained  through  a  clean  piece  of  lin<  n  or  muslin 
before  using. 

In  emergencies  water  may  be  used  in  the  cylinder.  This  should  be 
done  only  when  absolutely  necessary  and  never  in  freezing  weaiht  / ,  and  as 
soon  as  practicable  the  cylinder  is  to  be  empt'mL  cleaned,  and  thoroughly 
dried,  and  fiUed  with  hydroline  oil. 

To  remove  the  piston  and  piston  rod:  With  the  cylinder  in  the  cradle, 
bring  the  mull  >  to  0°  elevation  and  drain  out  the  oil.  Unscrew  the 
front  cylinder  head  and  remove  it  with  the  counter-recoil  buffer. 
Take  off  the  piston-rod  nut,  slacken  the  gland  to  release  the  pressure 
on  the  rod,  and  pull  the  piston  and  rod  out  to  the  front.  In  replacing 
the  rod  it  will  probably  not  b4  found  necessary  to  remove  the  gland 
and  packing.  In  dismounting  or  assembling  the  front  cylinder  head, 
the  cylinder  should  n:*ver  be  clamped  in  a  vise,  as  its  walls  are  thin. 
and  not  intended  to  withstand  such  usage.  The  rear  cylinder  hea 
stuffing  box — should  never  be  unscrewed. 

To  pack  the  stuffing  box:  The  stuffing  box  is  packed  with  live  rings 
of  Garlock's  hydraulic  waterproof  packing,  0.375  square.  The  pack- 
ing is  issued  cut  into  rings  of  such  size  that  the  ends  meet  around  the 


58 

piston  rod.  The  latter  being  assembled,  each  ring,  placed  so  as  to 
break  joints  with  the  preceding  one,  is  forced  in  succession  to  its  seat 
by  a  packing  tool  of  copper  or  hard  wood,  one  end  of  which  is  shaped 
like  a  carpenter's  gouge  and  the  other  end  forms  a  handle  strong 
enough  to  stand  light  taps  from  a  hammer.  Such  a  tool  may  be 
readily  improvised  by  the  battery  artificer.  After  the  five  rings  are 
firmly  seated  in  the  box  screw  the  gland  down  on  the  packing. 

In  assembling  the  gland  be  sure  that  at  least  six  of  its  threads  are 
engaged  with  the  threads  of  the  stuffing  box;  otherwise  the  threads 
of  the  gland  may  be  stripped  in  firing.  With  new  packing  it  may  be 
found  difficult  to  insert  more  than  four  rings  and  secure  sufficient 
engagement  of  the  gland.  In  such  a  case  the  box  should  be  packed 
witli  four  rings  and  the  piece  fired  a  few  rounds,  after  which  the  fifth 
ring  should  be  inserted. 

Adjustment  of  the  gland:  The  adjustment  of  the  gland  will  require 
the  exercise  of  some  judgment.  If  screwed  up  too  tight,  the  fric- 
tional  resistance  of  the  packing  on  the  piston  rod  will  be  so  much 
increased  that  the  counterrecoil  springs  may  fail  to  return  the  gun 
to  battery,  especially  at  high  angles  of  elevation.  It  should  be 
screwed  up  just  tight  enough  to  prevent  the  leakage  of  oil  through 
the  stuffing  box. 

The  necessity  for  dismounting  parts  of  the  recoil  cylinder  will 
seldom  arise.  It  should  be  done  only  in  the  presence  of  a  commis- 
sioned officer,  who  should  see  that  the  parts  are  handled  with  the 
greatest  care.  In  assembling,  the  parts  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned, 
as  the  clearances  in  the  cylinder  are  very  small  and  the  presence  of 
small  foreign  particles  may  interfere  with  the  proper  working  of  the 
assembled  parts. 

To  assemble  the  spring  system:  With  the  cradle  at  maximum  eleva- 
tion and  the  trail  horizontal  shove  the  first  section  of  the  outer 
springs  into  its  spring  cylinder  until  its  front  end  is  about  2  inches 
in,  set  up  a  separator  against  the  forward  end  of  this  section  and 
enter  the  second  section,  keeping  the  separator  upheld  between  the 
sections ;  similarly  when  the  outer  end  of  the  second  section  is  2  inches 
inside  the  spring  cylinder  enter  the  second  separator  and  third  section 
of  spring.  Shove  the  column  in  against  the  rear  end  of  the  spring 
cylinder  (the  front  end  of  the  last  section  will  project  about  30  inches) , 
enter  the  outer  stirrup  and  shove  it  in  the  outer  springs  until  its  for- 
ward flange  rests  against  the  end  of  the  spring;  it  will  then  hold  the 
last  section  in  line.  Proceed  in  like  manner  to  assemble  the  interme- 
diate spring  sections  and  separators;  the  forward  end  of  the  last  sec- 
tion will  project  about  20  inches  from  the  outer  stirrup.  Place  one 
section  of  the  inner  spring  column  in  the  inner  stirrup  and  the  two 
others,  with  the  separators,  on  the  spring  rod.  Pass  the  spring-rod 
connection  end  of  the  spring  compressor  rope  through  the  stirrup  and 


59 

one  section  of  spring  from  the  rear  and  screw  it  on  the  rear  end  of  the 
rod ;  the  rope,  stirrup,  springs,  and  spring  rod  are  now  entered  as  one 
piece  in  the  intermediate  springs,  the  rope  passing  out  the  rear  end 
of  the  spring  cylinder.  After  the  springs  are  located  at  their  assem- 
bled free  height  as  above,  the  spring  compressor  extension  is  discon- 
nected and  in  its  place  is  screwed  the  spring  compressor  eye.  The 
lifting  hook  of  the  chain  of  the  duplex  block,  secured  to  the  rear  end 
of  the  trail  by  passing  the  hook  on  the  block  under  a  crowbar  placed 
across  and  in  rear  of  the  handspikes  or  held  by  means  of  a  picket  rope, 
is  brought  fonvard  and  attached  to  the  eye.  The  carriage  should  now 
be  slightly  traversed  so  that  the  taut  rope  will  lie  in  the  center  line  of 
the  spring  cylinder. 

In  compressing  the  springs  it  will  be  found  that  the  flange  of  the 
outer  stirrup  tends  to  sag  and  catch  on  the  front  end  of  the  spring 
cylinder,  and  at  the  same  time  the  rear  end  of  the  stirrup  must  be 
carefully  guided  through  the  rear  spring  cylinder  head ;  similarly  the 
inner  stirrup  must  be  watched  and  guided  as  its  flanges  enter  the 
outer  stirrup.  When  the  springs  are  sufficiently  compressed  the 
spring  cylinder  cover  is  to  be  assembled,  care  being  taken  to  insure 
the  exact  adjustment  of  hinge  pins  and  split  pins  or  swing  bolts.  The 
compressor  rope  may  now  be  slackened  and  disengaged  from  the 
spring  rod  and  the  other  side  of  the  system  proceeded  with.  In 
assembling  the  other  side  of  the  system  for  carriages  with  serial  num- 
bers 1  to  40,  inclusive,  the  same  method  is  used  and  the  spring  rod 
yoke  is  attached  when  the  two  spring  cylinder  covers  are  in  place. 

In  assembling  the  other  side  of  the  system  for  carriages  with  serial 
numbers  above  40,  it  is  necessary  to  secure  the  spring  compressor 
block  to  the  assembled  spring  rod  and  then  remove  the  spring- 
cylinder  cover.  When  the  two  columns  are  assembled  the  cover  is 
again  attached,  the  block  removed,  and  the  spring-rod  yoke  assem- 
bled in  place. 

As  the  spring  columns  are  assembled  under  a  load  of  1,000  pounds, 
serious  results  may  attend  a  sudden  release  by  breakage  of  the  rope 
or  other  part  while  under  tension.  The  ropes  should  be  carefully 
inspected  before  using,  and  all  persons  be  required  to  keep  arms  and 
bodies  away  from  the  front  of  the  spring  column  during  these  opera- 
tions. Due  to  the  inequalities  of  the  spring  pressure  of  the  inner 
intermediate  and  outer  springs,  the  outer  or  inner  stirrup  may  pro- 
ject more  to  the  rear  on  one  side  than  on  the  other. 

To  dismount  the  spring  system:  With  the  cradle  at  maximum  ele- 
vation and  the  trail  limbered,  remove  the  spring-rod  plug  nuts  and 
the  spring-rod  yoke.  For  carriages  with  serial  numbers  above  40, 
the  spring  compressor  block  should  be  attached  to  that  spring  rod, 
not  being  dismounted. 


60 

Screw  the  spring  compressor  rope  or  bod}7  in  its  position  on  the  rod 
to  be  dismounted  and  make  the  rope  taut  by  means  of  the  block 
located  as  above.  Traverse  the  cradle  slightly  so  that  the  taut  rope 
lies  in  the  center  line  of  the  spring  cylinder.  Remove  the  cylinder 
cover  and  slowly  unwind  the  rope  until  the  springs  are  free.  If 
necessary  to  remove  the  other  column  for  carriages  with  serial  num- 
bers above  40,  it  will  be  necessary  to  replace  the  spring-cylinder 
cover  before  removing  the  spring  compressor  block. 

To  dismount  the  shield:  Disconnect  the  apron  by  pulling  the  hinge 
pins,  remove  the  bolts  fastening  the  main  shield  to  the  trail,  take 
off  the  main  shield  braces  and  main  shield  side  plates,  and  lift  the 
shield  plate  off  to  the  rear. 

To  dismount  the  cradle:  Remove  the  gun,  shield  and  elevating  pin, 
take  off  the  trunnion  caps,  and  lift  the  cradle  from  the  pintle  yoke. 

To  dismount  the  traversing  gear:  Remove  the  bolts  securing  the 
traversing-screw  bracket  to  the  trail;  the  screw  may  then  be  dis- 
engaged from  the  nut  and  taken  out  with  the  bracket,  bearing,  and 
cap;  the  nut  and  traversing-screw  bearings  are  freed  by  removing 
their  cap  bolts.  In  assembling,  the  oil  plugs  in  the  bearing  and  the 
traversing  nut  are  to  be  placed  on  top. 

To  dismount  the  elevating  screws:  Remove  the  elevating  pin;  un- 
screw the  inner  screw  by  hand;  remove  the  elevating-screw  cover; 
remove  the  outer  screw  by  screwing  it  down  through  the  elevating- 
gear  bracket. 

To  dismount  the  pinions  and  bevel  gear:  Remove  the  split  pin  in 
the  pinion  hub,  after  which  the  pinion  shaft  may  be  withdrawn  and 
the  pinion  removed  from  its  seat.  The  bevel  gear  may  then  be 
removed  by  dismounting  the  screws,  as  above. 

To  dismount  the  elevating-gear  bracket:  Free  the  mechanism  from 
the  cradle  by  removing  the  elevating  pin;  dismount  the  pinions  and 
pinion  shafts  as  above;  remove  the  five  bolts  attaching  either  ele- 
vating yoke  side  to  the  traversing  bracket  and  elevating  transom; 
the  bracket  may  now  be  slipped  free  from  the  other  side  of  the  yoke. 

To  assemble  the  elevating  mechanism:  The  operations  just  described 
are  reversed.  The  following  should  be  noted:  The  pinions  are  a  close 
fit  on  their  shafts,  and  especial  care  should  be  taken  not  to  burr  the 
parts  in  assembling.  As  the  outer  screw  is  being  assembled  in  the 
gear  bracket  from  below,  the  bevel  gear  should  be  put  in  place  with 
its  keys  engaging  the  keyways  of  the  screw.  Before  attaching  the 
inner  screw  to  the  cradle  both  screws  should  be  run  down  to  be  sure 
that  the  upper  end  of  the  outer  screw  is  flush  with  the  face  of  the 
gear  bracket  when  the  inner  screw  is  clear  in  and  its  head  in  position 
to  engage  the  cradle  and  that  the  lug  on  the  elevating  bevel  gear  func- 
tions properly  against  the  elevating  bevel-gear  stop  on  the  rear  cradle 
band  or  the  lug  integral  with  the  band.     If  this  condition  is  not  ful- 


61 

filled,  the  mechanism  may  not  give  the  maximum  elevation  for  which 
it  is  designated  and  will  not  house  properly  in  traveling  nor  will  the 
elevating  and  traversing  lock  function  correctly. 

To  dismount  the  brake:  Disconnect  the  brake  rods  by  pulling  the 
pins  in  the  beams  and  taking  the  nuts  from  the  cranks;  in  reas- 
sembling, the  rods  will  be  first  assembled  to  the  cranks  and  then 
in  the  beams.  To  remove  the  beams  from  the  pintle  bearings  it  is 
necessary  to  dismount  the  recoil  cylinder  to  get  out  the  hinge  pins; 
the  brake  shoe  is  freed  from  the  beam  by  withdrawing  the  brake- 
shoe  pin.  The  brake  beams  with  shoes  attached  are  rights  and 
lefts  and  are  properly  assembled  when  the  shoe  has  a  full  bearing 
upon  the  tire.  To  take  out  the  brake  shaft,  remove  the  left  wheel 
and  the  pin  of  the  right  crank;  the  shaft  and  left  crank  maybe  pulled 
out  to  the  left.  In  assembling  the  shaft,  note  that  the  cranks  are 
to  be  in  line,  with  the  brake  lever  and  hinge  opposite  them  on  the 
shaft.  The  tension  of  the  brake-rod  spring  is  regulated  by  removing 
the  split  pin  which  passes  through  the  brake-spring  cover  and  screwing 
the  brake-spring  cover  end  in  or  out  of  the  cover.  The  tension  of  the 
spring  is  increased  by  screwing  the  end  into  the  cover.  The  length 
of  the  brake  rod  should  be  adjusted  by  screwing  the  front  end  of  the 
rod  into  or  out  of  the  brake  rod  end. 

To  adjust  the  brakes:  The  brake  rods  are  disconnected  from  the 
brake  beams.  The  brake  shoes  are  placed  with  the  clearance  from 
the  tire  desired  and  the  brake  lever  with  the  brake-lever  catch  engag- 
ing the  forward  notch  (extreme  released  position).  The  length  of  the 
brake  rods  should  then  be  adjusted  to  correspond.  Should  test  show 
that  one  shoe  bears  harder  on  the  wheel  than  the  other,  the  rod  of 
the  latter  should  be  shortened. 

To  remove  a  wheel:  Support  the  axle  in  order  to  bring  the  wheel  clear 
of  the  ground.  Lift  up  the  flap  of  the  hub  latch,  thus  disengaging  its 
bolt,  and  unscrew  the  hub  cap;  the  wheel  fastening  which  is  now 
exposed  i3  secured  to  the  axle  by  a  spring  pin  in  one  side;  when  this 
is  pressed  back  the  wheel  fastening  may  be  lifted  free  of  the  axle  and 
the  wheel  slipped  off. 

To  remove  a  hub  liner:  Take  the  wheel  from  the  axle  and  drive  the 
liner  out  by  striking  with  a  heavy  hammer  or  sledge  upon  a  suitable 
wooden  or  metal  block  placed  against  the  small  end  of  the  liner.  A 
hub  liner  driving  tool  is  carried  in  the  forge  limber  for  this  purpose. 
In  assembling  a  new  liner  be  sure  the  surfaces  are  perfectly  clean  and 
that  no  dirt  gets  under  the  flange  of  the  liner  to  prevent  its  being 
driven  solidly  against  the  face  of  the  hub.  Unless  the  liner  is  forced 
completely  into  the  hub  the  distance  from  the  face  of  liner  to  the 
small  end  of  the  hub  may  be  too  great  to  allow  the  assemblage  of  the 
wheel  fastening.  Should  the  outer  end  of  the  liner  project  beyond 
the  small  end  of  the  hub  it  may  be  filed  flush. 


62 

To  dismount  the  traversing  bracket  and  pintle  yoke:  The  gun,  cradle, 
and  main  shield  being  off,  dismount  the  traversing  screw  and  elevating 
pinion  shafts,  withdraw  the  bolts  connecting  the  traversing  bracket 
and  pintle  shape;  the  bracket  may  be  withdrawn  forward,  the  pintle 
yoke  given  one-sixth  of  a  turn  and  lifted  from  the  pintle  bearing. 

To  dismount  the  trail  and  axle:  The  wheels,  shield,  cradle,  brake,  etc., 
having  been  removed  as  described  above,  remove  the  clamping  bolts 
from  the  brake-shaft  brackets,  slip  the  brackets  off  the  axle,  and 
loosen  the  clamping  bolts  in  the  axle  bearings;  the  axle  may  then  be 
withdrawn  from  the  trail. 

The  parts  of  this  carriage  in  general  are  made  with  sufficient  clear- 
ance to  permit  of  the  assemblage  of  any  part  without  the  use  of  force. 
In  assembling  them  no  part  should  be  directly  struck  with  a  hammer* 
If  resort  to  force  is  necessary,  a  piece  of  wood  or  a  copper  drift  should 
be  interposed  between  the  hammer  and  the  part  struck.  Most  of  the 
nuts  and  pins  are  provided  with  split  pins  as  keepers.  The  split  pins 
must,  of  course,  be  removed  to  remove  the  nut,  and  when  the  nut  or 
pin  is  assembled  the  split  pin  should  be  inserted  and  properly  opened. 
When  bolts  are  removed  it  is  a  good  plan  to  screw  the  nuts  back  on 
the  bolts  to  keep  the  threads  of  both  clean  and  undamaged  until  they 
are  restored  to  the  carriage.  A  pair  of  wire-cutting  pliers  is  provided 
for  use  in  pulling  split  pins,  cutting  wire  lashings,  etc. 

OARE  AND  CLEANING  OF  RECOIL  CYLINDER  AND  OTHER  PARTS  OF  THE 

CARRIAGE. 

The  carriage  is  a  machine  for  controlling  the  recoil  of  the  gun,  and 
must  be  properly  cleaned  and  cared  for  to  insure  its  working  correctly. 
The  officers  responsible  for  the  efficiency  of  the  battery  should  famil- 
iarize themselves  with  the  carriage  mechanism  and  with  the  fore- 
going instructions  as  to  the  methods  of  mounting  and  dismounting 
the  various  parts,  and  should  see  that  the  carriage  is  properly  handled, 
cleaned,  and  cared  for.  The  following  general  directions  for  its 
care  and  cleaning  are  given: 

The  recoil  cylinder  should  be  emptied  and  refilled  once  every  three 
months,  and  thoroughly  cleaned  once  every  six  months,  or  oftener 
if  the  conditions  require  it.  The  cylinder  is  most  readily  emptied 
and  filled  when  removed  from  the  carriage.  For  cleaning,  it  is 
dismounted  and  the  cylinder  head,  counter-recoil  buffer,  and  piston 
rod  removed,  as  heretofore  described.  The  interior  of  the  cylinder, 
the  piston,  the  counter-recoil  buffer,  and  the  stuffing  box  should  then 
be  thoroughly  cleaned  by  the  use  of  cotton  waste  and  kerosene  oil 
and  wiped  dry  with  cotton  waste.  The  removal  of  the  packing  is 
not  necessary  in  cleaning  the  stuffing  box.  The  cylinder  bore  should 
be  carefully  inspected,  and  if  any  rust  has  formed  it  should  be  removed 
with  kerosene  oil,  using,  if  necessary,  fine  emery  cloth.     The  latter 


63 

must  be  used  with  great  care  to  prevent  any  increase  in  the  clearance 
between  the  cylinder  and  piston.  If  rubbing,  burring,  or  scoring  of 
the  parts  is  noted,  the  rough  spots  should  be  carefully  smoothed  down 
by  a  skilled  workman  with  a  dead-smooth  file  or  with  emery  cloth, 
and  the  cause  of  the  roughness  ascertained  and  removed.  Where 
unusual  rubbing  or  scoring  has  occurred,  the  facts  will  be  reported 
to  the  officer  of  the  Ordnance  Department  charged  with  the  duty  of 
keeping  the  battery  in  repair,  for  his  information  and  action. 

The  parts  should  be  reassembled  immediately  after  cleaning  and 
inspection  and  the  cylinder  filled  with  the  hydroline  oil  issued  for 
that  purpose.  The  piston  should  be  moved  back  and  forth  in  the 
cylinder  by  hand  to  make  sure  that  all  parts  are  correctly  assembled 
and  are  without  interference.  The  cylinder  should  then  be  mounted 
in  the  carriage  and  the  gun  pulled  from  battery  by  hand,  using  the 
Duplex  chain  block  and  the  retracting  eye  carried  in  the  battery 
wagon,  and  permitted  to  counter  recoil  rapidly  to  insure  that  all  parts 
are  in  proper  position  for  firing.  This  should  never  be  done,  however, 
unless  the  cylinder  is  known  to  be  filled  with  oil.  In  reassembling  the 
parts  the  condition  of  the  fiber  washer  between  cylinder  head  and 
recoil  cylinder  should  be  noted;  it  should  be  replaced  whenever  neces- 
sary to  prevent  leakage.  In  removing  and  inserting  the  piston  rod 
care  should  be  taken  to  keep  it  central  in  the  cylinder,  so  as  not  to 
bind,  burr,  or  spring  any  parts.  The  dismounting  and  reassembling 
of  the  parts  of  the  cylinder  should  in  every  case  be  supervised  by  a 
commissioned  officer.  Before  firing,  an  inspection  should  be  made  to 
ascertain  that  the  different  parts,  especially  the  piston  rod  and  spring 
rod  plug  nuts,  are  correctly  assembled. 

The  recoil-cylinder  oil  should  be  stored  in  the  closed  cans  provided 
for  the  purpose,  and  be  carefully  protected  from  dirt,  sand,  or  water. 
Oil  withdrawn  from  cylinders  and  containing  any  sediment  must  not 
be  used  again  for  any  purpose  until  it  has  been  allowed  to  settle  for 
not  less  than  24  hours.  When  sediment  has  thus  been  permitted  to 
settle,  great  care  must  be  taken  not  to  disturb  it  in  removing  the 
oil.  To  insure  the  cleanliness  of  all  cylinder  oil  it  should  be  strained 
through  a  clean  piece  of  linen  or  muslin  before  using. 

The  counter-recoil  springs  should  be  dismounted  at  least  once 
every  six  months  and  be  thoroughly  cleaned.  All  rust  should  be 
removed  and  the  springs  well  oiled  before  assemblage.  When  the 
springs  are  dismounted  the  interiors  of  the  cradle  should  be  cleaned 
and  examined  for  defective  riveting,  missing  rivet  heads,  and  scoring. 
The  stirrups  should  be  carefully  examined  for  bulged  or  cracked  ends 
and  loose  rivets,  and  all  burrs  or  scores  on  the  bronze  heads  carefully 
smoothed  off. 

The  recoil  guide  rails  of  the  cradle  should  be  kept  well  lubricated. 
Immediately  before  beginning  to  fire,  they  should  be  oiled  through 
10161—17 6* 


64 

all  the  oil  holes  of  the  gun.  Lack  of  proper  lubrication  of  these  guide 
rails  is  the  most  frequent  cause  of  failure  of  gun  to  return  fully  into 
battery. 

The  elevating  and  traversing  mechanisms  should  be  dismounted  at 
least  once  every  six  months  for  thorough  cleaning  and  overhauling. 
They  should  be  kept  well  oiled  and  should  work  easily.  If  at  any 
time  either  mechanism  works  harder  than  usual  it  should  be  immedi- 
ately overhauled  and  the  cause  discovered  and  removed. 

In  traveling  the  cradle  should  be  locked  to  the  trail  by  means  of 
the  elevating  and  traversing  lock,  so  as  to  relieve  the  pointing  mech- 
anisms of  all  travel  stresses. 

The  wheels  and  wheel  fastenings  should  be  dismounted  periodi- 
cally and  the  fastenings,  hub  boxes,  axle  arms,  and  axle  bore  cleaned 
and  examined.  All  roughness  due  to  scoring  or  cutting  should  be 
smoothed  off.  In  oiling  the  wheels  in  service  a  small  quantity  (about 
1  gill)  of  lubricating  oil  should  be  placed  in  the  axle  bore  through  the 
oil  valve  in  the  hub  cap.  A  short  experience  will  enable  the  battery 
commander  to  determine  how  often  the  wheels  should  be  oiled. 

The  nuts  on  the  hub  bolts  should  be  tightened  monthly  the  first 
year  of  service  and  twice  a  year  thereafter.  The  ends  of  the  bolts 
should  be  lightly  riveted  over  to  prevent  the  nut  from  unscrewing. 
When  the  hub  bolts  are  tightened,  the  hub  band  should  be  screwed 
up  as  tightly  as  possible  against  the  lock  washer  at  the  outer  end  of 
the  wheel  hook  bushing. 

The  wooden  parts  of  the  wheels  are  made  of  thoroughly  seasoned 
materials,  and  the  hub  b^lts  and  bands,  when  the  wheels  are  issued, 
are  properly  tightened;  but  all  wood  is  susceptible  to  change  with 
atmospheric  conditions,  so  that  the  spokes  speedily  become  loose,  and 
if  the  wheel  is  used  in  this  condition  it  will  rapidly  be  made  unserv- 
iceable and  may  be  damaged  beyond  repair. 

The  importance  of  strict  compliance  with  these  instructions  can  not  he 
overestimated. 

All  working  and  bearing  surfaces  of  the  carriage  require  oiling; 
those  not  directly  accessible  for  this  purpose  are  provided  with  oil 
holes  closed  by  spring  covers  or  bronze  plugs.  Each  component  part 
of  a  carriage  is  made  interchangeable  with  the  similar  parts  of  other 
carriages  of  the  same  model,  except  that  certain  parts  are  not  in- 
terchangeable between  carriages  with  serial  numbers  from  1  to  40, 
inclusive,  and  those  with  numbers  above  40,  as  noted  in  the  table  of 
nomenclature  of  parts,  page  37,  and  is,  except  in  the  case  of  certain 
springs  and  very  small  parts,  stamped  with  an  individual  symbol 
number  and  letter;  this  symbol  may  be  followed  by  an  additional 
number  which  indicates  a  slight  change  in  design  from  the  original. 
When  requisitions  for  replacements  are  to  be  made  the  symbol  should 
he  copied  thereon  exactly  as  stamped  upon  the  unserviceable  piece. 


65 


THE    4.7-INCH     GUN     AND     6-INCH    HOWITZER     LIMBER, 

MODEL   OF   1905. 

(This  limber  is  common  to  the  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  batteries.) 

WEIGHTS,  DIMENSIONS,  ETC. 

Weight,  complete,  including  spare  connecting  pole pounds. .  1,  545 

Weight,  with  4.7-inch  gun  and  carriage,  model  of  1906 do 8,  965 

Diameter  of  wheels inches..  50 

Width  of  track do. ...  60 

Free  height  under  limber  and  carriage do 16. 37 

Turning  angle  with  4.7-inch  gun  carriage degrees. .  54 

NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS. 


Name  of  part. 


Axle 

Bucket  holders 

Bucket  straps 

Bucket  strap  fasteners,  Style  No.  1. 

Center  angle,  left 

Center  angle,  right 

Center  angle  plate 

(lip. 


Doubletree,  complete,  consisting  of— 

Doubletree  body 

Double  hooks 

Nipple 

Nipple  nut 

Nipple  separator 

Reinforce  piece 

Separators 

Doubletree  chains,  complete,  consisting 
of— 

Chains 

< '  le  vises 

End  links 

Doubletree  pivot 

Doubletree  pivot  strap 

Doubletree  strap 

Eye  rivet 

Name  plate 

Neck  yoke,  complete,  consisting  of— 

Neck-yoke  body 

Center  eye  sleeve 

End  eye  sleeves 

Eye  rings 

Eye-ring  loops 

Loop  sleeves 

Martingale  staples 

Pole  ring 

Pintle,  complete,  consisting  of— 

Pintle 

Lower  bushing 

Key 

Pintle  nut 

Upper  bushing 

Pintle  bearing 


Pintle  bolt,  complete,  consisting  of- 
Pintle  bolt 


Pintle-bolt  lever 

Bolt  snap 

Chain 

Ring 

Pole,  complete,  consisting  of— 

Pole  body 

Pole  pin  bushing 

Pole  plug 

Butt  reinforce 

Neck-yoke  chafing  plate 

Neck-yoke  counter  stop 

Neck-yoke  counter  stop  pin 

Neck-yoke  counter  stop  spring . 
Neck-yoke  stop 


Property 
classification. 


Location,  etc. 


Riveted  to  side  braces 

In  strap  fasteners 

Riveted  to  bucket  holders 

Under  axle 

do 

Over  axle 

Braces  top  carriage  rail  at  center. 


At  ends  of  doubletree 

Through  center  of  doubletree.. . . 

On  nipple 

Around  nipple 

Reinforces  middle  of  doubletree . 
Around  rivets 


Class. 


Limit  movement  of  doubletree . 

Bolted  to  rail  brackets 

Loop  over  double  hooks 

In  pivot  strap 

Bearing  for  doubletree 

Bolted  to  pole  housing 

On  underside  of  pintle  bearing. 
On  right  side  of  pole  housing . . . 


Around  middle  of  body . . 
Riveted  on  ends  of  body . 
Through  end  eye  sleeves . 

In  eye  rings 

On  eye-ring  loops 

Through  neck-yoke  body. 
In  center  eve  sleeve 


Through  p  ntle  bearing 

In  lower  end  of  pintle 

In  side  of  pintle 

On  lower  end  of  pint  le 

In  upper  end  of  pintle 

Riveted  to  rear  ends  of  center  angles  and 
center  angle  plate. 


Through  pintle 

On  lower  end  of  pintle  bolt 

Snaps  into  eye  rivet 

Holds  pintle  bolt  in  locked  position 

Through  hole  in  end  of  pintle-bOlt  lever . 


Inside  of  body 

Riveted  in  front  end  of  pole 

Riveted  in  rear  end  of  pole 

Riveted  to  upper  side  of  body. . . 

Hinges  on  counter  stop  pin 

Riveted  in  pole  body 

Bears  on  neck-yoke  counter  stop . 
Riveted  in  body 


Sec- 
tion. 


IV 


1  The  components  are  for  steel  pole,  which  will  be  issued  to  replace  the  wooden  pole  when  the  latter 
becomes  unserviceable  and  the  present  supply  of  wooden  poles  is  exhausted. 


66 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


No. 


Name  of  part. 


Pole  bracket,  left 

Pole  bracket,  right 

Pole  bracket  reinforce,  left 

Pole  bracket  reinforce,  right 

Pole  housing 

Pole  pin 

Pole-prop  pocket 

Pole-prop  support 

Pole-prop  strap 

Pole-prop  strap  fasteners,  style  No.  2 

Pole  socket,  complete,  consisting  of — 

Pole-socket  body 

Pole-socket  clamp 

Pole-socket  end 

Pole-socket  reinforce 

Pole  stop 

Rail  bracket,  left 

Rail  bracket,  right 

Side  brace,  left 

Side  brace,  right 

Singletrees,  complete,  consisting  of 

Singletree  bodies 

Singletree  eyes 

Singletree  hooks 

Spare  connecting  pole  bracket  (front) 

Spare  connecting  pole  bracket    (front) 

upper  strap. 
Spare  connecting  pole  support  complete, 
consisting  of— 

Spare  connecting  pole  support  (lower) 

Spare  connecting  pole  support  pin 

Chain,  with  bolt  snap  and  two  rings . . . 

Chain  rivet 

Top  carriage,  complete,  consisting  of— 

Top  carriage 

Top-carriage  clips 

Rollers 

Roller  pins 

Top  carriage  rail 

Wheels,  50-inch,  complete,  consisting  of— 

Carriage  bolts  and  nuts 

Dowels 

Felloe  rivets  and  washers 

Felloe  segments 

Hub  bands 

Hub  boxes 

Hub  caps 

Hub  latches 

Hub-latch  pins 

Hub-latch  plungers 

Hub-latch  springs 

Hub  liners 

Hub  rings 

Lock  washers 

Oil  valves 

Oil  valve  springs 

Oil- valve  washers 

Sp  okes 

Tires 

Tire  bolts  with  nuts  and  washers 

Wheel  hooks 

Wheel-hook  bushings 

Wheel  fastenings,  complete,  consist- 
ing of— 

Wheel  fastenings 

Wheel-fastening  plugs 

Wheel-fastening  plungers 

Wheel-fastening  springs 


Location,  etc. 


Property 
classification. 


Sec- 
tion. 


^Support  pole  socket 

Riveted  to  pole  bracket,  left... 
Riveted  to  pole  bracket,  right. 

Over  rear  of  pole  socket 

Secures  pole  in  socket 

Riveted  to  side  brace,  left 

Riveted  to  side  brace,  left 

In  strap  fasteners 

Riveted  to  side  brace,  left 

Hinges  in  pole  brackets 


Riveted  to  pole-socket  body 

Over  end  of  pole-socket  body 

Riveted  to  top  of  pole-socket  body. 
Under  rear  of  pole  socket. 


[Brace  top  carriage  rail  at  sides. 


Attached  to  doubletree 


In  middle  of  singletree 

At  ends  of  singletree 

Riveted  to  center  angles 

Riveted  to  spare  connecting  pole  bracket 
(front). 


Hinged  to  spare  connecting  pole  support 
(upper). 

Locks  pole  support  (lower)  in  position 

In  end  of  connecting-pole  support  pin 

In  pole  support  (lower) 


Turns  in  pintle  bearing 

Bolted  to  top  carriage 

On  roller  pins 

Pinned  in  top  carriage 

Bearing  for  top  carriage  rollers . 

Through  hub  box  and  spokes. 

In  ends  of  felloe  segments 

Through  felloe  segments 


!•    IV 


Screwed  on  hub  boxes . 


On  ends  of  hub  boxes 

Actuate  hub  latch  plungers , 

Pin  hub  latches  to  plungers 

Lockhub  caps  in  place 

On  hub  latch  plungers 

Forced  into  hub  boxes 

Outer  flanges  of  wheel  hubs 

Between  hub  bands  and  hub  rings . 

Slide  in  hub  caps 

Around  oil  valves 

On  inner  ends  of  oil  valves , 


Through  tires  and  felloe  segments. 

On  outside  of  hubs 

Bearings  for  wheel  hooks 


On  ends  of  axle 

In  wheel  fastenings 

Hold  wheel  fastenings  in  place. . . 
Actuate  wheel  fastening  plungers 


h 


M 
to 


i 


67 

DESCRIPTION    OF   THE    4.7-INCH   GUN   AND    6-INCH    HOWITZER    LIMBER, 

MODEL  OF   1905. 
Plate  XII. 

The  carriage  limber  is  designed  to  afford  the  usual  arrangement 
for  the  attachment  of  the  team  and  to  support  the  trail  in  traveling. 
Motor  traction  may  also  be  employed  by  substituting  a  short  con- 
necting pole  for  the  regular  limber  pole.  The  principal  parts  are 
the  wheels,  axle,  frame,  top  carriage,  pole  socket,  pole,  doubletree, 
singletrees,  and  neck  yoke.  The  limber  is  made  of  metal  through- 
out, wood  being  used  only  in  the  spokes  and  felloes  of  the  wheels. 

The  top  carnage  is  formed  for  use  with  the  trails  of  either  the 
4.7-inch  gun  carriage,  model  of  1906,  or  the  6-inch  howitzer  carriage. 
The  trail  of  the  carriage  rests  on  the  top  carriage  of  the  limber. 
When  the  limber  is  turning  a  corner  the  top  carriage  revolves  about 
the  pintle  center,  rolling  on  the  top  carriage  rail  of  the  limber  frame. 

A  wide  flange  steel  center  angle  plate  is  riveted  to  the  axle  as  a 
middle  rail,  and  with  the  braces  of  heavy  steel  angles  underneath 
and  at  the  sides  forms  a  trussed  frame  for  the  vehicle.  Sixteen 
inches  to  the  rear  of  the  axle  a  bronze  bearing  for  the  pintle  is  solidly 
riveted  between  the  rear  ends  of  the  center  angle  plate  and  center 
angles.  Forward,  these  converge  with  the  side  braces  and  form  a 
yoke  in  which  the  pole  socket  may  oscillate  in  a  vertical  plane. 
The  front  ends  of  this  yoke  are  connected  by  the  riveted  doubletree 
pivot  strap.  A  seat  for  the  doubletree  is  formed  on  the  top  of  the 
doubletree  pivot  strap ;  the  doubletree  pivot  is  screwed  into  this  seat 
and  projects  up  through  the  doubletree;  its  upper  end  is  threaded 
for  a  crown  nut  and  is  braced  back  to  the  pole  housing,  a  flange  steel 
part  which  constrains  the  pole  socket  in  its  vertical  plane  and  limits 
the  upward  movement  of  its  rear  end.  The  pole  socket  is  of  flange 
steel  with  its  forward  end  split  and  furnished  with  a  clamp  bolt  for 
drawing  firmly  about  the  pole. 

The  pole  pin  passes  through  pole  brackets  and  pole  bracket  rein- 
forces, riveted  on  each  side  of  the  yoke,  and  the  clamp  forging  of  the 
socket,  securing  the  socket  to  the  frame.  Between  the  pole  housing 
and  the  pole  stop  the  socket  may  swing  through  an  angle  of  about 
31°  with  the  socket  pin  as  an  axis.  This  pivoting  of  the  pole  is 
necessary,  as  the  entire  limber  body  rotates  about  the  axle  in  passing 
over  uneven  ground. 

The  top  carriage  rail  is  a  steel  angle  bent  to  the  arc  of  a  circle  and 
located  on  the  frame  with  the  center  of  the  arc  at  the  pintle  center. 
It  is  riveted  to  the  side  braces  by  the  rail  brackets  and  to  the  center 
angle  plate  by  a  suitable  clip. 

The  top  carriage  is  a  steel  casting.  Its  rear  end  fits  in  the  bearing 
of  the  frame  and  is  bored  to  receive  the  steel  pintle,  a  heavy  pin 


68 

with  a  long  head  of  elliptical  section,  keyed  in  with  the  major  axis 
of  the  ellipse  on  the  center  line  of  the  top  carriage.  The  pintle  holt 
in  the  center  of  the  pintle  has  an  elliptical  head  to  match  the  pintle 
and  at  its  lower  end  a  lever  with  chain-and-snap  fastening.  When 
a  carriage  is  to  be  limbered,  the  bolt  is  turned  until  its  elliptical 
head  coincides  with  the  pintle  so  that  both  may  enter  the  elliptical 
lunette  transom  bushing  of  the  carriage  trail;  once  so  entered  the 
pintle  bolt  is  turned  90°  in  the  pintle  and  secured  by  its  chain  in 
that  position,  the  head  thus  preventing  the  disengagement  of  pintle 
and  lunette. 

The  front  end  of  the  top  carriage  is  provided  with  three  bronze 
conical  rollers  which  rest  and  run  on  the  top  carriage  rail;  and  with 
clips  which  embrace  the  edge  of  the  rail  to  prevent  accidental  dis- 
mounting. There  is  also  a  spur  located  on  the  top  of  the  top  carriage 
which  enters  the  trail-end  reinforce  plate  of  the  carriage  and  holds 
the  trail  and  top  carriage  in  line. 

The  wheels  are  50  inches  in  diameter,  with  tires  5  inches  wide. 
The  hubs  are  exactly  similar  and  interchangeable  with  those  in  the 
wheels  of  the  carriage.  The  axle  is  hollow  and  is  made  from  a 
single  piece  of  forged  steel. 

The  pole  is  now  made  of  steel  and  is  prevented  from  turning  in  its 
socket  by  the  pole  pin.  A  pole  plug  is  riveted  in  the  front  end  of 
the  pole,  and  a  neck-yoke  stop  near  the  end.  Just  forward  of  the 
neck-yoke  stop  is  the  neck-yoke  counterstop,  which,  with  its  spring, 
is  hinged  inside  of  the  pole  and  works  through  a  slot  cut  in  the  under- 
side of  the  pole.  A  neck-yoke  chafing  plate  is  riveted  to  the  top  of 
the  pole  above  the  neck-yoke  stop. 

The  doubletree  and  singletrees  are  made  of  flange  steel  formed 
to  a  U  shape.  The  hole  in  the  former  for  the  doubletree  pivot  is 
bushed  with  a  bronze  nipple,  held  in  place  by  a  steel  nut,  and  may 
be  replaced  when  worn.  Two  doubletree  chains  reach  from  the  ends 
of  the  doubletree  to  the  rail  brackets  on  the  frame,  to  which  they  are 
bolted.  The  neck  yoke  is  of  steel  tubing  with  steel  sleeves  and  rings. 
The  spare  connecting  pole  is  carried  in  brackets  under  the  frame; 
and  a  pole  prop  on  the  left  side  brace.  A  bucket  holder  with  straps 
is  located  on  each  side  brace  for  carrying  the  four  canvas  watering 
buckets.  A  name  plate  is  riveted  to  the  left  side  of  the  pole  housing, 
giving  number,  name  of  limber,  model,  name  of  manufacturer,  year 
of  completion,  and  initials  of  inspector.  In  all  reports  and  corre- 
spondence, the  limber  should  be  designated  by  the  number,  name,  model, 
etc.,  as  given  on  the  name  plate.  As  repairs  to  the  limber  may  from 
time  to  time  be  required,  the  parts  needed  should  be  referred  to  by 
the  names  given  in  the  nomenclature  of  parts,  and  the  symbols 
should  be  copied  exactly  as  stamped  upon  the  unserviceable  pieces. 


69 

THE  4.7-INCH  GUN  LIMBER  AND  CAISSON,  MODEL  OF 

1908. 


WEIGHTS,    DIMENSIONS,  ETC. 

Weight  of  limber,  empty,  without  implements  or  ammunition pounds . 

Weight  of  implements  carried do. . . 

Weight  of  ammunition  carried do. . . 

Weight  of  limber,  completely  equipped  and  loaded do. . . 

Weight  of  caisson,  empty,  without  implements  or  ammunition do. . . 

Weight  of  implements  carried,  including  spare  connecting  pole do. . . 

Weight  of  ammunition  carried pounds. 

Weight  of  caisson,  completely  equipped  and  loaded do.  .  . 

Rounds  of  ammunition  carried  on  limber 

Rounds  of  ammunition  carried  on  caisson 

Diameter  of  wheels inches. . 

Wid  th  of  track .' do .  .  . 

Free  height  under  caisson do.  .  . 

Turning  angle degrees. 


.   1 


821 

85 

2,055 

3,961 

2,058 

147 

2,055 

4,260 

28 

28 

60.0 

60.0 

19.55 

76 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS. 


Num-  Num- 
ber on  ber  on 
limber,  caisson. 


2s 


2^ 


i' 

l 
l 

2 

4 
4 

4 

1 

3 
3 
3 
2 

2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 

1 
1 
1 
1 
2 

4 
4 

2 

2 
4 
2 
2 
2 
2 

2 

1 

1 
1 

2 

Property 
classification. 


Name  of  part. 


Location,  etc. 


Claw. 


Ammunition  chest  connecting 
pieces. 

Apron 

Apron  hinges  (male) 

A  pron  hinges  (female) 

Apron-hinge  pins 

Apron  latches,  complete,  in- 
cluding— 

Latch  bod  ies 

Latch  handles 

Latch  springs 

Plungers 

Handle  pins 

Apron-latch  staples 

Ax  pocket 

Ax-handle  bracket 

Ax  strap 

Ax-strap  fastener,  No.  2 

Axle 

Axle  bearings,  caisson,  1  right, 

Heft. 
Axle  bearings,  limber,  1  right, 

1  left. 
Axle-bearing  bolts  and  nuts — 
Axle-bearing   reinforce    plates 

(front). 
Axle-bearing    reinforce    plates 
(rear). 

Bolt  snap,  with  chain 

Brake  beam,  complete,  includ- 
ing— 

Bodies 

Hinges 

Brake-beam  clips 

Brake-shoe  bearings 

B  rake-beam  s  t  iffeners 

Brake-beam  brackets,  1  right, 
1  left. 

Brake-beam  phis 

Brake  lever 

Brake-lever  catch 

Brake-lever  rest 

Brake-lever  rest  spring 

Segment  rack 

Brake  guard 

Separators,  1  short,  1  long 


Connect  rear  and  middle  diaphragms  } 
in  chest. 

Hinged  to  chest  bottom 

Riveted  to  apron 

ted  to  chest 


On  latch  bases. 


Riveted  to  apron. 
On  top  of  chest... 


In  fasteners 

On  top  of  chest. 


Each  in  two  pieces,  riveted  to  chest.. 


Clamp  axle  in  bearings. 


On  left  side  of  chest. 


Pivoted  to  brackets  on  chest. 


Riveted  to  chest  front 

Secure  brake  beams  in  brackets . 


The  spur  which  engages  the  rack. 

On  right  side  of  chest 

On  brake-lever  rest 


Riveted  to  right  side  of  chest. 


Sec- 
tion. 


IV 


70 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued 


Num- 
ber on 
limber. 


Num- 
ber on 

caisson. 


Name  of  part. 


Property 
classification. 


Location,  etc. 


Class. 


Attached  to  brake  crank  and  brake 
lever  and  to  the  brake  beams. 


Brake  rods,  complete,  includ- 
ing— 

Brake-rod  springs 

Brake-spring  covers 

Brake  rods 

Brake-rod  bushings 

Brake-spring  cover  ends 

Brake-rod  ends 

Keys  (for  brake  rod) 

Brake-rod  pins 

Brake -shaft  bearings   with   2    Riveted  to  sides  of  chest 

handy  oilers. 

Brake  shoes On  end  of  beams 

Brake-shoe  pins 

Brake  shaft Running  through  chest 

Brake  crank On  end  of  shaft 

Bucket  holder Riveted  to  chest  front 

Bucket  strap 

Bucket  strap  fasteners 1  on  chest,  1  on  holder 

Bushings Pinned  in  brake-shaft  bearings 

Cartridge-hook  bracket On  left  side  of  chest 

Cartridge-hook  strap In  fastener". 

Cartridge-hook  strap  fastener,     O  n  lef t  sid  e  of  chest 

No.  1. 

Cartridge-hook  support j 

Caisson  prop,  complete,  includ- 
ing— 

Prop  tubes 

Prop  foot 

Prop  eyes 

Prop  chain  clamps 

Prop  bolt  and  nut 

Prop  chains 

Prop  hook 

Center  bearings,  1  right,  1  left. . .   Riveted  to  intermediate  plates . 


Under  connecting  pole . 


Chest,  body,  upper  plate. 
Chest  body,  lower  plate. 

Chest  door  (lower) Flange  steel 

Chest  door  (upper) j  Armor  plate  on  caisson,  flange  steel  on 

limber. 

Chest  angle Steel  angle  around  chest  front 

Chest  front Armor  plate  on  caisson,  flange  steel  on 

limber. 
Connecting  pole,  complete,  in- 
cluding^ 

Body Of  steel  tubing 

Key  bearing Riveted  in  rear  end  of  body 


Riveted  in  front  end  of  body. 


Riveted  to  flange. 


On  front  of  chest . 


Lunette  bearing 

Lunette  pins,  1  front,  1  rear. 

Prop  saddle 

Connecting-pole    socket,    with 

bolt  and  nut. 

Connecting-pole  socket  base Bolted  to  chest  front . 

Spare  connecting-pole  hanger  . 
Spare  connecting-pole  hanger, 

brace. 
Spare   connecting-pole   hanger 

brace  hinge. 
Connecting  pole  hanger  strap 

pin. 

Spare    connecting-pole  stop j 

Spare   connecting-pole   hanger 

ninge  pin. 
Spare   connecting-pole   hanger 

reinforce,  1  right,  1  left. 
Spare   connecting-pole   hanger 

strap. 
Spare  connecting-pole  support.. 

Diaphragm  braces 

Door  angle  (lower) Stiffens  edge  of  door. 

Door  angle  (upper) I 

Door  end  stiff  eners,  1  right,  1  left 

Door  handles  (lower) 

Door  handle  bar  (upper) 

Door  hinges,  female 

Door  hinges,  male 

Door-hinge  pins ; 

Door  props 

Door-prop  rivets '  On  props. 


Stiffen  upper  diaphragms . 


Sec- 
tion. 


IV 


71 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


Num- 

Num- 

ber on 

ber  on 

limber. 

caisson. 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

4 

4 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

21 

21 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

3 

3 

3 

4 

4 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

4 

8 

8 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

I 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

4 

4 

8 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

4 

4 

8 

8 

6 

6 



1 

1 

1 

Name  of  part. 


Location,  etc. 


Property 
classification. 


Sec- 
tion. 


Door-prop  brackets 

Door-prop  guides,  1  right,  1  left. 

Door-prop  pins 

Door  stiff eners  (lower  chest) 

Door  handle  base 

Door  stiffeners  (upper  chest),  2 
right,  2  left. 

Doubletree,  complete 

Doubletree  chains 

Doubletree-chain  pins 

D.-ub:etree-chain  eyes,  1  right, 
1  left. 

Clevis 

Doubletree  strap 

Doubletree  pin  with  nut 

Filler  plate 

Flange  bolts  with  nuts 

Foot  rest 

Foot-rest  supports,  1  right,  1  left. 

Front  diaphragm  (lower ) 

Vr  nt  diaphragm  (upper) 

Grip-strap  fasteners,  No.  3 

Grip  straps 

Gusset  plates,  2  right.  2  left 

Hat  hot-blade  bracket  body 

Hatchet  blade  bfackri ." 

Hatchet-handle  bracket 

Hat  hot  strap 

Hatchet-strap  fastener.  No.  10... 

Hand.es,  1  right,  1  left,  with 
steel  pins. 

Handle  catches 

Hand'e-catch  bearings,  1  right, 
1  left. 

Handle-catch  rivets 

Hand  rails, complete,  including— 

Hand-rail  tubes 

Hand-rail  shanks 

Hinge  pins 

Intermediate  angle  (upper) 

Intermediate  angle  (lower) 

Intermediate  plate  (upper) 

Intermediate  plate  (lower) 

Conncctin  '  polo  kev 

I  tearing   (for*  connecting 
pole). 

Lantern-bracket,  complete,  in- 
cluding— 

Lantern-bracket  body 

Lantern-bracket  bottom 

Lantern-strap 

Lantern-strap  fasteners 

Latch  bases  (apron  latch),  1 
right,  1  left. 

Apron  latch  washer 

Limber  blanket  straps  (front)... 

Limber  blanket  straps  (rear) 

Limber  blanket  strap  fasteners, 
No.  5. 

Limber  prop,  complete,  con- 
sisting of— 

Prop  eye 

Prop  tube 

Prop  foot 

Prop  chain  fastening 

Prop  chain 

Prop  chain  handle 

Prop  chain  button  with  rivet.. . 

Button  bracket 

Prop  chain  eye 

Lock  bar  brackets,  1  right,  1  left . 

Lock  bars 

Lock  bar  pins  with  8  washers.. . 

Locking  levers 

Locking  lever  bearings  (notched) 

Lunette 

Middle  diaphragm  (lower) 

Middle  diaphragm  (upper) 

Name  plate  (limber) 


On  chest  door  (upper). 
On  sides  of  chest 


Same  as  for  carriage  limber. 


Riveted  to  chest 

Pinned  to  doubletree  chain  eyes , 
doubletree  pin 


Under  pintle  spring 

Secure  pole-socket  tiange  to  chest  front 


Riveted  to  chest  front. 


On  chest  frrnt 

Infasteners 

Bra  e  pole-socket  flange, 
on  right  side  of  chest.... 
Handle  rest 


In  fastener 

on  right  side  of  chest. 
On  lock  bars 


On  handle-catch  bearings . 
Riveted  on  sides  of  chest. . 


Riveted  to  chest  body 

Pinned  in  liking-lever  bearings 

Braces  intermediate  plate  to  chest  f  r<  nt 

do 

Above  axle 

Below  axle 

Secures  connecting  pole  in  socket 


Riveted  to  chest  front. 


Riveted  to  sides  of  chest. 

On  latch  base 

In  strap  fasteners 

do 

On  top  of  chest 


Bolted  to  pole  socket. 


Riveted  to  button  bracket 

Riveted  to  bucket  holder 

On  right  doubletree  chain  clevis. 

On  outside  of  chest 

Operate  locking  levers 

On  lock  bars 

Secures  the  doors 

Riveted  to  intermediate  plates . . . 
Bolted  in  connecting  pole 


Riveted  to  chest  front. 


IV 


72 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


Num-     Num 
ber  on    ber  on 
limber,  caisson. 


Name  of  part. 


Location,  etc. 


Property 
classification. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


i* 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

2* 

3 

1 

1 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

3 

3 

3 

3 

G 

6 

2 

2 

4 

4 

1 

} 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

! 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

........ 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 



2 

2 

2 

2 

4 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

Name  plate  (caisson) 

Neck  yoke  complete 

Nut  strips 

Oil  can  guides,  1  right,  1  left 

Oil  can  lock 

Oil   can   packing   block    with 
screws  and  nuts. 

Oil  can  stop 

Padlock  chain  rivets 

2-inch  Yale  lock,  No.  850,  with 
bolt  snap  and  chain. 

Paulin  straps 

Paulin  strap  fasteners,  No.  10... 

Paulin  strap  fasteners,  No.  3 

Pick  handle  strap 

Pick  handle  strap  fasteners 

Pick-mattock  strap  fasteners 

Pick-mattock  strap 

Pick  handle  rest 

Pick  rest  (front) 

Pick  rest 

Picket  rope  straps  (upper) 

Picket  rope  straps  (lower) 

Picket  rope  strap  fasteners,No.5. 

Pintle  bearings 

Pintle  bearing  bolts  and  nuts.. . 
Pintle  bearing  support  (upper) . . 
Pintle  bearing  support  (lower).. 
Pintle,  complete,  including— 

Pintle 

Pintle  latch 

Pintle  latch  pin 

Pintle  latch  spring 

Pintle  spring 


Riveted  to  chest  front 

Same  as  for  carriage  limber 

On  ends  of  pintle  Searing  bolts. 


►Riveted  to  intermediate  plates. 


Pintle  spring  guide 

Plates,  1  right,  1  left 

Pole,  complete 

Pole  pin 

Pole  prop  bracket 

Pole  prop  bracket  plate 

Pole  prop  pocket 

Pole  prop  pocket  plate 

Pole  prop  strap 

Pole  prop  strap  fasteners.  No.  1. . 
Pole  socket  with  bolt  and  nut.. 

Prop  bracket,  half 

Pole  socket  base 

Pole  socket  key  bracket 

Pole  socket  reinforce  plates 

Rear  diaphragm  (lower) , 

Rear  diaphragm  (upper) 

Reinforce  plates,    1   upper,   1 

lower. 

Roller  pins 

Shovel  nandle  rest 

Shovel  handle  strap 

Shovel  handle  strap  fastener, 

No.  2. 

Shovel  support 

Singletrees,  complete 

Spanner  bracket 

Spanner  handle  holder 

Spanner  strap' 

Spanner  strap  fastener,  No.  1 . . 

Staples 

Tie  rods , 


Riveted  to  chest. 
On  right  side  of  chest. 


On  strap  fasteners — 

On  chest  top 

do 

In  strap  fastener 

On  right  side  of  chest. 

On  chest 

In  strap  fasteners 


In  strap  fasteners. 
do 


On  top  of  chest. 


Riveted  to  upper  intermediate  plate... 
Riveted  to  lower  intermediate  plate. . . 

Located  in  pintle  bearings 


Riveted   to   pintle   support   bearing 
(lower). 


Riveted  to  sides  of  chest.... 
Same  as  for  carriage  limber. 


On  front  of  chest . 


On  front  of  chest . 


In  strap  fasteners. 
In  front  of  chest.. 


Riveted  to  limber  pole-socket  flange... 

Bolted  to  pole  socket 

Bolted  to  chest  front 

On  left  side  of  chest 

At  upper  and  lower  flange  bolts 

In  chest 

do 

Strengthen  chest  at   pintle  bearing 
supports. 

In  wheel  bearing  rollers 

On  left  side  of  chest 

In  strap  fastener 

On  left  side  of  chest 


.do. 


Same  as  for  carriage  limber. . 
On  lower  intermediate  plate. 


Tie  rod  fastenings 

Tie  rod  pins 

Washers 

Wheels,  60-inch  diameter,  com- 
plete. 

Wheel  bearing  rollers 

Wheel  fastenings,  complete 

Wrench  holders 

Wrench  strap 

Wrench  strap  fastener,  No.  1.... 


In  strap  fastener 

On  lower  intermediate  plate 

Ri  veted  to  plate  on  sides  of  chest 

Brace  connecting  pole  socket  to  chest 

sides. 
On  corners  of  chest 


On  brake  lever  shaft  and  arm. 
Same  as  for  carriage 


On  connecting  pole  socket. 

Same  as  for  carriage 

On  front  of  chest 

In  strap  fastener 

On  front  of  chest 


IV 


r 


I 

*-l 

H 

N  s! 

^  »t 

* 

""°    Si- 

'tt    ^ 

v': 

^  si 

■5    * 

*0    M 

-.  ] 

£?    ""  1 

d  4 

^ ! 

t>  J 

^  "C 

^ 

K 

*:I 

73 

DESCRIPTION    OF   THE    4.7    INCH    GUN    LIMBERS    AND    CAISSONS,    MODEL 

OF   1908. 

THE    UMBER. 
[Plate  XIII.] 

The  limber  is  a  two-wheeled  vehicle  provided  with  an  ammu- 
nition chest  for  the  transportation  of  ammunition  for  the  4.7-inch 
gun. 

The  principal  parts  are  the  wheels,  axle,  ammunition  chest,  pintle, 
polo  socket,  pole,  doubletree,  singletree,  and  neck  yoke. 

The  wheels  and  the  wheel  fastenings  are  the  same  as  and  inter- 
changeable with  those  on  the  carriage.  The  axle  is  hollow  and  is 
made  from  a  single  piece  of  forged  steel. 

The  ammunition  chest  is  built  up  of  flange  steel  in  two  parts  and 
is  divided  into  an  upper  and  lower  compartment  by  means  of  the 
flange  steel  upper  and  lower  intermediate  plates,  between  which 
passes  the  axle.  The  axle  is  secured  to  the  chest  by  the  right  and 
left  axle  bearings  riveted  to  the  sides  of  the  chest  and  to  the  flanges  of 
the  intermediate  plates.  The  two  sections  of  each  axle  bearing  are 
clamped  together  by  bolts  which  engage  notches  on  the  axle,  thus 
preventing  any  longitudinal  movement  of- the  axle.  The  front  plate 
is  a  flange  steel  plate  riveted  to  flanges  on  the  intermediate  plates 
and  to  the  vertical  flanges  of  the  chest  angle,  a  steel  angle  formed 
into  a  rectangle  and  riveted  through  its  horizontal  flanges  to  the 
body  of  the  chest.  Four  flange  steel  gusset  plates  brace  the  inter- 
mediate plates  to  the  front  plate. 

Inside  the  chest,  in  the  upper  compartment,  are  located  3 
vertical  diaphragms  flanged  all  around  and  riveted  to  the  chest 
body  and  intermediate  plates.  These  diaphragms  are  each  perforated 
with  21  holes  and  each  is  braced  with  4  vertical  tee  braces.  In  the 
lower  compartment  are  located  3  vertical  diaphragms  of  the 
same  size  flanged  all  around  and  riveted  to  the  chest  body  and 
transoms.  The  lower  diaphragms  have  7  perforations  each  for 
ammunition. 

Corresponding  holes  in  the  middle  and  rear  diaphragms  are  con- 
nected by  conical  brass  tubes  called  connecting  pieces,  which  are  cut 
away  on  top  to  save  weight.  These  connecting  pieces  support  the 
front  end  of  the  cartridge  case  and  serve  to  guide  the  projectiles  and 
to  carry  empty  cases.  The  rear  end  of  the  connecting  piece  is 
turned  over  the  rear  face  of  the  flange  of  the  perforation  in  the  rear 
diaphragm  and  forms  a  stop  for  the  rim  of  the  cartridge  case.  The 
chest  doors  close  against  the  heads  of  the  cases  so  that  the  cartridges 
are  firmly  held  in  position.  Suitable  clearances  are  cut  in  the  flange 
of  each  cartridge  pocket  to  enable  tho  cartridge  hook  to  get  back  of 
the  rim  of  the  case  in  withdrawing  it  from  tho  chest. 


74 

The  chest  door  (upper)  consists  of  a  flange  steel  plate  strengthened 
by  a  steel  angle  riveted  to  its  lower  edge  and  by  four  "Ps  riveted  to 
it  vertically.  Its  top  edge  is  secured  to  the  chest  body  by  four  hinges, 
so  that  it  can  be  opened  to  the  rear  and  upward,  in  which  position 
it  is  held  by  door  props  attached  to  each  end  of  the  door  and  to  the 
sides  of  the  chest,  as  shown  in  the  plate.  The  chest  door  (lower) 
is  of  flange  steel,  strengthened  by  an  angle  along  its  upper  edge  and 
by  four  vertical  T's;  its  lower  edge  is  secured  to  the  chest  body  by 
three  hinges,  so  that  it  opens  to  the  rear  and  downward.  When 
closed,  the  lower  edge  of  the  upper  door  and  the  upper  edge  of  the 
lower  door  are  securely  fastened  by  locking  levers  hinged  to  the 
intermediate  plates  and  operated  by  lock  bars  having  handle  levers 
on  the  chest  sides;  these  lock-bar  handles  are  held  in  the  closed 
position  by  suitable  latches,  the  right  having  a  padlock.  One  door 
handle  is  on  the  upper  door  and  two  arc  on  the  lower  door  to  assist 
in  opening  and  closing  the  door. 

Through  the  front  plate  and  intermediate  plate  flanges  are 
21  bolts,  securing  the  pole-socket  base.  The  cylindrical  cast-steel 
pole  socket  is  riveted  to  the  pole-socket  base  and  has  its  interior 
finished  as  a  conical  seat  for  the  pole.  The  doubletree  is  mounted 
upon  a  doubletree  pin  projecting  up  through  a  boss  on  the  forward 
end  of  the  pole  socket.  The  upper  end  of  this  pin  is  threaded  for  a 
nut  and  is  braced  back  to  the  pole  socket  by  the  doubletree  strap. 
The  pole  socket  is  split  at  its  forward  end  and  is  provided  with  a 
clamping  bolt  for  drawing  the  socket  firmly  about  the  pole.  A  lim- 
ber prop  is  hinged  to  the  pole  socket  and  held  by  the  clamping  bolt. 
When  traveling  the  prop  is  drawn  up  to  the  rear  and  held  by  a  chain 
to  a  button  on  a  bracket  riveted  to  the  bucket  holder. 

Pintle  bearing  supports  are  riveted  to  the  upper  and  lower  inter- 
mediate plates  at  the  rear  of  the  chest  and  form  brackets  for  clamping 
the  pintle  bearing.  This  bearing  is  in  two  parts,  secured  together  by 
bolts,  and  may  be  renewed  when  worn.  The  pintle  may  swivel  360° 
in  the  bearing,  but  is  normally  held  in  a  vertical  position  by  a  spring 
bolted  to  the  pintle  bearing  support  (lower)  which  bears  upon  a  flat 
at  the  front  end  of  the  pintle  shank.  The  lunette  ring  of  the  caisson 
is  retained  upon  the  pintle  hook  by  the  pintle  latch.  The  latter  is 
pivoted  by  the  latch  pin  upon  the  end  of  the  pintle  horn  and  is 
arranged  to  be  held  in  either  the  open  or  closed  position  by  the  pintle 
latch  spring.  The  latch  is  opened  by  the  lunette  in  entering  it  upon 
the  pintle  hook,  but  must  be  closed  by  hand.  The  spring  is  peened 
in  its  seat,  but  if  required  may  readily  be  driven  out  and  a  new  one 
inserted. 

Upon  the  left  side  of  the  chest  front  is  riveted  a  box  for  carrying 
two  canvas  buckets,  and  in  the  center  is  a  lantern  bracket.  A  name 
plate  above  the  lantern  gives  the  name,  number,  and  model  of  the 


'0161—17 7* 


j 

i 

3 

^> 

^5 

t 

5 

t 

s 

5 

€ 

1 

> 

S^ 

4 

$M 

$ 

* 

^u 

i 

B) 

^ 

* 

N 

C3 

g 

Sn 

3 

1 

y^ 

$ 

^j 

•§ 

N 

Mi 

*H 

* 

? 

75 

vehicle,  name  of  manufacturer,  year  of  completion,  and  initials  of  in- 
spector. In  all  reports  and  correspondence  the  vehicle  should  be  desig- 
nated by  the  number  and  model  given  on  the  name  plate 

The  fixtures  for  holding  the  pick  on  the  right  side  will  accommo- 
date either  a  pickax  or  a  pick  mattock;  those  on  the  left  side  for  the 
shovel  will  take  either  a  short  or  long  handled  implement.  A  pickax 
and  a  short-handled  shovel  are  issued  with  each  limber,  a  pick  mat- 
tock and  long-handled  shovel  with  each  caisson. 

The  paulin  on  the  top  of  the  chest  is  held  in  place  by  three  paulin 
straps  suitably  fastened.  Other  fastenings  on  top  of  the  chest  are 
for  a  picket  rope,  an  ax,  and  a  limber  blanket.  On  the  front  are 
attachments  for  a  wrench  and  the  pole  prop.  On  the  right  side  is  a 
hatchet  and  on  the  left  a  cartridge  hook  in  suitable  fixtures.  The 
cartridge  hook  is  for  use  in  withdrawing  the  cases  and  projectiles 
from  the  chest.  A  spanner  for  tightening  the  hub  bands  of  the 
wheels  is  carried  in  suitable  fastenings  between  the  intermediate 
plates. 

The  pole,  doubletree  and  singletrees,  and  neck  yoke  are  standard 
and  interchangeable  with  those  on  any  limber  of  the  battery. 

Doubletree  chains  attached  to  the  chest  body  prevent  excessive 
movement  of  either  end  of  the  doubletree. 

THE    CAI88ON,    MODEL   OF    1908. 
[Plate  XIV] 

The  4.7-inch  gun  caisson  is  built  upon  the  same  general  plan  as 
the  4.7-inch  gun  limber,  and  many  parts  of  the  two  vehicles — the 
wheels,  axles,  pintles  and  bearings,  lock  bars,  and  most  of  the 
implement  fastenings  and  chest  parts — are  exactly  similar  and  inter- 
changeable. 

The  principal  parts  are  the  wheels,  axle,  axle  bearings,  ammunition 
chest,  pintle,  connecting-pole  socket,  connecting  pole,  prop,  apron 
and  apron  latches,  and  brake. 

The  flange-steel  front  plate  and  chest  door  (upper)  of  the  limber 
are  in  the  caisson  replaced  by  hardened  armor  plates,  0.15  inch 
thick,  for  the  protection  of  the  ammunition  servers  in  the  rear  from 
small-arms  and  shrapnel  fire.  An  apron  of  armor  plate  of  the  same 
thickness  is  hinged  to  the  bottom  of  the  caisson  chest  and  extends  to 
within  a  short  distance  from  the  ground  for  the  same  purpose.  This 
apron  swings  forward  against  the  bottom  of  the  ammunition  chest 
to  clear  obstructions  in  traveling  and  is  held  in  that  position  by 
latches  attached  to  the  sides  of  the  chest. 

The  pole  socket  of  the  caisson  is  made  longer  than  on  the  limber 
and  fitted  with  rollers  which  serve  as  wheel  guards  and  is  braced  to 
the  sides  of  the  chest.  The  connecting-pole  body  is  made  of  steel 
tubing,  its  rear  end  is  finished  to  fit  the  pole  socket  and  is  provided 


76 

with  a  seat  for  the  rectangular  key  which  secures  the  connecting  pole 
to  the  socket.  A  lunette  bearing  of  bronze  is  riveted  in  the  front 
end  in  which  a  lunette  of  forged  steel  is  secured  by  two  pins.  A 
prop  of  steel  tubing  with  a  bronze  foot  is  attached  to  the  connecting 
pole  for  a  support  when  the  caisson  is  unlimbered.  When  not  in 
use  the  prop  is  swung  up  under  the  connecting  pole  and  held  by  chains 
leading  from  the  prop  legs  to  the  rear  of  the  brace  lugs  and  uniting 
in  a  hook  which  is  engaged  with  the  head  of  the  forward  lunette  pin. 

The  beams  of  the  road  brake  are  hinged  in  brackets  riveted  to  the 
chest  front.  They  are  built  up  of  flange  and  forged  steel  parts 
and  carry  cast-iron  shoes  to  bear  against  the  wheel  tiros.  A  brake 
shaft  passes  through  the  chest  forward  of  the  axle  and  is  mounted 
at  either  end  in  bearings  riveted  to  the  chest  sides.  A  spring-steel 
brake  lever  on  the  right  end  operates  this  shaft.  Its  renewable 
brake-lever  catch  engages  a  toothed  rack  riveted  on  the  chest  body 
to  hold  the  brake  when  applied ;  a  clasp  spring  secures  it  to  a  bracket 
in  its  extreme  released  position.  The  arms  of  the  brake  lever  and 
shaft  are  connected  to  the  brake  beams  by  compound  rods  as  on  the 
carriage  and  adjustment  for  wear  of  the  brake  shoes  secured  in  the 
manner  provided  for  that  vehicle. 

Hangers  for  a  spare  connecting  pole  are  provided  on  the  chest  front 
and  a  bracket  for  a  spare  key  on  the  left  side  of  the  chest. 

The  opening  at  the  rear  between  the  upper  and  lower  intermediate 
plates  on  the  left  side  is  utilized  to  carry  an  oil  can.  The  oil  can,  with 
a  capacity  of  2  gallons,  is  held  between  two  steel  angles  riveted  to 
the  lower  plate,  an  oil-can  packing  block  bolted  to  the  upper  plate, 
the  axle  and  a  stop  on  the  door  handle  (lower).  In  each  four  cais- 
sons, three  oil  cans  carry  lubricating  oil,  and  the  fourth  hydroline 
oil,  the  contents  of  each  being  indicated  by  a  name  plate. 

The  ax,  hatchet,  lantern,  and  watering  bucket  fastenings  are  similar 
and  located  the  same  as  those  on  the  limber;  the  shovel  fastenings 
are  similar,  but  the  handle  fastening  is  located  somewhat  higher  than 
on  the  Umber. 

The  paulin  on  the  caisson  chest  serves  as  a  seat  cushion  and  is 
secured  by  three  straps,  as  on  the  limber.  On  either  side  a  handrail 
projects  above  the  top  of  the  chest  and  with  the  grip  straps  provides 
handholds  for  the  cannoneers.  A  short  foot  rest  is  supported  on 
brackets  riveted  to  the  right  side  of  the  chest  front. 

A  name  plate  is  attached  to  each  caisson  chest  front  above  the 
lantern.  In  all  reports  and  correspondence  the  caisson  should  be  desig- 
nated by  the  name y  number,  and  model  given  on  this  name  plate.  In 
request  for  spare  parts  for  repairs,  etc.,  the  parts  should  bo  asked 
for  by  the  names  given  in  the  table,  giving  nomenclature  of  parts  in 
this  handbook  and  the  symbol  of  the  unserviceable  piece  copied] 
exactly  as  stamped  thereon. 


77 

THE   4.7-INCH    GUN    CAISSON,    MODEL.   OF    1916. 

Weights,  Dimensions,  Etc. 

Weight  of  caisson,  empty,  without  implements  or^fmmunition pounds. .  2065 

Weight  of  implements  carried,  including  spare  connecting  pole do 179$ 

Weight  of  ammunition  carried do 2055 

Weight  of  caisson,  completely  equipped  and  loaded do 4299 \ 

Rounds  of  ammunition  carried 28 

Diameter  of  wheels inches. .  (>0 

Width  of  track do. . . .  TO 

Free  height  under  caisson do 20  5 

Turning  angle degrees. .  75 

NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS. 


Num- 
ber on 
caisson. 


2S 
1 
I 
3 
3 
1 

a 
a 

a 
a 
a 

i 
i 
i 
i 
a 
a 
i 
a 
a 
a 
a 
a 

4 

a 

a 

i 

a 

i 
i 
i 
i 
a 
a 

2 

a 
a 
a 
a 

i 
i 
a 
a 

2 

1 
1 
1 

a 


Name  of  part. 


Ammunition  chest  connecting  pieces . . 

A  pron 

Apron  hinges,  female,  with  pins 

Apron  hinges,  male 

Apron  latches,  complete,  including— 

Latch  bodies 

Pioneers 

Latch  handles  with  pins 

I  .at  ch  springs 

Apron-latch  bases,  1  right,  1  left 

Apron-latch  staples 

Ax-hand le  bracket 

Ax  pocket 

A  x  strap 

Ax-strap  fastener,  No.  2 

Axle 

A  xle  bearings  with  bolts 

Axle  bearing  reinforce  plates 

Bolt  snap,  with  chain 

Brake  beams,  complete,  including — 

Bodies 

Brake-beam  clips 

Brake-beam  stiileners 

Brake-shoe  bearings 

Brake-beam  hinges 

Brake-beam  brackets 

Brake-beam  pins 

Brake  crank  with  washer 

Brake  guard 

Separator  (for  brake  guard) 

Brake  lever  with  washer 

Brake-lever  catch 

Brake-lever  rest 

Brake-lever  rest  spring 


Location,  etc. 


ProDerty 

classification. 


Connect  rear  and  middle  diaphragms. 

Hinged  to  chest  bottom 

Riveted  to  chest 

Riveted  to  apron 


On  latch  bases  riveted  to  chest 


Riveted  to  sides  of  chest . 

ted  to  apron 

On  top  of  chest 

....do. 


Riveted  to  chest 

Riveted  on  inside  of  chest. 
On  right  side  of  chest 


Hinged  to  brackets  on  rear  of  chest. 


Riveted  to  rear  plate 

Hinges  beams  to  brackets . . 
On  right  end  of  brake  shaft . 
Riveted  to  left  side  of  chest . 


On  left  end  of  brake  shaft . . 
Riveted  to  left  side  of  chest . 


Brake  rods,  complete,  including— 

Brake  rods 

Brake-ro- 1  key 

Brake-rod  ends  with  pins 

Brake-rod  bushings 

Brake-rod  springs 

Brake-spring  covers 

Brake-spring  cover  ends 

Segment  rack 

Brake  shaft 

Brake-shaft  bearings  with  bushings. 

Brake  shoes 

Brake-shoe  pins 

1  Tandy  oiler,  .312  (A) 

Bucket  -holder  body 

Bucket  strap 

Bucket-strap  fasteners 


Class. 


At  t  ached  to  brake  crank  and  brake  le 
and  to  the  brake  l>eams. 


Riveted  to  left  side  of  chest . 

Passes  through  chest 

Riveted  to  chest 

On  brake  beams 


Riveted  to  rear  plate. . 

In  strap  fasteners 

1  on  chest,  1  on  hosier. 


tion. 


IV 


78 


NOMENCLATURE   OF   PARTS— Continued 


Num- 
ber on 
caisson. 


Name  of  part. 


Caisson  prop,  complete,  including— 

Prop  tubes. 

Prop  foot 

Prop  eyes 

Prop-chain  clamps 

Prop  hook 

Prop  chains 

Cartridge-hook  strap 

Cartridge-hook  strap  fastener,  No.  1  - .. 

Cartridge-hook  support 

Cartridge-hook  bracket 

Chest  angle 

Chest  body,  upper  plate , 

Chest  body,  lower  plate 

Chest  door,  lower 

Chest  door,  upper 

Connecting  pole,  complete,  including- 

Body 

Key  bearing 

Lunette  bearing 

Limette  pins,  1  front,  1  rear 

Prop  saddle 

Tiaphragm  braces 

Door  angles  (for  upper  chest) 

Door  angle  (for  lower  chest) 

Door-end  stiffeners,  1  right,  1  left 

Door  handle,  bar,  upper 

Door  handle  base,  upper 

Door  handles,  lower,  1  right,  1  left 

Door  hinges,  female,  with  pins 

Door  hinges,  male , 

Door  props 

Door-prop  brackets 

Door-prop  guides,  1  right,  1  left 

Door-prop  pins 

Door-prop  rivets 

Door  stiffeners,  2  right,  2  left,  upper. . 

Door  stiffeners,  lower 

Filler  plate 

Foot  rest 

Foot-rest  supports,  1  right,  1  left 

Front  diaphragm,  lower 

Front  diaphragm,  upper 

Grip  straps , 

Grip  strap  fasteners,  No.  3 

Handrail  tubes 

Handrail  shanks 

Hatchet-blade  bracket,  body 

Hatchet  blade  bracket-handle  rest 

Hatchet-handle  bracket 

Hatchet-handle  strap 

Hatchet-handle  strap  fastener,  No.  10. 

Intermediate  plate,  lower 

Intermediate  plate,  upper 

Lantern  bracket,  complete,  including- 

Lantern  bracket  body 

Lantern  bracket  bottom 

Lantern  strap 

Lantern  strap  fastener 

Lock  bars 

Lock-bar  brackets,  1  right,  1  left 

Lock-bar  handles,  1  right,  1  left 

Lock-bar  handle  catches 

Lock-bar  handle  catch  bearing,  1  right, 
1  left. 

Lock-bar  plates 

Lock-bar  staples 

Lock-bar  pins 

Lock  bar  washers 

Locking  levers 

Locking  lever  bearings 

Lunette 

Middle  diaphragm,  lower 

Middle  diaphragm,  upper 

Name  plate 

Nut  strips 

Oil-can  lock 

Oil-can  guides,  1  right,  1  left 

Oil-can  stop .  complete 

Padlock,  bolt  snap,  clevis,  and  chain. 

Paulin  straps 

Paulin  strap  fasteners,  No.  10 


Property 
classification. 


Location,  etc. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


Under  connecting  pole . 


On  right  side  of  chest 

do 

....do 

...do 

Riveted  around  chest  at  rear . 


Hinged  on  front  of  chest . 


Keyed  to  pole  socket. 


Riveted  to  upper  diaphragms . 
Stiffens  edges  of  door 


On  front  of  door. 

....do 

....do 


Pivoted  to  upper  door . 
Riveted  to  upper  door . 
Riveted  to  chest  sides. 


Riveted  to  upper  door 

Riveted  to  lower  door 

Riveted  with  pintle  spring . 

On  rear  plate  of  chest 

do 

In  rear  of  chest 

....do 

On  rear  of  chest 

....do 


IV 


Riveted  to  sides  of  chest . 
On  left  side  of  chest 


.do. 
.do. 
.do. 


On  rear  of  chest . 


On  front  of  chest . 
On  sides  of  chest . 
On  lock  bars 


►On  sides  of  chest . 


do 

On  front  of  chest 

do 

In  end  of  connecting  pole . 


Secure  pintle-bearing  bolts 

Riveted  to  lower  door  handle,  right . 

On  intermediate  plate,  lower 

Riveted  between  plates 

On  left  side  of  chest 

On  top  of  chest 

do 


79 


NOMENCLATURE    OF    PARTS— Continued. 


Num- 
ber on 
caisson. 


Property 
classification . 


Name  of  part. 


Location,  etc. 


Class. 


Pick  rest On  left  side  of  chest 

Pick-handle  rest do 

P;ck--maiioek  handle  strap do 

Pic'-  -m:ii  t ock  han< lie  strap  fastener. do 

Picket  rope  straps ,  lower On  top  of  chest .... 

Picket  rope  straps  upper do 

Picket  rope  strap  fasteners,  No.  5 do 

Pintle In  bearings 

Pintle-bearing  support,  lower 1  Riveted  to  intermediate  plates, upper 

Pintle-bearing  support,  upper f    and  lower. 

Pintle  bearings In  supports 

Pintle-bearing  bolts 

Pintle  latch 

Pintle-latch  pin On  pintle 

Pintle-latch  spring do 

Pintle-spring  guide In  supports 

Pintle  spring  with  bolt do 

Connecting-pole  key Connects  pole  to  socket 

Connecting-pole  socket Riveted  to  intermediate  plates. 

Pole-socket  key  bracket On  right  side  of  chest 

Rear  diaphragm,  lower 

Rear  diaphragm,  upper 

Roar  plate 


Sec- 
tion. 


\  IV 


for 


Slo^ft^:;::::::::::::::}^^^?^^^  support,... 

Shovel-handle  rest On  right  side  of  chest 

Shovel-handle  strap do. 

Shovel-handle  strap  fastener,  No.  2 do. 

Shovel  support do. 

Spare  connecting-pole  clip 

Span  connect  ing-pole  clip  pin 

Spare  connecting-pole  bracket 

Spare  connecting-pole  bracket  band.. 

Spare  connecting-pole  support 

Wheels. 60-inch  diameter, complete. 

W  heel-bearing  rollers  with  pins On  pole  socket . 

Wheel  fastenings, complete 


DESCRIPTION    OF   4.7-INCH   GUN   CAISSON,    MODEL   OF    1916. 

[Plate  XV.] 

The  model  of  1916  caisson  is  built  upon  the  same  general  plan  as 
the  model  of  1908  caisson,  and  many  parts  of  the  two  vehicles — 
the  wheels,  axles,  pintles  and  bearings,  lock  bars,  chest  diaphragms, 
chest  doors  and  apron,  brake  details,  connecting  pole,  implement 
fastenings,  and  chest  parts — are  identical. 

The  general  difference  in  the  two  models  of  vehicles  lies  in  the 
fact  that  the  model  of  1916  chest  is  reversed,  the  doors  opening 
on  the  front.  This  causes  the  rear  diaphragms  to  become  the  front 
diaphragms  and  the  front  plate  the  rear  plate.  The  oil  can  is  located 
between  the  diaphragms  in  the  front  of  the  chest;  the  foot  rest, 
lantern,  bracket,  and  bucket  holder  are  located  on  the  rear,  and 
the  apron  swings  to  the  rear  in  traveling.  The  brake  is  located 
in  the  rear  of  the  axle  and  functions  similar  to  that  of  the  model  of 
1908  vehicles,  the  only  difference  in  the  design  being  in  the  brake 
beam  and  its  connection  to  the  chest  body.  The  pole  socket  is 
secured  between  the  intermediate  plates,  and  no  tie-rods  are  used. 
The  axle  is  located  nearer  the  rear  plate  in  the  model  of  1916  vehicle, 
and  the  chest  body  and  axle  bearings  are  of  new  design. 

The  location  of  some  of  the  implements  is  changed,  though  the 
fastenings  are  identical  with  those  of  the  model  of  1908  caisson. 


80 

THE  4.7-INCH  GUN  AND  6-INCH  HOWITZER  FORGE 
LIMBER,  MODEL  OF  1908,  AND  THE  4.7-INCH  GUN  AND 
6-INCH  HOWITZER  STORE  LIMBER,   MODEL  OF  1908. 

[These  limbers  are  common  to  the  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  batteries.] 

WEIGHTS,  PRINCIPAL    DIMENSIONS,  ETC. 

Weight  of  forge  limber,  empty,  without  implements,  etc pounds. .  1,  654 

Weight  of  forge  limber,  fully  equipped do 2,  499 

Weight  of  forge  limber  and  battery  wagon,  model  or  1908,  combined,  fully 

equipped pounds. .  7,  568 

Weight  of  store  limber,  empty,  without  implements,  etc do 1,  629 

Weight  of  store  limber,  fully  equipped do 2, 184 

Weight  of  store  limber  and  store  wagon,   model  of  1908,   combined,   fully 

equipped pounds. .  7,  711 

Weight  upon  pintles  of  either  forge  or  store  limbers,  from  battery  wagon  or 

store  wagon pounds. .       100 

Diameter  of  wheels inches. .        60 

Width  of  track do 60 

Free  height  above  track  under  wagon  for  either  combination do 17 

Turning  angle degrees. .        65 

NOMENCLATURE   OF   PARTS. 


Num- 
ber 
on 
forge 
lim- 
ber. 


Num- 
ber 
on 

Location,  etc. 

Property 
classincation. 

store                   l,au"w,»wl" 
lim- 
ber. 

Class. 

Sec- 
tion. 

Arbor  clips 

Part  of  grindstone  packing . . 

1 

Axle 

IV 

2 

Axle  bearings,  right  and  left 

Axle-bearing  bolts,  with  nuts. . . 

Riveted  to  sides  of  chest 

2 

Clamp  axle  bearings 

4 

1 

Axle-bearing  reinforces 

Under  axle  bearings'  rivets 

Ax-blade  bracket 

I 

On  left  side  of  chest 

1 
1 
1 
6 

Ax-handle  support 

Ax-strap  fastener,  style  No.  2.. . 
Bolt  snaps  with  4-inch  chains.. . 
Chain  staples 

1 

Temporary  locks  for  doors 

1 

1 

Chest  body,  right  side 

1 

Chest  body,  left  side 

1 

Chest  bottom 

2 
1 
2 

Chest  braces, -right  and  left ...'.'. 
Chest  floor,  upper,  with— 
Floor  braces,  right  and  left 

Frames  of  upper  front-door  openings . . 

1 

Chest  floor  reinforce 

Middle  rail,  upper,  to  chest  floor 

Reinforce  lower  edge  of  chest 

2 

Chest  frames,  front  and  rear 

Chest  front  doors,  upper 

Chest  front  doors,  lower. . . 

2 

Swing  up  under  foot  rest 

2 

9 

Chest  rear  doors,  upper,  right, 
and  left.           ''~^' 
Chest  rear  doors,  lower . . . 

>Swing  down 

At  foot  rest,  bracket  rivets 

2 

Chest  reinforces 

1 

Chest-top  angle 

Around  top  of  chest 

1 

Cushion,  for  battery  command-" 
er's  telescope,  consisting  of— 
Block 

lln  compartment  No.  5 

1 

1  In  compartment  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3 j 

Riveted  to  inside  of  lid j 

2 

Cleats 

I 

Cover 

I 

Filling 

3 
3 

Cushions,  for  buzzers,  consisting 
of— 
Blocks 

3 

Covers 

3 
3 

Fillings 

(Jrips 

Die-box  holders,  right  and  left. . 
Die-box    holder   spring,    with 
hinge  and  hinge  pin. 

1 

81 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


Num- 
ber 
on 
forge 
lim- 
ber. 


Num- 
ber 
on 

store 
lim- 
ber. 


Name  of  part. 


|  Die-box  pocket 

Door  hinges 

Door  hinges,  lower 

Door  hinges,  upper 

'■  Door-hinge  pins 

Door-hinge  filler  pieces,  lower. . 
Door-hinge  filler  pieces,  upper. 

Doubletree 

Doubletree  chains 

\  Doubletree  chain  bolts 

Doubletree  pin  with  nut 

\  Doubletree  strap 

i  End  cleat,  front,  left 

j  End  cleat,  front,  right 

!  End  cleat,  rear,  left 

!  End  cleat,  rear,  right 

'  End  fillers 

End  lining,  left 

End  lining,  right 

False  bottoms,  consisting  of— 

Bodies 

Braces 

Ends 

False  bottom,  consisting  of— 

Body 

Brace 

Ends 

False  bottom,  consisting  of— 

Body 

Brace 

Ends 

False  bottoms,  consisting  of— 

Bodies 

Braces 

Ends 

False  bottoms,  consisting  of— 

Bodies 

Braces 

Ends 

False  bottom,  consisting  of— 

Body 

Brace 

Ends 

Fastener,  clip  stud 

Filler  strips,  long 

Filler  strips,  short 

Flat  bastard-file  fastening. 


Location,  etc. 


Riveted  to  inside  of  lid. 

On  rear  doors 

On  front  and  rear  doors . 


Same  as  on  carriage  limber . . 
From  doubletree  to  foot  rest . 


In  pole  clamp 

On  doubletree  pin. 


•In  corners  of  upper  chest . 

Back  of  hammer  packing. 
■In  ends  of  chest 


■For  compartments  Nos.  1,2.  and  3 


For  compartment  No.  4 . 


>For  compartment  No.  5 . 


For  compartments  Nos.  6  and  7. 


For  compartments  Nos.  8  and  9. 


For  compartment  No.  10. 


On  grindstone,  upper  packing 

}  Riveted  to  underside  of  intermediate 
floors. 
On  packing  block  for  small  tools 


SIS;  KsySS!::-.-::.::  h «»«-  <*»»«*- 


Front  lining 

Front  lining  end  cleat,  left 

Front  lining  end  cleat,  right 

Front  lining  middle  cleat 

Floor  stifteners,  right  and  left.. . 

Floor  stiffeners 

Foot  rest 

Foot-rest  brace 

Foot-rest  brackets,  right  and 
left. 

Foot-rest  supports,  right  and 
left. 

Fore  punch  and  creaser  fasten- 
ings. 

Forge  fastenings 

Forge-legs  fastening  No.  1 

Forge-legs  fastening  No.  2. 

Grindstone-legs  fastening 

Grindstone-legs  fastening  clip.. . 

Grindstone-legs  fastening  lock. . 

Grindstone-legs  hanger 

Grindstone-legs  pocket 

Grindstone-packing  tracks,  in- 
ner and  outer. 

Grindstone  strap 

Grindstone    upper    packing, 
right  and  left. 


In  front  of  upper  chest . 
Screwed  to  front  lining. 


[Brace  rear  of  intermediate  floors . 

Riveted  to  chest  and  middle  rail . 

Riveted  to  foot  rest 

At  sides  of  foot  rest 


Suspend  outer  corners  of  foot  rest . 


Riveted  to  lid 

JRiveted  to  transverse  partition,  right . 

On  hanger 

On  right  upper  grindstone  packing 

On  fastener  clip  stud 

Riveted  under  chest  floor 

Riveted  to  intermediate  floor 


Bolted  to  chest  floor. 


Property 
classification. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


IV 


82 


\o\lF.V  LATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


Num- 
ber 

on 
forge 

lim- 
be 


Num- 
ber 
on 

lim- 
ber. 


Name  of  part . 


i  .  .  .  . 

I  

l   

8  3 

8  3 

1    

1    


■1 

2 

■1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

Grindstone  lower  packing 

Grindstone-packing  bolts  and 
nuts. 

Grindstone  plate 

Grip  straps 

Grip-strap  fasteners,  style  No.  7. 

Hammer  packing,  right,  with 
cover  plate. 

Hammer  packing,   left,   with 
cover  plate. 

Handrail  brackets,  rear 

Handrail  brackets,  front 

Handrail  tubes 

Handreel  seats 

Hasp 

Hasp  hinge 

Hasp-hinge  pin 

Hatchet-blade  bracket 

Hatchet-handle  fastener 

Hatchet  strap  .• 

Horseshoe  packing,  right,  con- 
sisting of— 

Front 

Rear 

Inner 

O  uter 

Bottom 

Horseshoe  packing,  left,  con- 
sisting of— 
Front 


Inner 

Outer 

Bottom 

Intermediate  floors,  right  and 

left. 
....do 


Location,  etc. 


Slides  in  left  upper  rear  compartment 
For  upper  packing 


On  lower  packing . 
J-On  front  of  lid 


In  upper  chest,  rear  compartment. 


■Riveted  to  side  i  \  chest . . 

In  handrail  brackets 

In  compartments  8  and  9. 
On  rear  of  lid 


On  right'side  of  chest . 


•Upper  chest,  horsesnoe  compartment. 


Riveted  to  front  of  chest . 


In  strap  fasteners 

Riveted  to  lantern  bracket  body . 


•In  bottom  of  chest . 


Jack-lever  bracket  No.  1 

Jack-lever  bracket  No.  2 , 

Jack  packing  strap  No.  1 

Jack  packing  strap  No.  2 

Lantern  bracket  body 

Lantern  bracket  bottom 

Lantern  strap 

Lantern  strap  fasteners 

Lever  jack  packing,  consisting 
of— 

Packing  "A" 

Packing"B" 

Packing"C" 

Packing  "D" 

Pins 

Lid I. 

Lid  band I  Reinforce  edges  of  lid 

Lid  hinges,  lower !  On  chest  front 

Lid  hinges,  upper j  On  lid 

Lid  hinge  pins 

Lid  lining,  front 

Lid  lining  strip I  lTmH-  of 

Lid  lining,  middle >I] 

Lid  lining,  rear 

Lid  prop,  with  rivet 

Lid-prop  bracket 

Lid-prop  guide,  right 

Lid-prop  guide,  left 

Lid-prop  guide,  right 

Lid-prop  gride  fillers  (end) 

Lid-prop  guide  fillers  (middle). . 

Lid  prop  sliding  rivets 

1  ist  of  contents 

Lock-bar  hinges,  lower 

Lock-bar  hinges,  upper 

Lock-bar  hinge  pins 

Longitudinal   partitions,  right 
and  loft. 


Supports  open  lid . 

On  lid. 

On  right  longitudinal  partition. 

Inside  of  chest  ends 


} 

lUnder  lid  prop  guides. 


Property 
classification. 


(lass. 


Sec- 
tion. 


In  lid  props  and  guide- 

Pasted  to  lid 

On  lower  edge  of  chesl .  rear 
On  rear  of  c  lest 


[V 


83 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


Num- 
ber 
on 
store 
lim- 
ber. 


Name  of  part. 


Property 
classification. 


Location,  etc. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


{Extends  through  chest,  front  to  roar. . 
On  front  of  chest 

Same  as  with  carriage  limber 

Secure  lower  oil  cans 

Secure  upper  oil  cans 


In  oil-can  compartments . 


Middle  rail,  lower 

Middle  rail,  upper 

Name  plate 

Name  plate 

Neck  yoke,  complete 

Oil-can  lock  bars,  lower 

Oil-can  lock-  bars,  upper 

Oil-can  packing  blocks,  No.  1 . . . 
Oil-can  packing  blocks,  No.  2. . . 
Oil-can  packing  blocks,  No.  3, 

right  and  left. 
Oil-can  packing  blocks,  No.  4. . . 
Oil-can  packing  blocks,  No.  5. . . 
Oil-can  packing  blocks,  No.  6, 

right  and  loft. 
Oil-can  packing  blocks,  No.  7... 

Oiler  fastening 

Packing  for  anvil 

Packing  for  forge 

Packing  for  small  tools 

Pads,  complete,  with  lining 

Pa  Uock-chain  rivets,  long 

Padlock-chain  rivets,  short 

Padlock,  with  t-inch  chain Marked  '1.7"  mm  and  6"  how.,  Forge 

Umber.  Mo  lei  1908.    No.—." 
Marked  "4.7"  gun  and  6"  how.,  Store 

limber,  Model  1908.    No.—." 
Between  compartments  1,  2,  and  3... 

Between  compartments  Sand  i , 

Between  compartments  i  and  "> 

Between  partitions  ••  B  "  and  "< 

Front  longitudinal  partition 

Middle  longitudinal  partition 

en  compartments  6  and  7 

i  ii  compartments  7  and  8 

Screwed  to  partition  "  IT."  bods 

en  compartments  8  and  9 


On  packing  for  anvil 

In  center  compartment  of  upper  chest. 

}....do 

In  chest  compartments 

|For  lock  chains. 


Padlock,  with  4-inch  chain . 


Partitions  •'  A  " 

Partition"B" 

Partition  "<"' 

Partition   '  J>" 

Partition  "E" 

Partition  «P" 

Partition  "O" 

Partition  ••  If,"  bo  lv 

Partitions-  H  "  guides  (small). 
Partition  "J,'*  body 


Partition  "J,"  guides  (small).. .  la„m„„j  ♦«.^„^u.-««  «t  »u~*„ 
Partition  ".J,"  guides  (large)....  l}Screwo,i  to  V****  "h  'body 

Port,finn  "  u  "  body Pet  ween  compartments  9  and  10 

de 


Screwed  to  partition  u  K,"  body. 
EUghl  side  of  compartment  10... 

Over  partition  ''If" 

For  partition  "  E  " 

Brace  partition  "  F  " 

For  all  partitions  except  "  E  ". . . 
Riveted  in  partition  guides 


On  top  of  chest. 


On  right  side  of  chest. 
On  chest  bottom 


Partition  ••  K 

Partition  •'  K,"  guides  (large). 

Partition  "L" 

Partition  brace 

Partition  guides 

Part  it  ion  guides  (bottom) 

Part  it  ion  guides  (side) 

1 'art  it  ion  guide  stops 

Paulin  straps 

Paulin   strap   fasteners,   style 
No.  10. 

Pick-ax  bracket 

Pick-ax  bracket  filler 

Pick-handle  rest 

Pick-head  strap 

Pick-head  strap  fastener,  style 
No.  12. 

Pick-point  support 

Pintle,  complete,  including— 

Pintle 

Pintle  latch 

Pintle-latch  spring 

Pintle-latch  pin 

Pintle  bearing j  In  rear  end  of  middle  rail 

Pintle  brace '  Forms  rear  end  of  middle  rail,  riveted 

to  chest  floor. 

Pintle  spring Riveted  to  middle  rail,  lower 

Pintle-spring  pin 

Pocket  for  T.  I.  recorders,  in- 
cluding— 

Box  (2  side  pieces,  1  bottom 


In  pintle  bearing. 


piece,  1  front  piece). 
Fastener 


Fastener  chape. 

Lining 

Flap 


Attached  to  right  end  of  partition  "  F". 


IV 


84 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


Num- 

Num- 

ber 

ber 

on 

on 

forge 

store 

lim- 

lim- 

ber. 

ber. 

1 

j 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

I 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

J 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

} 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

10 

10 

1 

6 

2 

2 

2 

2 

6 

4 

2 

2 

2 

2 

6 

6 

4 

2 

7 

16 

20 

8 

8 

Name  of  part. 


Pole,  complete 

Pole  clamp 

Pole-clamp  bolt,  with  nut 

Pole  pin 

Pole-pin  reinforce 

Pole-prop  pocket 

Pole-prop  support 

Pole-prop  strap 

Pole-prop  strap  fastener,  style 
No.  1. 

Pole  stop 

Prop,  complete,  consisting  of— 

Prop  eye 

Prop  foot 

Prop  tube 

Prop  bracket. 

Prop  chain,  consisting  of— 

Prop  chain 

Prop-chain  fastening 

Prop-^hain  handle 

Prop-chain  button 

Prop-chain  button  rivet ... 

Rear  lining 

Rear  lining  end  cleat,  left 

Rear  lining  end  cleat,  right 

Rear  lining  middle  cleat 

Separators 

Shoeing-rasp  fastening 

Shot  bolts  for  grindstone  pack- 
ing  

Shot  bolts,  right  and  left 

Shot-bolt  brackets,  right  and 
left. 

Shot-bolt  filler  pieces 

Shot-bolt  hasps,  right  and  left. . 

Shot-bolt  stops 

Shovel-blade  bracket 

Shovel-handle  support 

Shovel-handle  strap 

Side  fillers 

Singletrees 

Sledge-handle  support 

Sledge  pocket , 

Sledge  strap 

Sled  Re-strap  fastener,  style  No.10 
Springs 


Location,  etc. 


Same  as  on  carriage  limber . 
On  middle  rail 


Secures  pole  in  pole  seat... 

Riveted  to  middle  rail 

Under  left  side  of  foot  rest. 


Riveted  between  middle  rails . 


Hinged  to  prop  bracket. 
Riveted  to  pole  clamp... 


Secures  prop  in  folded  position . 
Riveted  to  foot  rest 


In  rear  of  upper  chest . . 
Hinged  to  prop  bracket. 


Riveted  between  middle  rails. 

On  packing  for  small  tools 

On  lower  packing 


In  shot-bolt  brackets — 
Riveted  to  rear  of  chest. 


Riveted  to  lid 

Riveted  to  shot-bolt  brackets. 
On  left  side  of  chest 


Back  of  hammer  packing 

Same  as  on  carriage  limber . . 
On  right  side  of  forge  limber. 


Square  fastening 

Stamped  washers 

Tie-rods,  right  and  left . 


Transverse  partitions, 
right  and  left 

Transverse  partitions, 
right  and  left. 

Washers 

Washers 


front, 


rear, 


Wheels,  60-inch 

Wheel  fastenings 

Wing  nuts 

Wing-nut  brackets,  with  wash- 
ers. 

Wing-nut  filler  piece 

Wing-nut  pins,  with  washers 

0.312  (tV)  rivet  reinforces 

0.375  rivet  reinforces 


Under  cushion  for  buzzers  and  battery 

commander's  telescope. 

Riveted  to  lid 

Under  rivets  in  packing  tracks 

Brace  forward  end  of  middle  rail  to 

chest. 

In  upper  chest,  extend  from  chest  sides 
to  longitudinal  partition. 


For  buzzer  cushion  springs 

For  cushion  under  battery  comman- 
der's telescope. 

Same  as  carriage 

do 

Secure  doors  and  lock  bars 

Riveted  to  intermediate  floors 


On  wing-nut  pin 

Riveted  in  chest  braces.. 

Under  lid  hinges 

Under  handrail  brackets. 


Property 
classification. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


IV 


II 


»  ^   S  ^     g   °3 

f  7  | 


LLM 


5 


£> 


85 

DESCRIPTION    OF     THE    4. 7-INCH    OCX     AND    »i-l\(ll      HOWITZER     FORGE 
LIMBER,  MODEL    OF    tfcfc. 

[Plate  XVI.] 

The  forge  limber  is  a  two-wheeled  vehicle  designed  to  accompany 
the  battery  wagon,  model  of  1908,  and  fitted  to  carry  the  tools  and 
supplies  pertaining  to  a  farrier's  shop  with  the  addition  of  some 
machinist's  tools. 

The  principal  parts  are  the  wheels,  axle,  chest,  middle  rail,  pintle, 
foot  rest,  pole  clamp,  pole,  limber  prop,  doubletree,  singletrees,  and 
neck  yoke. 

The  wheels  and  wheel  fastenings  are  the  same  as  those  upon  the 
carriage.  The  axle  is  hollow,  made  of  a  single  piece  of  forged  steel, 
and  is  made  identical  with  the  axles  of  the  store  Umber,  model  of 
1908,  and  battery  and  store  wagons,  model  of  1908. 

The  axle  passes  through  the  chest  between  horizontal  plates  and 
is  secured  to  the  chest  sides  by  axle  bearings  riveted  to  the  chest. 

The  chest  is  formed  from  flanged  steel  plates  and  is  divided  by 
the  horizontal  plates  above  and  below  the  axle  into  three  sections, 
the  upper  being  fitted  to  carry  the  forge,  anvil,  blacksmith's  tools, 
horseshoes,  and  supplies,  and  entered  from  the  top.  The  upper 
edges  of  the  body  plates  are  reinforced  by  a  steel  angle ;  the  lid  which 
covers  this  upper  section  is  a  steel  plate  with  its  edges  reinforced  by 
a  steel  band.     The  lid  hinges  are  in  front. 

Two  longitudinal  partitions  divide  the  upper  chest  into  a  middle 
compartment  and  two  side  compartments,  and  each  side  compart- 
ment is  subdivided  by  two  transverse  partitions.  The  forward  side 
compartments  are  wood  lined  and  have  a  capacity  of  350  pounds  of 
horseshoes,  to  be  carried  loose  in  the  box;  the  intermediate  side  com- 
partments will  take  50  pounds  of  horseshoe  nails,  either  loose  or  in 
the  25-pound  box  of  nails  as  issued;  the  rear  side  compartments  are 
fitted  for  carrying  tools.  The  middle  compartment  is  fitted  to  take 
the  field  forge  in  front,  the  anvil  in  the  center,  and  several  small  tools 
in  fastenings  on  the  rear  wall.  The  anvil  and  forge  are  bedded  in 
wooden  seats  on  the  chest  floor  and  are  held  in  position  by  attach- 
ments on  the  lid.  The  latter  is  held  in  its  open  position  by  a  lid 
prop  which  is  hinged  to  a  door  prop  bracket  riveted  to  the  underside 
of  the  lid  and  having  at  its  other  end  a  button  running  in  a  lid  prop 
guide  riveted  to  the  right  longitudinal  partition.  Other  attachments 
on  the  underside  of  the  lid  form  fastenings  for  a  steel  square  and  a 
box  of  dies  and  taps  for  cutting  threads.  Shot  bolts  at  each  rear 
corner  and  a  hasp  and  turnbuckle  with  padlock  in  the  middle  secure 
the  lid  when  closed. 

The  space  between  the  intermediate  plates  and  in  front  of  the  axle 
is  to  be  used  for  carrying  the  picket  rope  and  water  buckets ;  doorways 
10161-17 8* 


86 

are  cut  through  the  front  of  the  chest  for  admission  thereto  and  closed 
by  drop  doors.  The  similar  space  to  the  rear  of  the  axle  is  entered 
through  doorways  cut  in  the  rear  of  the  chest;  the  right  side  is  in- 
tended for  the  tackle  blocks,  the  left  side  being  fitted  with  packing 
blocks  for  the  grindstone  and  its  frame.  The  grindstone-frame  legs 
are  to  be  assembled  in  their  fastenings  before  the  block  containing 
the  stone  and  frame  is  slid  into  place. 

The  lower  section  of  the  chest  is  fitted  to  carry  two  lever  jacks, 
one  on  either  side;  150  feet  of  1-inch  manila  rope  for  the  tackle 
blocks  is  to  be  carried  either  in  this  compartment  or  above  as  proves 
most  convenient.  Openings  in  the  front  and  rear  of  the  chest  for 
admission  to  the  lower  compartment  are  closed  by  doors  which  swing 
down  to  open.  Corresponding  doors  to  the  compartment  above 
swing  up  to  open  and  when  closed  overlap  the  lower  doors  to  shed 
rain  water.     These  doors  are  secured  by  wing  nuts  with  bolt  snaps. 

The  socket  for  the  pole,  instead  of  being  bolted  to  the  chest  front 
as  in  the  limber  and  caisson,  has  for  its  lower  member  a  flange  steel 
channel  or  middle  rail  which  extends  to  the  rear  through  the  chest, 
its  rear  end  forming  a  seat  for  the  pintle.  This  middle  rail,  lower, 
divides  the  lower  horizontal  plate  or  intermediate  floor  and  is  riveted 
to  flanges  turned  downward  on  the  two  sections  of  the  plate  so  formed. 

The  upper  part  of  the  pole  socket  middle  rail,  upper,  is  riveted  to 
the  upper  horizontal  plate  or  chest  floor,  upper,  and  to  strong  rein- 
forces in  the  front  of  the  chest  as  well  as  to  the  lower  middle  rail. 

The  pole  clamp  forms  a  seat  for  the  doubletree  pin  and  has  a  bolt 
in  lugs  on  the  left  side  for  drawing  the  two  parts  of  the  middle  rail 
firmly  about  the  pole.  On  the  underside  of  the  pole  clamp  is  riveted 
the  prop  bracket,  to  which  the  limber  prop  is  hinged.  The  doubletree 
pin  is  exactly  similar  to  that  on  the  caisson  limber  and  is  braced  by 
a  doubletree  strap  as  on  that  vehicle.  The  pintle  and  pintle  latch 
are  interchangeable  with  those  of  the  limber  and  caisson;  the  pintle 
bearing  is  of  bronze  and  in  two  sections  and  is  secured  by  two  bolts 
passing  through  the  middle  rail  and  pintle  brace.  The  latter  is 
formed  of  flange  steel  and  braces  the  pintle  and  middle  rail  to  the 
chest  floor  above. 

A  foot  rest  is  riveted  to  the  chest  front,  its  forward  edge  being 
shaped  to  fit  the  middle  rail,  to  which  it  is  riveted,  and  its  forward 
corners  tied  to  the  handrail  brackets  on  the  chest  sides  by  round  sup- 
ports. Foot-rest  brackets  of  flange  steel  reinforce  the  ends  of  the 
foot  rest  and  to  these  are  fastened  doubletree  chains  extending  to 
the  doubletree'  and  preventing  excessive  movement  thereof. 

The  pole,  neck  yoke,  doubletree,  and  singletrees  are  standard  with 
those  of  the  other  battery  vehicles.  The  paulin  on  the  lid  is  to  serve 
as  a  seat  cushion;  attachments  for  carrying  a  sledge  hammer,  a 
hatchet,  and  a  pickax  are  on  the  right  side  of  the  chest;  a  lantern 


87 

bracket  is  riveted  to  the  chest  front,  and  fastenings  for  a  short- 
handled  shovel  and  an  ax  are  on  the  left  side  of  the  chest.  A  folding 
pole  prop  is  carried  in  fastenings  on  the  underside  of  the  foot  rest. 
A  name  plate  is  riveted  on  the  front  of  the  chest  and  gives  the  name, 
number,  and  model  of  the  vehicle  for  reference  in  correspondence 
and  reports. 

DESCRIPTION    OF    THE    4.7-INCH    GUN     AND     6-INCH     HOWITZER     STORE 

LIMBER,  MODEL    OF    1908. 

[PL  XVII.l 

This  vehicle,  designed  to  accompany  the  store  wagon,  model  of 
1908,  is  very  similar  to  the  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  forge 
limber,  model  of  1908;  the  wheels,  axle,  axle-bearings,  middle  rail, 
pintle  brace,  pintle  and  bearing,  pole  clamp,  doubletree  bolt,  tie-rods, 
foot  rest,  etc.,  being  identical  in  the  two  vehicles.  The  chests  differ 
only  in  the  fittings  for  the  articles  to  be  carried. 

The  upper  chest  of  the  store  limber  is  fitted  with  compartments 
for  carrying  the  fire-control  equipment,  viz: 

5  buzzers,  service  model  of  1914. 

3  hand  reels. 

3  spools  buzzer  wire  (0.5  mile  per  spool). 

7  field  glasses  (type  EE). 

1  battery  case  (containing  6  tungsten  type  A  batteries). 

8  flag  kits,  combination  artillery. 
1  lineman's  belt,  16  inch. 

1  climbers  (pair)  with  straps  and  pads. 
12  flash  lights  (without  hoods). 

5  inspector's  pocket  kits,  each  containing — 
1  pocket  knife. 
1  pair  scissors. 
1  wire  cutter. 
1  half-round  file. 
1  pair  tweezers. 
1  screw  driver. 

1  2-foot  rule. 

2  infantry  pick  mattocks,  model  1910. 
2  carriers  for  pick  mattocks. 

Spare  parts  for  buzzers,  consisting  of — 
6  connecters  (type  A)  without  cords. 
6  connector  studs  (19  point,  model  A). 
10  cords,  No.  305. 

2  plugs. 

6  rods,  ground  (type  D). 

The  compartments  for  buzzers,  pocket  kits,  battery  commander's 
telescope,  field  glasses,  and  battery  case  are  padded  to  protect  the 
contents  from  injury. 

The  intermediate  and  lower  sections  of  the  store  limber  are  arranged 
to  carry  six  oil  cans  for  the  reserve  supply  of  oils.  In  the  inter- 
mediate section  to  the  rear  of  the  axle  are  two  rectangular  cans  made 
of  heavv  sheet  brass,  each  having  a  capacity  of  7.5  gallons  of  coal 


88 

oil.  In  the  lower  section  are  four  longer  cans  of  5  gallons  capacity 
each,  two  for  lubricating  oil  and  two  for  hydroline  oil.  Each  can  is 
provided  with  a  filling  hole  on  top  and  with  a  special  stopcock  at 
the  rear  end.  The  stopcock  is  placed  so  that  oil  may  be  convenient  1  v 
drawn  without  removing  the  cans  from  the  limber.  Wearing  strips 
of  brass  are  soldered  to  the  bottoms  of  the  cans,  and  contact  blocks 
on  the  forward  ends  of  each  can  embrace  projections  to  hold  each 
can  in  place  when  the  others  are  removed.  Wooden  packing  strips 
to  serve  as  guides  for  the  cans  are  bolted  to  the  floors  and  walls  of 
the  compartments.  Instead  of  doors  on  the  rear  of  the  chest  the 
cans  are  secured  by  lock  bars,  held  in  closed  position  by  wing  nuts 
and  bolt  snaps. 

No  sledge-hammer  fastenings  are  placed  on  the  store  limber.  With 
this  exception  the  implement  fastenings  are  the  same  as  on  the  forge 
limber.     The  name  plate  is  riveted  on  the  front  of  the  chest. 

THE  BATTERY  AND  STORE  WAGONS,  MODEL.  OF  1908. 

NOMENCLATURE   OF  PARTS. 


Num- 
ber in 
1  bat- 
tery 
wagon. 


Num- 
ber in 
1  store 
wagon. 


2 
10 
2 

2 

10 
2 
2 
2 
2 


Location,  etc. 


Axle 

Axle  bearings 

Axle  clamping  bolts  and  nuts. . . 

Axle  clamping  sleeves 

Brake  beam,  complete,  includ- 
ing— 

Brake-beam  bearing  plates. . 

Brake-beam  end  fillers 

Brake-beam  end  plugs 

Brake-beam  guide  plugs,  1 
right,  1  left. 

Brake-beam  middle  fillers . . 

Brake-beam  reinforce  plates. 

Brake-beam  stops 

Brake-shoe  bearings 

Brake-beam  guides,  1  right,  1 
left. 

Brake-beam  plungers j 

Brake-beam  springs 

Brake  connecting  rod 

Brake  crank | 

Brake  crank  cover j 

Brake  cross  brace ) 

Brake  cross  brace  stiffener 

Brake  lever 

Brake  lever  catch 

Brake  lever  hook 

Brake  nut 

Brake  segment  rack 

Brake  shaft 

Brake  shaft  bearing ; 

Brake  shoe ' 

Brake  shoe  pins ! 

Brake  stud ! 

Brake  stud  bearing 

Chest  bottom  plates,  1  right,  1 

left. 

Chest  compartment 

Chest  floor  hoods ,  1  right ,  1  lcf t . . 

Chest  floor  stifieners 

Chest  intermediate  floor  plates  , 

1  right,  1  left. 


Same  as  on  forge  and  store  limber . 

Riveted  inside  rails 

Assembled  in  axle  bearings 

do 


Property 
classification. 


Sec- 
tion. 


In  brake-beam  guides . 


Riveted  to  side  rails. 


Assembled  in  guides 

....do 

....do 

On  brake  shaft 

Riveted  to  brake  cross  brace \\ 

Connects  side  rails  through  front  of 
chest. 

Riveted  to  brake  cross  brace 

On  right  end  of  brake  shaft 

Riveted  to  brake  lever 

....do 

Assembled  in  brake  beam 

Riveted  to  chest 

In  brake  shaft  bearing 

Riveted  to  brake  cross  brace 

Pinned  in  brake  shoe  bearings 

In  brake  shoes  and  bearings 

Screws  into  brake  nut 

Riveted  in  brake  beam 


All  rivited  toge.'her  to  form  chesi 


89 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS- Continued. 


Niim 

ber  in 

Num- 

1 bat- 

ber  in 

terv 

1  store 

wagon 

wagon. 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1  1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

4 

4 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

8 

8 

32 

32 

1 

8 

6 

6 

8 

8 

s 

8 

2 

4 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

4 

4 

1 

4 

2 

2 

I 

2 

t 

4 

4 

4 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

8 

t> 

4 

4 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1 



Name  of  part. 


Chest  lower  floor  plate 

Chest  lower  front  ends,  1  right ,  1 
left. 

Chest  partition 

Chest  rear  end 

Chest  rear  end  reinforce 

Chest  reinforce  strips 

Chest  sides,  1  right,  1  left 

Chest  top 

Chest  top  reinforces 

Chest  upper  floor  plate,  front . . . 

Chest  upper  floor  plates,  rear 

Chest  upper  front  end 

Chest  upper  front  end  reinforce . 
Chest  lower  doors,  complete,  in- 
cluding— 

Chest    lower    door    center 
hinges. 

Chest  lower  door  end  hinges 

( 'hest  lower  door  hasps 

Chest  lower  door  hinge  riv- 
ets. 

(  hest  lower  door  staples 

Door  handles 

Door-handle  reinforces 

Door-hinges ,  female 

Door  hinges,  male 

Door  hinge,  female,  reinforces. . . 

Door-nine  pins 

Fastening  nuts 

Fastening  washers 

Footrest 

Footrest  supports.  1  right,  1  left. 
Lid  props,  including— 

Eves 

Fillers 

Guides 

Reinforces 

Lock  bars 

Lock-bar  hinges,  front  and  rear. 
Lock-bar  hinge,  front,  reinforces. 
Lock-bur  hinge,  rear,  reinforces. 

Lock-bar  hinges,  top 

Lock-bar  hinge,  top.  rein; 

Lunette 

Lunette  bearing 

Lunette  pins 

Name  plate 

Padlocks,  with  chains 

Padlock  chain  rivets 

Prop  chains 

Prop-chain  guides 

Prop-chain  take-up 

Prop,  consisting  of— 

Prop-chain  clamps 

Prop  foot 

Prop  head 

Prop  legs 

Prop  pin 

Prop  hook 

Rear-door  casing 

Rear-door  frame 

Rear-door   hinge,    male,    rein- 
forces. 

Rear-door  hooks 

Rear-door  hook  pins 

Rear-door  hook  springs 

Rear-door  hook  support 

Rear-door  plate 

Rear-door  studs 

Side  rails,  1  right,  1  left 

Spare-pole  compartment  sides, 
1  right.  Heft. 

Spare-pole  fastening  bolts 

Spare-pole  fastening  bracket  — 


Property 
issifttfttioa 


Location,  etc. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


All  riveted  together  to  form  chest. 


Close  lower  compartments. 


Riveted  to  large  doors — 
Under  door  handle  rivets. 


On  spare  pole  fastening  bolts. 


Riveted  to  footrest  supports 

Riveted  to  upper  front  door  plate . 


Hold  door  in  open  position. 

Secure  doors 

Riveted  to  chest 

Inside  of  chest 

do 

Riveted  to  chest 

Inside  of  chest 

In  lunette  bearing 

A  t  front  end  of  rails 

Secure  lunette  in  bearing — 
Riveted  to  chest  rear  end.... 

Lock  doors 

Attach  chains  to  lock  bars. . . 
Hold  prop  in  folded  position. 
On  wheel  guard  cross  brace. . 


.«!«.. 


IV 


Riveted  or  pinned  together. 


Connects  prop  to  lunette  bearing. 

Joins  prop  chains 

Riveted  to  chest 

Riveted  to  rear  door  plate 

Inside  of  chest 


1 ' inned  in  supports 

I 'in  hooks  in  supports 

In  rear  door  hook  support. 
Riveted  to  chest  rear  end. 
Hinged  to  chest  rear  end. . 


Form  frame  of  wagon . 
Riveted  to  chest 


J  Support  large  end  of  poles 

Riveted    to   side    rails   near   lunette 
bracket. 


90 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS— Continued. 


Num-  | 
ber 

1  bat 

ten 

wagon. 


Num- 
ber in 
1  store 
wagon. 


Name  of  part. 


Spare-pole  fastening  bracket  re- 
inforce, lower. 

Spare-pole  fastening  bracket  re- 
inforce, upper. 

te  rest 


Spare-pole  rest  cover 

Spare-pole  support,  inner 

Spare-pole  support  outer 

Spare-pole  support  cover,  inner. 
Spare-pole  support  cover,  outer. 

Spare-wheel  casings 

Spare-wheel  fastenings,  lower, 
consisting  of— 
Lower  wheel-fastening  bolts. 
Lower  wheel  -  fastening 

guards,  inside. 
Lower  wheel  -  fastening 

guards,  outside. 
Lower  wheel-fastening  hasps 
Lower   wheel  -  fastening 

hinges. 
Lower  wheel  -  fastening 
hooks. 

Thongs 

Spare-wheel  fastenings,  upper, 
complete,  consisting  of— 
Upper  wheel-fastening  clips 
Upper  wheel-fastening  bars, 

2  right,  2  left. 
Upper  wheel  -  fastening 


Upper  wheel-fastening  nuts. 

Upper  wheel-fastening  pins. 

Upper  wheel-fastening  rein- 
forces, 2  right,  2  left. 

Upper  wheel-fastening  riv- 
ets. 

Upper  wheel-fastening  sock- 
ets, 2  right,  2  left. 

Upper  wheel-fastening  studs 

Upper  wheel-fastening  swing 
bolts. 

Wearing  plates 

Step 

Top-doorframes 

Top-door  hinge,  male,  reinforces. 

Top-door  plates 

Upper  front  door  frame 

Upper  front  door  hinges,  male 

Upper  front  door  plate 

Vise-handle  strap 

Weather  strips  (leather) 

Wheels 


Wheel  fastenings 

Wheel  guards 

Wheel  guard  cross  brace 

Wing  nuts 

Wing  nut  clasps 

Wing  nut  pins,  with— 

Washers 

Reinforces 

Left  packing,  consisting  of— 

Body 

Front  packing 

Lunette  transom  bushing  pack- 
ing, consisting  of— 

Back 

Bottom 

End  (left) 

Fnd  (right) 

Front 

Packing  "A" 


Location,  etc. 


Riveted  to  bracket. 
....do 


Riveted  to  spare-pole  compartment 
sides. 

Sewed  on  spare-pole  rest 

Riveted  together  to  spare-pole  com- 
partment sides. 

On  spare-pole  support 

Riveted  to  chest  sides 


Property 

lassineation. 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


Pinned  in  hinges. 
Riveted  to  chest . 


.do. 


Pinned  in  hinges 

Strap  outside  of  wheels. 

Riveted  to  chest  sides. . 

In  eye  of  hooks 


Nut  levers 

Strap  outside  of  wheel . 

Riveted  on  chest 


On  swing  bolts 

In  swing  bolts  and  hinges . 
Riveted  inside  of  chest 


Hinge  studs  to  bars . 
Riveted  on  chest. . . 


Screwed  into  sockets . 
Pinned  in  hinges 


Riveted  to  chest 

On  rear  of  wagon 

Riveted  to  top-door  plate 

Riveted  inside  of  chest 

Hinged  to  chest 

Riveted  to  upper  front  door  plate 

Riveted  to  chest 

Hinged  to  chest 

Secures  vise  handle 

Riveted  to  doors 

See  nomenclature  of  parts  of  6-inch 
howitzer  carriage,  model  of  1908. 

do 

Riveted  to  side  rails 

do 

Secure  lock  bars 

On  lock  bars 


V Riveted  to  chest 

JLeft  end,  upper  rear  compartment 


Right  rear  corner,  upper  rear  com  purl  ■ 
ment. 


Left  front  corner,  upper  rear  compart- 
ment. 


IV 


It* 

f    «         i    •s.         -.   ?!   £    5;      t!     <3 


91 


NOMENCLATURE  OF  PARTS- -< fcmtinu< -I. 


Num- 
ber in 
1  bat- 
tery 
wagon. 

1 
1 
1 
1 

Num- 
ber in 
1  store 
wagon. 

1 

Name  of  part. 


Location,  etc. 


Packing  "B,"  consisting  of— 

Body \ Through  middle,  upper  rear  compart- 

Steel  angle /    ment. 

Packing  "C" Between  end  of  chest  and  packing  "B,' 

Right  packing 


upper  rear  compartment. 
Right  middle,  upper  rear  eompart- 


Propert 


opera 

incatioi 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


Sparc  hub-liner  packing,  con- 
sist ing  of— 

Body 

Bottom 

Front-liner  packing  (middle) 

Front  liner  packing  ( upper 
and  lower). 

Front  (middle) 

Front  (upper  and  lower) 

Rear  liner 

Rear-liner  packing  (lower). . 

Rear-liner  packing  (middle). 

Rear-liner  packing  (upper)  . 

Rear(middle) 

Rear  (upper) 

Ribs 

Top 

Spare  pintle  and  lunette  pack- 
ing, consisting  of— 

center  piece 

End  (rear) 

Filler  cleat  (bottom) 

Filler  cleat  (left) 

Filler  cleats  (right) 

Lunette  blocks 

Outer  pieces 

Partitions 

Bide  (toft) 

Side(right) 


Left  rear  corner,  upper  rear  compart- 
ment . 


Right  end,  iip|M-r  rear  compartment. . 


DESCRIPTION    OF    THE     BATTERY    WAGON,    MODEL    OF    1908,    AND    STORE 
WAGON,    MODEL   OF    1908. 

[Plate  XVIII.) 

The  battery  wagon  is  a  rectangular  steel  box  on  wheels,  provided 
for  the  transport  of  battery  tools  and  supplies,  spare  parts  of  guns, 
carriages  and  harness,  materials  for  cleaning  and  preservation,  etc. 
The  store  wagon  is  exactly  similar  to  the  battery  wagon,  except  in 
such  minor  details  as  pertain  to  the  packing  of  various  pieces  of 
equipment. 

To  bring  the  center  of  gravity  as  low  as  possible,  the  axle  of  the 
battery  wagon  is  made  to  pass  through  the  chest. 

The  frame  consists  of  two  side  rails  of  channel  section,  with  flanges 
turning  inward  running  parallel  inside  the  sides  of  the  chest.  The 
rails  are  riveted  to  the  sides  of  the  chest,  fastened  to  the  axle  by  suit- 
able bearings,  and  are  joined  in  front  to  secure  the  bracket  for  the 
lunette,  the  latter  exactly  similar  to  that  on  the  connecting  pole  on 
the  caisson.  At  the  front  of  the  chest  the  brake  cross  brace  con- 
nects the  side  rails  and   at  the  proper  distance  from  the  lunette 


bracket  the  wheel  cross  brace  stiffens  the  frame  to  withstand  the 
impacts  of  the  limber  wheels  in  turning.  A  projection  cast  on  the 
underside  of  the  lunette  bracket  receives  the  hinge  pin  of  a  prop 
for  use  when  the  vehicle  is  unlimbered.  The  prop  is  formed  of  two 
steel  tubes,  united  at  the  lower  end  by  a  bronze  prop  foot  and  fit  the 
upper  end  by  the  prop  head.  When  not  in  use  the  prop  is  swung  up 
under  the  spare  poles  and  held  in  that  position  by  chains  leading 
from  the  prop  legs  through  guid&s  on  the  wheel  guard  cross  brace 
and  uniting  in  a  hook  which  is  engaged  over  one  of  the  buttonlike 
heads  of  the  lunette  pins. 

The  chest  is  built  up  of  flange  steel  plates  and  divided  into  10 
compartments  for  the  convenient  disposal  of  the  load.  A  vertical 
transverse  partition  divides  all  that  part  of  the  chest  above  the 
lower  flanges  of  the  side  rails  and  strengthens  the  chest  against 
stresses  resulting  from  lurching.  The  space  forward  of  this  transverse 
partition  is  floored  to  form  a  compartment  entered  through  a  flanged 
opening  in  the  top.  The  compartment  beneath  has  a  flanged  opening 
in  the  chest  front.  The  edges  of  these  doorways  are  reinforced  by 
steel  angles;  the  doors  are  metal  sheets  with  angle  flanges  faced 
with  leather  to  shed  rain  water. 

The  space  in  rear  of  the  transverse  partition  is  floored,  forming  a 
compartment  entered  from  the  top.  Underneath,  a  central  space 
with  door  in  the  chest  rear  accommodates  two  tool  boxes,  and  on 
each  side  of  this  are  two  shallow  compartments  for  small  articles, 
access  to  these  being  through  handholes  in  the  walls  of  the  tool-box 
recess. 

To  permit  the  transport  of  two  spare  pole  bodies  underneath  the 
frame,  that  portion  of  the  chest  below  the  side  rails  is  built  with 
compartments  on  each  side,  leaving  a  central  space.  In  this  the 
poles  are  supported  by  suitable  fastenings.  The  spare  poles  are 
carried  only  on  trie  battery  wagon.  The  lower  side  compartments 
are  entered  from  the  front,  and  may  also  be  reached  through  aper- 
tures in  the  floor  of  the  compartment  for  tool  boxes.  They  are 
provided  for  transporting  the  spare  counterrecoil  springs  of  the 
carriages,  which  will  occupy  three  of  the  four  compartments  of  the 
two  wagons.  In  the  fourth  may  be  carried  spare  sponge  staves, 
shovel  handles,  or  other  long  articles. 

The  doors  of  these  lower  compartments  are  hinged  and  fitted 
with  hasps  and  padlocks. 

The  forward  top  door  opens  from  the  front  and  the  rear  top  door 
from  the  rear;  that  on  the  chest  front  is  hinged  at  its  lower  edge  to 
open  downward  and  that  on  the  rear  of  the  chest  opens  upward  and 
is  held  in  the  open  position  by  latches  which  engage  studs  on  the 
door.  These  four  larger  doors  are  secured  by  lock  bars  with  chained 
padlocks.     Spring  wing-nut  clasps  on  the  lock  bars  hold  the  wing 


93 

nuts  in  place.  The  foot  rest  is  secured  to  the  upper  front  door, 
and  a  step  for  convenience  in  unloading  the  upper  rear  compart- 
ment is  attached  to  the  rear  of  the  chest. 

Upon  each  side  of  the  chest  are  provided  arrangements  for  carry- 
ing a  spare  wheel.  A  hole  in  the  side  of  the  chest  and  the  spa^g 
wheel  casing  riveted  around  this  hole  on  the  inside  of  the  client 
receives  the  inner  face  of  the  hub;  while  the  tire  and  felloe  are 
clnmped  to  the  side  by  four  wheel  fastenings.  Forged  steel  lugs  are 
riveted  to  the  chest  body  against  which  the  tire  of  the  spare  wheel 
rests.*  Heavy  metal  straps  are  hinged  to  these,  and  passing  outside 
the  tire  are  secured  in  the  lower  fastenings  by  hasps  to  wheel-fastening 
hooks  riveted  to  the  chest  and  in  the  upper  fixtures  by  swing  bolts 
with  lever  nuts.  To  bring  the  center  of  gravity  of  the  vehicle  as  low 
as  possible,  the  spare  wheel  is  so  placed  that  the  wagon  axle  passes 
between  its  spokes.  To  remove  a  wheel  from  the  fastenings,  there- 
fore, the  wagon  wheel  must  first  be  taken  off.  To  secure  proper 
clearance  between  the  spare  wheel  hub  and  the  spokes  of  the  wagon 
wheel,  the  spare  wheel  hub  cap  will  not  be  carried  on  the  spare 
wheel  but  in  the  battery-wagon  chest  and  a  special  spare  wheel  hub 
cover  put  in  its  place  to  protect  the  threads  of  the  hub  box  and 
exclude  dirt.  In  the  replacement  of  a  damaged  wheel  it  is  probable 
that  the  original  hub  cap  and  wheel  fastening  may  be  used. 

When  speed  is  especially  desirable  in  changing  wheels  the  battery- 
wagon  wheel  may  be  taken  to  replace  a  broken  one  on  a  carriage 
limber,  or  caisson,  and  the  spare  wheel  assembled  on  the  battery 
wagon  axle.  The  spare  wheel  fastening  will  fit  either  the  50-inch  or 
60-inch  spare  wheels.  As  issued  three  60-inch  and  one  50-inch 
[  spare  wheels  are  assembled  in  the  fastenings  of  the  two  wagon3. 

A  flange  steel  brake  beam  of  box  section  passes  through  the  side 
rails  forward  of  the  wheels  and  carries  at  each  end  a  forged  steel 
brake  shoe  bearing  with  renewable  cast-iron  shoes  to  bear  against 
the  tires.  The  side  rails  at  these  points  are  reinforced  by  bronze 
brake-beam  guides  riveted  on,  which  contain  spring  plungers  to 
force  the  beam  forward  and  away  from  the  wheels.  The  brake  is 
set  by  a  lever  on  the  right  side  of  the  chest,  which  operates  through 
the  brake  shaft,  brake  crank,  and  brake  connecting  rod  to  draw  the 
shoes  against  the  wheels.  The  brake  shoes  are  interchangeable  with 
those  of  the  carriage  and  caissons. 

A  strong  vise  is  fitted  to  the  right  side  rail  of  the  battery  wagon; 
it  may  be  dismounted  and  carried  in  the  chest  if  desired.  For  other 
articles  carried  see  list  of  equipment  to  follow. 

In  loading  a  battery  or  store  wagon  the  weight  must  be  so  dis- 
tributed as  to  bring  less  than  105  pounds  load  on  the  pintle  of  the 
limber,  as  more  will  tend  to  make  the  pole  of  the  limber  rise. 


94 

The  duplex  chain  block  should  be  packed  in  the  battery  wagon  so 
that  the  nested  galvanized  steel  water  buckets  may  be  inverted 
over  it. 

For  convenience,  the  various  compartments  in  the  battery  and 
store  wagons  are  lettered  and  items  in  the  tables  of  equipment 
marked  to  indicate  the  particular  compartment  in  which  they 
should  be  carried,  in  order  that  the  weight  at  the  pintle  may  be  that 
desired.     The  following  shows  the  lettering  of  the  compartments: 


Letter.      Position  of  compartment. 


A  Upper,  rear. 

B  Middle,  rear. 

C  \    Right,  rear,  upper. 
1 )  Right,  rear,  intermediate. 

E  Left,  rear,  upper. 

F  |    Left,  rear,  intermediate. 
G  Right,  lower. 

H  j    Left,  lower. 

J  !    Upper,  front. 
K  Intermediate,  front. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  SEVERAL  TOOLS  AND  ACCESSORIES  FOR  THE  BATTERY 

AND    STORE   WAGON. 

Four  chests  containing  tools  and  stores  are  carried  in  the  rear  com- 
partments of  the  two  wagons.  They  are  a  carpenter's  tool  chest,  a 
saddler's  chest,  a  chest  for  miscellaneous  spare  parts,  and  a  chest  for 
cleaning  materials  and  small  stores. 

The  carpenter's  chest  is  an  iron-bound  wooden  box  containing  an 
assortment  of  carpenter's  tools  so  arranged  that  each  tool  may  be 
taken  from  its  place  in  the  chest  without  removing  any  other.  The 
saddler's  chest  is  a  combined  tool  chest  and  stitching  horse.  For  the 
latter  purpose  the  chest  forming  the  seat  rests  upon  four  hinged  legs, 
cross  braced  to  each  other.  The  stitching  clamp  is  secured  in  a  socket 
on  one  end  of  the  chest,  while  the  door  swinging  open  on  the  left  side 
brings  the  tools  into  convenient  reach  of  the  saddler.  For  transpor- 
tation the  clamp  is  removed  from  its  seat  and  placed  within  the 
chest,  the  legs  are  folded  over  against  each  end  and  held  by  the  leg 
braces,  permitting  the  placing  of  the  chest  in  a  small  compartment. 
Both  the  carpenter's  and  saddler's  chests  are  provided  with  handles 
and  locks  and  have  sufficient  capacity  inside  to  take  a  canvas  bag  of 
small  stores  in  addition  to  the  articles  given  in  the  list  at  the  back  of 
this  book.  The  chest  for  cleaning  materials  is  a  wooden  box  with 
hinged  lid  containing  perishable  materials.  The  chest  for  miscella- 
neous spare  parts  holds  various  small  stores. 

One  chest  for  a  spare  breech  mechanism,  one  level  chest  containing 
a  testing  level,  and  one  chest  for  spare  sights  are  issued  to  each  battery; 
the  latter  contains  provisions  for  the  safe  packing  of  one  front  and  rear 
sight  complete,  one  panoramic  sight,  and  one  set  of  bore  sights. 


I! 


1' 


95 

CYCLOMETER. 

One  carriage  limber  in  each  battery  is  fitted  with  a  device  which 
registers  the  number  of  miles  traveled.  This  instrument,  called 
a  cyclometer,  is  mounted  on  the  Umber  axle  near  the  left  wheel,  and 
is  composed  of  a  star  wheel  and  shaft  actuating  a  train  of  gears, 
which  bring  figures  representing  0.1  mile  to  9,999.9  miles  before  a 
glass  window  in  the  usual  manner  of  such  meters. 

A  tally  pin  riveted,  to  the  wheel  hub  strikes  the  star  wheel  and 
moves  it  one  tooth  at  each  revolution  of  the  wheel. 

In  assembling  a  tally  pin  on  the  wheel  hub  two  0.312  (^)  inch 
rivet  holes  must  be  drilled  in  the  flange  of  the  hub  box  1.3  inches 
apart  and  0.55  inch  from  the  end  of  the  hub.  The  dowel  pinhole 
in  the  axle  locating  the  cyclometer  bracket  is  21.437  (21^)  inches 
from  the  center  line  of  the  limber,  2.437  (2^)  inches  from  the  shoul- 
der of  the  axle,  and  at  an  angle  of  16°  to  the  rear  of  a  vertical  plane 
through  the  center  line  of  the  axle. 

Nomenclature  of  cyclometer  parts: 

1  bracket. 

1  bracket  strap. 

2  bracket-strap  bolts. 

1  bracket  bolt  with  nut  and  split  pin. 

1  cover. 

4  cover  bolts  with  nuts  and  split  pins. 

1  stop. 

1  spring. 

1  tally  shaft. 

1  tally  pin. 

1  washer  (felt). 

1  counter. 

1  case  (for  counter). 

4  case  screws. 

PADLOCKS  AND  BOLT  SNAPS. 

The  padlocks  furnished  for  each  separate  vehicle,  as  carriage,  forge 
limber,  battery  wagon,  store  limber,  or  store  wagon,  excepting  the 
limbers  and  caissons,  will  have  keys  interchangeable  for  all  locks  of 
that  particular  vehicle  but  differing  from  all  others. 

Limbers  and  caissons  are  furnished  with  a  lock,  marked  ''AMMU- 
NITION," which  has  only  one  key,  these  being  universally  inter- 
changeable. 

Bolt  snaps  for  temporarily  securing  doors,  etc.,  occur  where  no 
shot  bolts  are  provided. 

THE    ARTILLERY    HARNESS. 

The  component  parts  of  the  artillery  harness  are  given  in  the  table 
following.     Plate  XIX  shows  the  harness  for  the  off-wheel  and  off- 
lead  horses.    The  nomenclature  corresponding  to  the  numbers  in  the 
plate  will  be  found  in  the  table. 
10161—17 9* 


96 


No.  in 
plate. 


1-4 

1 
2 
I 

4 


8,8 


9 
2-7 


3 

7 

4 

10-19 

10 
11 
12 
18 
19 
13 
14 
16 
17 


10 
11 
13 

18 
14 
16 
45 
20 
21 
40 
22,23 


23 

24,25 

24 

25 

26,33 

27 

15 

28 

29,42 


Component  parts. 


34 

35 


Backstrap  and  crupper,  complete 

Consisting  of— 

Body  and  hip  straps 

Crupper  dock 

Loin  strap 

Trace  loops 

Backstrap  hook 

Belly  band,  complete 

Consisting  of— 

Belly  band 

Holding-down  strap 

Holding-down  strap  loop 

Breast  strap,  complete 

Consisting  of— 

Breast  strap 

Breast-strap  hooks 

Breeching,  complete 

Consisting  of— 

Backstrap(l)  and  hip  straps(4) 

Body 

Crupper  dock 

Backstrap  hook. 

Side-strap  hooks 

Loin  strap 

Side  straps 

Trace  loops 

Bridle,  complete  (old  model) 

Consisting  of— 

Brow  band 

Brow-band  ornaments 

Cheek  pieces 

Coupling  strap 

Connecting  strap 

Crown  piece 

Snaffle  bits  > 

Reins  (pairs) 

Throat  latch 

Bridle,  complete  (new  model) 

Consisting  of— 

Brow  band 

Brow-band  ornaments 

Crown  piece 

Coupling  strap 

Snaffle  bit  i 

Reins 

Crown-piece  strap 

Collar,  steel 

Hame  tug  (part  of  collar). 

Collar  strap 

Halter,  complete 

Consisting  of— 

Crown  strap 

Cheek  piece 

Crown  chape 

Nose  band 

Chin  strap 

Throat  band 

Throat  strap 

Halter  square 

Tie  rope 

Martingale,  complete 

Consisting  of— 

Martingale 

Cincha  strap 

Saddle,  complete 

Consisting  of— 

Cinchas  with  reinforces  and  loops 

Cinchas  without  reinforces  and  loops. 

Lead  rein  roller  and  strap 

Quarter  straps,  including  rings,  safes, 
and  cincha  straps  (side) 

Quarter  strap,  cantle. 


Quarter  strap,  pommel 

Coat  strap,  33-inch  (pommel) . 
Coat  strap,  45-inch  (cantle) . . . 

Coat  strap,  60-inch 

Saddletree,  leather  covered . . . 

Stirrups  (nickel  steel) 

Stirrup  straps 

Saddlebags,  pairs 

Saddlebag  side  straps 


Wheel. 


Near        Off 
horse,     horse. 


Lead. 

rrope 
classifies 

Near 
horse. 

Off 
horse. 

Class. 

1 

1 
1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

4 

4 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

i* 

1 

! 

2 

2 

2 

2 
1 

1 

1 
1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

IV 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

'"l 

i" 

1 

1 



1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

3 


2 

1 
2 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 
2 

»  Twenty  curb  bits  with  chains  are  issued  for  use  in  place  of  snaffle  bit  on  fractious  draft  horses. 


97 

No.  in 

Component  parts. 

Wheel. 

Lead. 

Property 
classification. 

plat*. 

Near        Off 
horse,     horse. 

Near 
horse. 

Off 
horse. 

Class. 

Sec- 
tion. 

36 

Traces,  lead,  model  of  1908 

2 

2 

IV 

Consisting  of— 

3  links 

1  toggle 

2  filler  pieces 

37 

Traces,  wheel,  model  of  1908 

2 

Consisting  of— 

1  trace  body 

8 

2  links 

2  chains 

2  filler  pieces 

1  Mogul  spring,  assembled - 

38 

1  locking  strap 

39 

Trace  chains .... 

2 

2 

1 

2 

i" 

' 

41 

Blanket  1 

1 

1 

1  In  submitting  requisitions  and  in  filling  requisitions,  unless  it  is  specifically  stated  that  saddle  blankets 
•re  wanted,  these  articles  will  not  be  included. 

STEEL   COLLARS. 


8IZES   AND    DIRECTIONS    FOR   FITTING. 

Steel  collars  are  made  in  the  following  sizes:  2A,  2B,  4A,  4B,  5,  5A, 
5B,  6,  6A,  6B,  7,  7A,  7B,  and  8A.  The  number  and  shape  of  the  col- 
lar are  stamped  on  the  front  side  under  the  extension  bolt.  The  A 
and  B  shapes  have  straighter  sides  than  the  numbers  without  letters. 
When  issued  with  harness,  unless  otherwise  ordered,  20  per  cent  of 
the  collars  are  No.  4A,  30  per  cent  No.  5,  40  per  cent  No.  5A,  and  10 
per  cent  No.  6.  In  requisitions,  the  size  of  collars  desired  should  be 
given. 

The  steel  collar  pads  are  made  in  seven  different  sizes:  No.  0  is 
4  inches  wide,  No.  1  is  4.5  inches  wide,  No.  2  is  5  inches  wide,  etc.,  to 
No.  6,  which  is  7  inches  wide.  The  pad  connections  are  also  fur- 
nished in  seven  sizes,  from  No.  0  to  No.  6.  For  the  plain  number  of 
collar  (5,  6,  or  7),  the  regular  adjustment  requires  a  pad  connection 
of  the  same  number  as  the  pad.  The  A  and  B  shapes  have  straighter 
sides  and  take  a  pad  connection  two  sizes  larger  than  the  pad — that 
is,  it  would  take  a  No.  3  connection  with  a  No.  1  pad,  etc.,  for  the 
regular  adjustment  in  these  shapes.  When  the  collar  is  very  wide 
at  the  top  and  narrow  at  the  bottom,  the  size  of  the  pad  connection 
must  be  increased  one  or  two  numbers  to  allow  the  collar  to  close 


98 

easily  at  the  bottom.  In  the  reverse  case  a  smaller  pad  connection 
should  be  used.  The  collar  pads  are  numbered  on  the  front  inner 
side.  The  pad  connections  are  numbered  on  the  side  having  the 
round  holes,  which  side  must  be  kept  to  the  front  on  the  collar.  In 
requisitions  for  collar  pads  and  pad  connections  the  sizes  desired 
must  be  stated. 

The  buckle  is  made  in  two  sizes.  No.  2  is  1  inch  longer  than  No. 
1  and  is  used  with  the  larger  sizes  of  collar  pads. 

The  correct  adjustment  and  fitting  of  collars  is  of  the  utmost  impor- 
tance. The  variety  of  sizes  and  shapes  of  collars,  pads,  pad  connec- 
tions, and  buckles  issued  by  the  Ordnance  Department  is  sufficient 
to  enable  any  horse  to  be  correctly  fitted.  Efficient  supervision  by 
officers  of  the  fitting  of  collars  and  of  the  adjustment  of  the  point  of 
draft  (trace  plate)  is  required  to  secure  proper  results. 

TABLE  OF  DIMENSIONS. 


Size  of  collar  fitted  with  No.  3  pads. 


Number  of  collar.      r  ._„tVl  nt\  Width  6 
l^engin  01      inpy,p<5 

slde-     J  from  top, 


Inches. 

2A 18 

2B 18 

4A 19* 

4B 19* 

5 21 

5A 21 

5B 21 

6 22* 

6A 22| 

6B 22* 

7 24 

7A 24 

7B 24 

8A 25* 


Inches. 
61 

3 


M 


Width  8 
inches 
down 

from  top. 


Inches. 
g! 

71 


Width  at 
draft. 


Inches. 

8 

1 


Size  of  collar  fitted  with  No.  1  pads. 


Length  of 
collar  in- 
side. 


Inches. 
16* 
16* 


10 


10 

n 


18 

18 

19* 

19* 

19} 

21 

21 

21 

22* 

22* 

22* 

24 


Width  6 
inches 
down 

from  top. 


Width  8 
inches- 
down 

from  top. 


Inches 

a 

6i 

5f 

55 


Inches. 
51 
51 

6* 

5J 
7* 


Width  at 
draft. 


Inches. 


The  table  of  dimensions  gives  the  largest  and  smallest  size  that  each 
collar  can  be  made  with  the  No.  3  and  No.  1  pads.  Adding  one-half 
inch  in  length  and  width  to  the  smallest  dimensions  given  in  the 
table  will  give  the  size  of  the  collars  when  fitted  with  the  No.  2  pads. 
These  examples  are  given  to  show  the  three  regular  adjustments  in 
each  size  of  collar,  but  these  dimensions  can  be  varied  to  suit  the 
different  shapes  of  necks.  The  largest  pad  can  be  put  in  the  top  of 
the  collar  and  the  bottom  taken  in  to  its  smallest  dimensions,  or  the 
smallest  pad  can  be  put  in  the  top  and  the  bottom  left  out.  While 
each  collar  can  be  lengthened  or  shortened  and  taken  in  or  let  out 
at  the  bottom  by  means  of  the  adjustments  provided,  the  width  at 
the  top  can  not  be  changed  without  using  a  larger  or  smaller  pad. 

In  fitting  irregular  shapes  rione  of  the  connections  may  give  just 
the  proper  tension  on  the  pad.     In  such  a  case  use  the  one  that  cornel 


PLATE    XXl. 


99 

nearest  and  straighten  or  bend  the  extension  at  the  top.  When  the 
collar  requires  to  be  widened  at  top  to  relieve  the  pressure  on  the  pad 
and  make  it  lock  easily  at  the  bottom,  open  the  collar  wide  and  place 
a  round  piece  of  hard  wood  or  iron,  1  inch  in  diameter  and  2  inches 
long,  between  the  connection  and  collar  side  close  up  to  the  hinge, 
then  press  the  sides  together  and  bend  both  sides  alike,  so  that  they 
will  be  the  same  length  at  the  bottom.  Do  not  let  the  fulcrum  rest 
on  the  pad,  for  it  will  bend  it.  If  the  collar  sides  require  straighten- 
ing to  close  them  tighter  on  the  pad  and  give  more  tension  on  the 
latch  at  the  bottom,  open  the  collar  at  the  bottom,  hook  the  wrench 
over  the  top  of  collar  side,  and  press  down  the  lever,  treating  both 
sides  alike.  Both  of  these  operations  can  be  performed  with  the  collar 
put  together. 

Parts  furnished  for  the  repair  of  the  collars,  with  the  correct  names 
of  the  parts,  are  shown  on  plate  XX. 

Canvas  collar  pads  are  not  part  of  the  artillery  harness,  but  are 
furnished  upon  requisition.  They  are  made  in  sizes  Nos.  2,  3,  4,  5, 
and  6,  as  called  for;  if  no  size  is  called  for  they  are  made  in  equal 
proportions  of  Nos.  4,  5,  and  6. 

COLLAR-LIFTING    DEVICE. 

(Plate  XXI.] 

This  is  a  simple  device  for  lifting  the  steel  collar  from  the  horse's 
neck,  when,  for  any  reason,  the  neck  becomes  sore.  The  straps 
securing  it  to  the  hame  tugs  afford  easy  attachment  to  or  removal 
from  the  collar.  By  supporting  the  collar  by  canvas  pads  in  front 
and  in  rear  of  the  collar  the  pressure  is  removed  from  the  surface 
of  the  neck  directly  beneath  the  collar  and  the  weight  is  more  evenly 
distributed  along  the  neck. 

In  case  of  necessity,  such  a  device,  made  by  the  organization  me- 
chanic, will  allow  working  a  horse  when  suffering  with  a  sore  neck. 

THE  CARE  AND  PRESERVATION  OF  LEATHER. 

Attention  is  invited  to  the  following: 

"It  is  forbidden  to  use  any  dressing  or  polishing  material  on  the 
leather  accouterments  or  equipments  of  the  soldier,  the  horse  equip- 
ments for  cavalry,  or  the  artillery  harness  except  the  preparations 
supplied  by  the  Ordnance  Department  for  that  purpose."  (A.  R. 
293  of  1913.) 

REASON   FOR   OILING   LEATHER. 

Leather,  as  it  comes  from  the  tannery  in  manufacture,  is  hard, 
rough,  brittle,  inflexible,  and  readily  absorbs  water.  To  remove 
these  undesirable  qualities  and  render  the  leather  soft,  pliable, 
flexible,   and   impervious   to  water,   to   increase  the  strength   and 


100 

toughnoss  of  the  fiber,  and  to  give  the  leather  such  a  surface  color 
and  finish  as  will  make  it  most  sightly  and  suitable  for  the  purpose 
for  which  intended,  the  manufacture  is  continued  by  hand  stuffing 
it  with  a  dubbing  made  of  pure  cod-liver  oil  and  tallow,  which  the 
experience  of  curriers  has  shown  to  be  the  best  material  for  this 
purpose.  This  dubbing  is  thoroughly  absorbed  by  the  leather, 
penetrating  it  completely,  and  is  not  merely  limited  to  the  surface. 
The  russet  leather  now  used  by  the  Ordnance  Department  in  the 
manufacture  of  all  leather  equipments  is  pure  oak  tanned,  of  No.  1 
tannage  and  finish,  hand  stuffed  with  a  light  dubbing  made  of  pure 
cod-liver  oil  and  tallow  to  preserve  the  leather,  the  dubbing  being 
so  sparingly  used  that  the  oil  will  not  exude.  This  leather  as  it 
comes  from  the  manufacturer  contains  enough  oil  to  materially 
improve  its  quality  and  prolong  its  fife,  but  not  enough  oil  to  soil  the 
clothing  if  the  equipment  is  properly  cared  for.  No  oil  whatever 
is  added  to  the  leather  in  the  manufacture  of  the  equipments  at  the 
Government  arsenals. 

CARE    OF   RUSSET    LEATHER. 

Leather  equipments  which  have  become  wet  should  be  dried  in 
the  shade.  Wet  leather  exposed  to  the  direct  rays  of  the  sun  or  to 
the  heat  of  a  stove  or  radiators  becomes  hard  and  brittle. 

When  russet-leather  equipments  become  soiled  in  service  they 
should  be  cleaned  by  carefully  washing  the  leather  with  a  sponge 
moistened  with  a  heavy  lather  made  of  clean  water  and  Castile  or 
Frank  Miller's  soap,  and  then  rubbing  vigorously  with  a  dry  cloth 
until  the  leather  is  completely  dry. 

If  the  leather  becomes  harsh,  dry,  and  brittle  from  exposure  to 
water  or  other  causes,  clean  as  above  described,  and  while  the  leather 
is  still  slightly  moist  apply  an  exceedingly  light  coat  of  neat's-foot 
oil  by  rubbing  with  a  soft  cloth  moistened  (not  saturated)  with  the 
oil.  If  it  is  found  that  too  much  oil  has  been  used,  the  surplus  can 
be  readily  removed  by  rubbing  with  a  sponge  moistened  with  naphtha 
or  gasoline.     But  these  oils  are  not  issued  for  this  purpose. 

Where  a  polish  is  desired,  the  leather  should  first  be  thoroughly 
cleaned  and  then  the  leather  polish  or  dressing  supplied  by  the 
Ordnance  Department  should  be  applied  sparingly  and  thoroughly 
rubbed  in  with  a  soft,  dry  cloth.  Scars,  cuts,  or  abrasions  of  the 
leather  may  be  improved  in  appearance  but  not  obliterated  by 
similar  use  of  the  leather  polish. 

Russet  leather  may  be  cleaned,  oiled,  and  polished  as  described 
above,  but  it  should  be  noted  that  if  more  than  a  light  coat  of  oil  be 
given  the  leather  will  be  greatly  darkened  and  will  quickly  soil  the 
clothing.  No  method  of  cleaning  will  restore  the  original  light  color 
of  the  leather  or  remove  stains  or  discolorations. 


101 


CARE    OF   BLACK    LEATHER.' 


To  clean  and  dress  black  leather,  wash  it  in  water  (lukewarm  pre- 
ferred) with  Castile  soap.  An  old  horse  brush  will  be  found  very 
satisfactory  for  applying  the  soap  and  water.  Dry  in  the  shade; 
when  almost  dry,  apply  the  blacking,  rubbing  it  in  thoroughly. 

Dry  in  the  shade  and  then  apply  neat's-foot  oil  with  a  sponge  or 
rag,  rubbing  in  well  until  the  leather  is  soft  and  pliable. 

When  dry,  a  certain  amount  of  oil  and  blacking  will  exude  from 
the  leather;  this  should  be  rubbed  off  with  a  dry  cloth. 

SIGHTS    AND    QUADRANTS. 

The  instruments  provided  for  sighting  and  laying  the  piece  include 
a  line  sight,  a  rear  sight,  a  front  sight,  a  panoramic  sight,  and  a  range 
quadrant. 

LINE    SIGHT. 

The  line  sight  consists  of  a  conical  point  as  a  front  sight  and  a  V 
notch  as  a  rear  sight;  the  former  is  screwed  into  the  locking  hoop  and 
the  latter  is  attached  to  the  breech  end  of  the  jacket;  together  they 
determine  a  line  of  sight  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  bore,  useful  in 
giving  general  direction  to  the  gun. 

FRONT   AND    KKAR   SIGHTS. 

The  front  and  rear  sights  are  for  general  use  in  direct  aiming. 
They  consist  of  a  front  sight  carrying  cross  wires  and  a  rear  sight  of 
the  peep  variety.  The  length  of  the  lino  of  sight  is  36.75  inches;  its 
height  from  the  ground  with  gun  at  0°  elevation  is  53.5  inches.  The 
sights  are  supported  from  the  cradle;  the  peep  of  the  rear  sight  is  in 
such  a  position  as  to  come  opposite  the  eye  of  the  gunner  seated  upon 
the  left  trail  seat. 

THE    FRONT   8IGHT. 

The  front  sight  complete  consists  of  the  front  sight  proper,  the 
front-sight  holder,  the  front-sight  bracket  sleeve,  the  front-sight 
bracket  with  spring  catch  riveted  on,  and  two  split  pins;  that  is,  it 
includes  all  parts  except  the  front-sight  bracket  support. 

The  support  for  the  front-sight  bracket  is  riveted  to  the  cradle  in 
front  of  the  shield.  The  lowor  end  of  the  bracket  fits  into  a  socket 
in  the  bracket  support.  In  sighting  position  the  bracket  projects 
from  the  cradle  to  the  left,  but  for  traveling  it  is  arranged  so  that  it 
may  be  swung  toward  the  cradle  to  prevent  its  being  injured.  It  is 
held  in  either  position  by  the  engagement  of  the  spring  catch  in 
notches  in  the  support  socket. 

The  front  sight  proper  consists  of  a  pair  of  cross  wires  mounted  in 
a  ring.     This  ring  is  secured,  with  cross  wires  at  an  angle  of  45°  to  the 


102 

horizontal,  in  the  circular  hole  through  the  front-sight  holder.  The 
sight  holder  has  the  shape  of  an  eyebolt;  its  shank  screws  into  the 
top  of  the  front-sight  bracket  sleeve,  which  screws  over  the  upper  end 
of  the  sight  bracket.  When  adjusted,  rotation  of  the  sight  holder 
in  sleeve  or  of  sleeve  on  bracket  is  prevented  by  split  pins. 

THE    REAR   SIGHT. 
[Plate  XXII.] 

The  rear  sight  includes  all  parts  except  the  rear-sight  bracket  sup- 
port and  the  panoramic  sight.  The  rear-sight  bracket  support  is 
riveted  to  the  cradle  and  has  a  socket  into  which  the  lower  end  of  the 
bracket  is  secured  by  a  nut,  lock  nut,  and  split  pin.  The  upper  end 
of  the  sight  bracket  is  provided  with  circular  guides  cut  with  the  line 
of  sight,  gun  at  0°  elevation,  as  an  axis,  and  upon  these  guides  a 
socket  for  the  shank  or  stem  of  the  sight  is  mounted.  In  a  support 
forming  part  of  the  shank  socket  is  a  leveling  screw  with  threads 
engaging  the  segment  of  a  worm  wheel  cut  upon  the  bracket  guides. 
A  spirit  level  is  mounted  upon  the  shank  socket.  This  arrangement 
enables  correction  to  be  made  for  difference  of  level  of  wheels,  since 
turning  the  leveling  screw  revolves  the  shank  socket  and  with  it  the 
sight  shank  about  an  axis  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  bore.  A  shank- 
socket  cover  is  provided  to  strengthen  the  shank  socket.  The  latest 
type  of  shank  socket  is  made  of  bronze  and  the  leveling-screw  support 
is  made  integral  with  it.  The  cover  has  two  lugs  on  its  inner  surface 
which  support  springs  and  shoes.  These  shoes  are  pressed  by  the 
springs  against  the  shank  and  force  it  against  the  walls  of  the  shank 
socket,  thus  taking  up  lost  motion. 

The  sight  shank  consists  of  a  steel  arc  whose  center  is  the  front 
sight;  it  slides  in  guides  in  the  shank  socket  and  is  moved  up  and 
down  in  elevation  by  a  scroll  gear  seated  in  a  boss  upon  the  shank 
socket  and  engaging  in  a  rack  cut  upon  the  right  face  of  the  sight 
shank.  A  German-silver  sight-range  strip  fits  in  a  dovetail  seat  cut 
in  the  rear  face  of  the  sight  shank,  the  index  for  the  scale  being 
placed  upon  the  upper  rear  corner  of  the  shank  socket.  The  strip  is 
graduated  in  yards  up  to  9,400;  the  smallest  division  is  50  yards, 
but  smaller  subdivisions  may  readily  be  made  with  the  eye.  The 
scroll  gear  is  held  in  mesh  with  the  rack  on  the  shank  by  the  scroll- 
gear  spring.  Large  movements  of  the  shank  may  be  made  by  pulling 
the  scroll-gear  handle  out  far  enough  to  disengage  the  scroll  gear 
from  the  rack  and  then  sliding  the  sight  shank  through  the  shank 
socket  by  hand. 

To  the  left  side  of  the  shank  is  riveted  the  elevation-level  holder, 
and  in  this  holder  is  mounted  a  spirit  level  with  axis  parallel  to  the 
line  joining  the  peep  and  front  sights.  This  level  enables  quadrant 
elevations  to  be  given  by  setting  the  sight  at  the  desired  range  and 


103 

moving  the  gun  in  elevation  until  the  level  bubble  is  brought  to  the 
center.  It  would  give  the  correct  elevation  for  the  range,  provided 
the  target  and  gun  were  on  the  same  level. 

The  shank  is  fashioned  into  a  deflection  guide  and  mounting  for 
the  peep  sight  and  is  prolonged  upward  to  form  a  support  for  the 
panoramic  sight.  The  peep-sight  guide  is  located  in  a  transverse 
opening  in  the  shank  and  is  perpendicular  to  the  shank  and  to  the 
line  of  sight.  The  peep-sight  is  clipped  to  this  guide  and  is  traversed 
along  it  by  the  peep  sight  screw.  The  latter  passes  through  a  tapped 
hole  in  the  peep  sight  and  is  supported  at  each  end  in  bearings  in  the 
shank.  The  screw  is  turned  by  a  knurled  head  at  its  left  end. 
:  The  deflection  scale  is  attached  to  the  rear  face  of  the  peep-sight 
guide  and  the  index  for  the  scale  is  on  the  peep  sight.  The  gradua- 
tions are  in  mils.  There  are  45  mils  upon  each  side  of  the  zero,  and 
the  scale  is  marked  from  left  to  right  as  follows: 

40         30         20         10         0         90         80         70         60 

the  actual  mils  being — 

40         30         20         10         0    6,390    6,380    6,370    6,360 

thus  making  deflection  readings  on  this  sight  uniform  with  those 
of  the  panoramic  sight  and  the  battery  commander's  telescope.  The 
scale  allows  for  longitudinal  adjustment. 

The  seat  for  the  panoramic  sight  is  a  vertical  T  slot  into  which 
the  guide  lug  of  the  panoramic  sight  fits.  The  panoramic  sight  is 
held  in  place  and  all  wear  of  the  parts  is  taken  up  by  a  clamp  screw, 
ratchet,  and  detent. 

In  firing,  the  sight  is  left  in  its  seat. 


[Plate  XXIII.] 

The  panoramic  sight  is  a  vertical  teleseope  so  fitted  with  reflecting 
prisms  that  the  gunner  with  his  eye  at  the  eyepiece,  which  is  fixed  in 
a  horizontal  position,  may  bring  into  the  field  of  view  an  object 
situated  at  any  point  in  a  plane  perpendicular  to*  the  axis  of  the 
telescope. 

The  details  of  the  optical  part  of  this  instrument  are  shown  in 
plate,  and  comprise  the  rotating  head  prism  A,  the  rotating  prism  B, 
the  objective  lens  C,  the  lower  reflecting  prism  D,  and  the  eyepiece 
E.  The  rays  coming  from  the  object  are  reflected  downward  from 
the  prism  A  into  the  prism  B,  which  rectifies  them;  after  their  passage 
through  the  objective  lens  C,  the  prism  D  reflects  them  in  such  a  way 
that  there  is  presented  to  the  eyepiece  E,  a  rectified  image,  which 
the  eyepiece  magnifies.     The  prism  B,  is  of  rectangular  cross  section. 


104 

Its  peculiarity  is  that  on  rotation  about  its  longitudinal  axis  the 
image  of  an  object  seen  through  it  turns  with  twice  the  angular 
velocity  of  the  prism.  As,  therefore,  the  prisms  A  and  B  are  so 
mounted  as  to  rotate  about  this  axis,  prism  B  following  A  with  one- 
half  of  the  angular  velocity  of  the  latter,  the  image  always  remains 
as  it  would  appear  to  one  observing  it  directly  with  an  ordinary 
terrestrial  telescope. 

The  image  formed  by  the  objective  lens,  would  naturally  be  re- 
versed and  inverted.  The  lower  inclined  faces  of  the  prism  D  by 
cross  reflection  transfer  the  rays  to  the  opposite  sides  of  the  axis, 
thus  correcting  the  reversal.  The  correction  of  the  inversion  is 
accomplished  by  the  combined  action  of  the  three  prisms  A,  B,  and 
D,  the  nature  of  the  action  varying  with  the  different  positions  of 
the  prisms.  In  the  position  shown  on  plate  prisms  A  and  D  act  as 
parallel  reflectors,  and  they  without  the  lens  system  would  present 
an  erect  image.  Prism  B,  however,  inverts  the  rays  and  corrects 
the  inversion  produced  by  the  objective  lens.  It  will  be  noted  the 
effect  would  be  the  same  whether  the  prism  B  occupies  the  position 
shown  on  the  plate  or  be  revolved  180°  from  that  position.  This 
latter  position  is  the  one  it  would  assume  if  the  prism  A  were  rotated 
through  360°.  If  the  prism  A  be  now  rotated  through  180°  the  prism 
A  and  D  would  form  two  reflectors  set  at  right  angles  and  would 
give,  without  the  lens  system  an  inverted  image,  and  in  conjunction 
with  the  lens  system  an  erect  image.  Prism  B  in  this  case  will  occupy 
a  position  90°  from  that  shown  on  the  plate,  in  which  position  it 
causes  no  inversion,  but  counteracts  the  inversion  produced  by  the 
prism  D. 

A  glass  reticule  marked  with  cross  lines  is  located  in  the  focal  plane 
of  the  instrument,  with  the  intersection  of  the  cross  lines  coincident 
with  its  optical  axis.  No  provision  is  made  for  changing  the  focus 
of  the  eyepiece  or  objective  lens.  As  issued,  the  instrument  is 
focused  for  the  usual  range  and  the  average  eye.  The  magnifying 
power  of  the  instrument  is  four;  the  field  of  view  is  10°. 

The  mechanical  construction  of  the  instrument  is  as  follows: 
The  body  consists  of  a  shank,  provided  on  its  front  surface  with  a 
T  lug  which  fits  into  a  corresponding  slot  in  the  head  of  the  sight 
shank  and  is  held  in  that  position  on  sights  by  a  detent,  ratchet,  and 
clamp  screw.  To  the  lower  end  of  the  body  is  screwed  the  eyepiece 
elbow,  forming  a  housing  for  the  prism  D  and  the  eyepiece  E.  The 
latter  projects  to  the  rear  just  above  the  peep  of  the  rear  sight.  To 
the  upper  end  of  the  shank  is  screwed  the  azimuth  circle  support,  to 
which  is  screwed  the  hood  for  the  azimuth  circle,  forming  a  seat  for 
the  rotating  mechanism  of  the  sight.  The  opening  in  the  rotating 
head  is  closed  by  the  rotating  head  glass  window  which  forms  a  dust 
guard.     The  rotating  head  prism  A  is  mounted  opposite  this  opening. 


105 

The  lower  end  of  the  rotating  head  is  seated  in  the  azimuth  circle  hub 
and  gear.  A  worm  located  in  worm  box  in  the  hood  for  azimuth  circle 
engages  in  a  worm  gear  cut  on  the  azimuth  circle. 

The  worm  is  pivoted  at  its  rear  end  in  the  worm  box  by  a  ball  and 
socket  bearing.  This  bearing  consists  of  the  bearing  socket  worm 
ball,  and  bearing  cap. 

The  worm-throw-out  mechanism  consists  of  the  draw  pin,  draw- 
pin  spring,  spring-retaining  nut,  and  lever. 

The  rotating  prism  B  is  secured  in  the  upper  end  and  the  objective 
C  in  the  lower  end  of  the  supporting  sleeve  for  rotating  prism  resting 
in  the  hub  and  gear.  The  upper  end  of  this  supporting  sleeve  for 
the  rotating  prism  and  the  lower  end  of  the  azimuth  circle  have 
gears  which  engage  in  a  double  pinion  seated  in  the  azimuth  circle 
support.  The  gears  and  pinions  are  calculated  so  that  the  angular 
velocity  of  the  rotating  head  is  twice  that  of  the  rotating  prism  B, 
and  is  in  the  same  direction.  The  motion  of  rotation  is  transmitted 
from  the  worm  to  the  azimuth  circle,  thence  to  the  azimuth  circle 
hub  and  gear,  thence  to  the  pinion  and  through  it  to  the  supporting 
sleeve  for  rotating  prism.  The  amount  of  motion  of  the  rotating 
head  prism  is  indicated  by  a  graduated  scale  on  the  perimeter  of 
the  azimuth  circle,  visible  through  the  glass  azimuth  window  in  the 
rear  face  of  the  hood  for  the  azimuth  circle. 

The  zero  of  the  scale  and  the  index  on  the  headpiece  are  located 
so  that  the  line  of  sight  of  the  panoramic  sight  is  parallel  to  that  of 
the  rear  sight,  and  consequently  to  the  axis  of  the  gun,  when  both 
sights  are  set  at  0  elevation  and  deflection. 

The  scale  is  formed  by  dividing  the  circumference  into  64  equal 
parts.  One  complete  turn  of  the  worm  moves  the  rotating  head 
prism  through  one  of  these  divisions,  or  ^  of  a  circle.  The  rear  end 
of  the  worm  carries  the  azimuth  micrometer  knob  with  circum- 
ference graduated  into  100  equal  parts  to  form  a  micrometer  scale. 
One  of  these  subdivisions,  therefore,  equals  -yfo  of  a  division  of  the 
main  scale,  or  marks  a  movement  of  the  rotating  head  prism  and  line 
of  sight  through  ^^  of  a  circle.  An  angular  movement  of  the  line 
of  sight  through  ^Vff  °f  a  circle  corresponds  very  closely  to  a  lateral 
displacement  of  y^  of  the  range.  Practically,  the  subdivisions  of 
the  deflection  scale  on  the  panoramic  sight  are  considered  as  points 
equal  to  t^  of  the  range  and  are  called  milliemes  or  mils.  . 

The  reading  of  the  deflection  scale  or  the  size  of  an  angle  is  given 
in  units  of  the  micrometer  scale  as  2763,  1521,  etc.,  meaning  %%%% 
mi,  etc.,  of  360°.  The  alternate  divisions  of  the  main  scale  are 
numbered  in  a  clockwise  direction  0,  2,  4,  etc.,  to  62,  inclusive.  In 
reading  the  deflection  scale,  therefore,  hundreds  are  read  directly 
from  the  main  scales  and  tens  and  units  from  the  deflection-screw 


106 

micrometer  scale.  At  0  the  line  of  sight  is  parallel  to  the  vertical 
plane  through  the  axis  of  the  gun;  at  16  (or  1,600  mils)  it  is  perpen- 
dicular to  that  plane  and  pointing  directly  to  the  right,  etc. 

The  azimuth  micrometer  knob  is  screwed  on  the  rear  end  of  the 
worm  by  a  locking  screw.  This  arrangement  permits  the  0  of  the 
scale  to  be  set  opposite  the  index  line  on  the  azimuth  micrometer 
index  without  movement  of  the  worm  in  adjusting  the  sight . 

The  worm  which  is  seated  at  its  front  end  in  the  draw  pin  is  held 
in  contact  with  the  worm  gear  on  the  azimuth  circle  by  the  draw-pin 
spring  and  is  arranged  so  that  it  may  be  disengaged  from  the  worm 
gear  by  movement  of  a  lever.  When  disengaged  the  line  of  sight 
may  be  rapidly  oriented  to  approximately  the  desired  direction,  the 
worm  then  thrown  into  gear,  and  finer  adjustments  made  by  turning 
the  azimuth  micrometer  knob. 

All  panoramic  sights  have  been  made  interchangeable,  so  as  to  fit 
in  seats. 

The  following  device  for  illumination  of  the  crosslines  of  the  reticule 
of  panoramic  sights  is  used: 

A  small  slit  is  cut  in  the  eyepiece  elbow  and  the  reticule  cell  on  the 
side  of  the  sight  next  the  gun.  A  shutter  is  provided  which  encircles 
the  eyepiece  elbow  opposite  the  slit,  affording  means  for  closing. 
On  some  sights  this  shutter  is  provided  with  a  transparent  celluloid 
window  to  prevent  the  entrance  of  dust. 

On  the  latter  sights  a  glass  window  is  fitted  in  the  side  of  the 
eyepiece. 

For  illumination  at  night  electric  flash  lights  are  used.  They 
should  be  held  close  to  the  illuminating  slot  or  window. 

PANORAMIC    SIGHT,    MODEL    OF    1915. 
[Plate  XXIV]     . 

The  panoramic  sight  is  a  vertical  telescope  so  fitted  with  an  optical 
system  of  reflecting  prisms  and  lenses  that  the  gunner  with  his  eye 
at  the  fixed  eyepiece  in  a  horizontal  position  can  bring  into  the 
field  of  view  an  object  situated  at  any  point  in  a  plane  perpendicular 
to  the  axis  of  the  telescope. 

The  rays  coming  from  the  object  are  reflected  downward  from  the 
rotating  head  prism  into  the  rotating  prism.  The  rotating,  prism 
rectifies  the  rays;  after  their  passage  through  the  achromatic  object ive 
lens  the  lower  reflecting  prism  reflects  them  in  such  a  way  that 
there  is  presented  to  the  eyepiece  a  rectified  image,  which  the  eye- 
piece magnifies.  The  peculiarity  of  the  rotating  prism  is  that  upon 
rotation  about  its  longitudinal  axis  the  image  of  the  object  seen 
through  it  turns  with  twice  the  angular  velocity  of  the  rotating 
prism.     The  rotating  head  prism  and  rotating  prism  are  so  mounted 


10161 — 17 10* 


107 

as  to  rotate  about  this  axis,  the  rotating  prism  following  the  rotating 
head  prism  with  one-half  of  the  angular  velocity  of  the  latter,  the 
image  always  remains  as  it  would  appear  to  one  observing  it  di- 
rectly with  an  ordinary  telescope.  The  image  formed  by  the  achro- 
matic objective  lens  would  then  be  reserved  and  inverted.  The 
rays  are  cross  reflected  to  the  opposite  sides  of  the  axis  by  the  inclined 
faces  of  the  lower  reflecting  prism,  thus  correcting  the  reversal. 

The  combined  action  of  the  rotating  head  prism,  the  rotating 
prism,  and  lower  reflecting  prism  and  the  nature  of  action  varying 
with  different  positions  of  the  prisms  provide  for  the  correction  of 
the  inversion  of  the  image.  The  rotating  head  prism  and  lower 
reflecting  prism  as  shown  in  position  on  plate  act  as  parallel  reflectors, 
and  they  without  the  lens  system  would  present  an  erect  image. 
The  rotating  prism,  however,  inverts  the  rays  and  corrects  the 
inversion  produced  by  the  achromatic  objective  lens.  It  will  be 
noted  that  the  effect  would  be  the  same  whether  the  rotating  prism 
occupies  the  same  position  shown  on  the  plate  or  be  revolved  180° 
from  that  position.  The  rotating  head  prism  must  be  turned  through 
360°  to  get  a  position  of  180°  for  the  rotating  prism.  If  the  rotating 
head  prism  is  rotated  through  180°,  the  rotating  prism  and  lower 
reflecting  prism  would  form  reflectors  set  at  right  angles,  and  would 
give,  without  the  lens  system,  an  inverted  image,  and  in  conjunction 
with  the  lens  system  an  erect  image.  The  rotating  prism  in  this 
case  will  occupy  a  position  90°  from  that  shown  on  the  plate,  in 
which  position  it  causes  no  inversion,  but  counteracts  the  inversion 
produced  by  the  lower  reflecting  prism. 

The  instrument  has  a  magnifying  power  of  4  and  a  field  view  of 
10°. 

The  principal  parts  of  the  panoramic  sight  are  the  rotating  head 
mechanism,  the  elevation  device,  the  azimuth  mechanism,  the 
rotating  prism  mechanism,  the  deflection  mechanism,  the  shank, 
and  the  eyepiece. 

The  rotating  head  mechanism  consists  principally  of  the  rotating 

I  head,  rotating  head  prism,  rotating  head  prism  holder,,  prism-holder 
cover,  elevation  index  support,  prism  shield,  and  rotating  head  cover. 
The  rotating  head  forms  a  housing  for  its  movable  parts,  and 
provides  seats  for  the  elevation  worm  bushing  and  rotating  head 
prism  holder.  The  front  opening  of  the  rotating  head  is  closed  by 
the  prism  shield,  which  forms  a  dust  guard.  The  bottom  threaded 
seat  of  the  rotating  head  screws  upon  the  upper  end  of  the  azimuth 
worm  wheel  and  is  locked  in  place  by  four  azimuth  scale  retaining 
ring  screws.  Upon  the  rear  face  of  the  rotating  head  is  engraved  a 
scale  which  is  used  for  measuring  the  elevation  of  the  rotating  head 
prism  holder  which  retains  the  rotating  head  prism  and  has  an  index 


108 

mark  upon  the  projection  which  coincides  with  the  graduations  of 
the  elevation  worm  micrometer  head. 

The  rotating  head  prism  is  mounted  within  the  rotating  head 
prism  holder  between  the  prism  support  front,  prism  support  bot- 
tom, and  prism  support  back,  and  secured  in  position  by  the  rotating 
head  prism  spring  which  bears  upon  the  prism  support  back.  The 
rotating  head  prism  is  protected  on  the  right  side  by  the  prism- 
holder  cover  and  on  the  left  side  by  the  elevation  index  support. 

The  prism  shield  is  held  within  the  rotating  head  by  the  prism 
shield  retaining  piece,  which  is  in  turn  secured  by  two  prism  shield 
retaining  piece  screws. 

The  prism-holder  cover  screws  into  its  threaded  seat  located  in 
the  right  side  of  the  rotating  head  prism  holder  and  locked  in  position 
by  the  prism-holder  cover  screws. 

The  rotating  head  cover  screws  into  its  threaded  seat  located  in 
the  right  side  of  the  rotating  head  and  held  in  place  by  the  rotating 
head  cover  screws.  The  exterior  of  the  rotating  head  cover  has  two 
small  holes  for  teat  wrench,  and  engravings  " Field  10°"  and  "Power 
4"  are  located  on  the  exterior  surface. 

The  elevation-index  support  screws  into  its  threaded  seat  located 
in  the  left  side  of  the  rotating  head  prism  holder  and  secured  in  place 
by  the  elevation-index  support  screw.  The  small  holes  in  the 
exterior  surface  allows  the  use  of  teat  wrench  to  enable  the  elevation- 
index  support  to  be  screwed  in  place.  The  support-retaining  ring 
retains  the  elevation-index  support  with  rotating  head  prism  holder 
within  the  rotating  head  and  is  locked  in  position  by  the  support- 
retaining  ring  screw. 

The  elevation  index  is  held  upon  the  elevation-index  support  by 
the  two  elevation-index  retaining  screws.  The  arrow,  engraved 
upon  the  German  silver  piece  which  is  dovetailed  in  the  elevation 
index,  coincides  with  the  graduations  of  the  scale  engraved  upon 
the  rear  face  of  the  rotating  head. 

The  elevation  device  consists  principally  of  the  elevation  segment, 
elevation  worm,  elevation-worm  bushing,  elevation-worm  retaining 
nut,  and  elevation-worm  micrometer  head. 

The  elevation  segment  is  held  in  its  seat  provided  in  the  rotating- 
head  prism  holder  by  the  segment  lock  pin.  The  movement  of  the 
elevation  segment  is  limited  between  two  dowel  pins,  which  arc 
driven  through  the  rotating  head. 

The  elevation  worm  is  mounted  eccentrically  within  the  elevation- 
worm  bushing,  which,  when  turned,  provides  an  adjustment  to  take 
up  the  wear  between  the  worm  threads  and  the  worm  teeth  of  the 
elevation  segment. 

The  elevation-worm  bushing  has  a  screw  driver  slot  in  its  lower 
end  which  is  used  for  adjusting  and  is  retained  in  position  by  the 


109 

elevation-worm  bushing  clamp  plug,  which  is  secured  by  the  bushing- 
clamp  plug  screw. 

The  elevation-worm  retaining  nut  retains  the  elevation-worm  bush- 
ing and  elevation  worm  lengthwise  within  the  rotating  head.  The 
screw-driver  slot,  in  the  top  of  the  elevation-worm  retaining  nut,  is 
used  for  adjusting  and  is  locked  in  position  by  the  elevation-worm 
retaining  nut  screw. 

The  elevation-worm  micrometer  head  is  held  upon  the  upper 
slotted  end  of  the  elevation  worm  by  the  locking  screw.  The  scale- 
engraved  upon  the  periphery  is  graduated  into  100  equal  divisions, 
numbered  every  10  divisions.  The  upper  exterior  diameter  of  the 
elevation-worm  micrometer  head  is  straight-knurled  to  facilitate 
turning.  One  complete  revolution  of  the  elevation-worm  micrometer 
head  is  equal  to  the  distance  between  each  graduation  upon  the 
scale  on  the  rear  face  of  the  rotating  head. 

The  open  sight  is  constructed  of  bronze  plate  bent  to  shape,  having 
an  arm  projecting  out  at  each  end,  each  arm  containing  a  hole.  A 
bronze  knee  is  soldered  to  the  interior  of  the  front  projecting  arm  over 
the  center  of  the  hole  in  such  a  manner  as  to  form  a  sight  which 
is  used  for  quick  sighting.  The  open  sight  is  secured  to  the  rotating- 
head  cover  by  two  open  sight  retaining  scre\\  S. 

The  principal  parts  of  the  azimuth  mechanism  are  the  azimuth 
worm  wheel,  azimuth  worm-wheel  support,  azimuth  worm-wheel 
cover,  azimuth  worm,  azimuth  worm  ball,  throw-out  cam,  throw-out 
plunger,  azimuth  micrometer  knob,  and  azimuth  scale. 

The  azimuth  scale  is  retained  upon  its  bearings,  provided  on  lower 
end  of  the  rotating  head,  by  the  azimuth-scale  retaining  ring,  which 
in  turn  is  secured  by  four  azimuth-scale  retaining  ring  screws.  The 
four  elongated  holes  in  the  azimuth  scale  provide  for  adjusting.  The 
scale  engraved  upon  the  lower  exterior  diameter  is  graduated  into 
64  equal  divisions,  numbered  every  two  divisions. 

The  azimuth-worm  wheel  cover  forms  a  housing  for  the  movable 
parts  of  the  azimuth  mechanism  and  provides  seats  lor  the  ball-and- 
socket  bearing  throw-out  mechanism  and  deflection  worm  wheel 
and  support  ring.  The  arrow,  engraved  upon  the  upper  exterior 
diameter  of  the  azimuth  worm-wheel  cover,  coincides  with  the 
raduations  of  the  azimuth  scale.     The  scale  engraved  upon  a  boss 


*-> 


on  the  rear  face  of  the  azimuth  worm-wheel  cover  is  used  for  measur- 
ing the  deflection  of  the  object.  The  arrow,  engraved  upon  the  off- 
set on  the  rear  right  side  of  the  azimuth  worm-wheel  cover,  coincides; 
with  the  graduations  on  the  azimuth  micrometer  knob. 

The  felt  washer,  which  is  retained  in  its  seat,  is  located  in  the  upper 
end  of  the  azimuth  worm-wheel  cover,  and  provides  for  sufficient  fric- 
tion between  the  rotating  head  and  the  azimuth  worm-wheel  cover. 


110 

The  azimuth  worm-wheel  support  spring  tends  to  retain  the 
azimuth  worm-wheel  upon  the  azimuth  worm-wheel  support. 

The  gear  teeth  of  the  lower  part  of  the  azimuth  worm-wheel  mesh 
with  the  rotating  head  pinion,  which  upon  rotation  moves  the 
rot  a  ting-head  mechanism.  The  lower  part  of  the  azimuth  worm- 
wheel  support  screws  into  its  threaded  seat  provided  in  the  upper 
part  of  the  shank. 

The  azimuth  worm  is  provided  at  one  end  with  an  azimuth  worm 
ball,  held  in  place  by  a  bearing  cap  and  bearing  socket.  A  clearance 
space  is  provided  so  that  the  bearing  cap  can  be  adjusted  to  take  up 
wear.  A  throw-out  plunger,  with  a  spring  and  spring-retaining  nut, 
is  provided  for  compensating  for  wear  between  the  azimuth  worm 
and  azimuth- worm  wheel.  A  throw-out  lever,  which  is  pinned  to  a 
throw-out  cam,  which  in  turning  acts  on  the  throw-out  plunger,  is  a 
means  provided  for  disengaging  the  azimuth  worm  and  azimuth  worm 
wheel.  The  azimuth  micrometer  knob  is  held  on  the  slotted  end  of 
the  azimuth  worm  by  the  locking  screw.  The  scale  is  divided  into 
100  equal  divisions,  numbered  every  5  divisions.  One  complete  revo- 
lution of  the  azimuth  micrometer  knob  is  equal  to  the  distance  be- 
tween each  graduation  on  the  azimuth  scale. 

The  rotating  prism  mechanism  consists  principally  of  the  rotating 
prism,  rota  ting-prism  holder,  rotating-prism  supporting  sleeve,  rotat- 
ing-prism  pinion,  and  rotating-prism  block. 

The  rotating  prism  of  rectangular  cross  section,  mounted  and 
retained  in  position  within  the  rotating-prism  holder  by  rotating- 
prism  block,  which  is  secured  by  the  rotating-prism  set  screw.  The 
rotating-prism  holder  is  seated  in  the  upper  section  of  the  rotating- 
prism  supporting  sleeve.  The  rotating-prism  pinion  is  driven  upon 
the  pinion  shaft.  The  rotating-head  pinion  is  driven  upon  the  hub 
of  the  rotating-prism  pinion.  The  pinion  shaft  is  mounted  at  both 
ends  in  its  seat  provided  in  the  azimuth  worm  wheel  support,  which 
upon  rotation  moves  the  pinion  shaft.  This  gear  system  is  so  de- 
signed that  the  rotating  head  moves  twice  the  angular  distance  of 
the  rotating-prism  holder. 

The  principal  parts  of  the  deflection  mechanism  are  the  deflection- 
worm  wheel  and  support  ring,  deflection  worm,  deflection-worm 
bushing,  deflection  dial,  and  deflection-worm  knob. 

The  deflection-worm  wheel  and  support  ring  is  seated  within  the 
azimuth-worm  wheel  cover,  located  by  two  dowel  pins,  ^and  then 
retained  by  six  deflection-worm  wheel  and  support-ring  screws.  A 
segment  projecting  downward  into  the  shank  carries  a  worm  wheel 
which  meshes  with  the  deflection  worm.  The  deflection- worm  wheel 
support  is  located  within  the  shank  and  against  the  deflection-worm 
wheel  and  support  ring  by  two  dowel  pins  and  secured  by  two 
deflection-worm  wheel  support  screws. 


Ill 

The  deflection  worm  is  mounted  eccentrically  within  the  deflection- 
worm  bushing,  which  when  turned  provides  an  adjustment  to  take 
up  the  wear  between  the  worm  threads  and  the  worm  teeth  of  the 
deflection-worm  wheel  and  support  ring. 

The  deflection- worm  bushing  is  adjusted  by  using  the  .fingers  upon 
the  rear  end,  and  is  retained  in  position  by  the  deflection-worm 
bushing  clamp  plug,  which  is  secured  by  the  deflection^worm  bushing 
clamp-plug  screw.  A  German  silver  piece  is  pinned  and  soldered  to  the 
rear  end  of  the  deflection-worm  bushing,  on  which  is  engraved  three 
arrows  with  letters  "R"  and  "L."  The  middle  or  large  arrow  coin- 
cides with  the  graduations  of  the  deflection  dial.  The  compensating 
spring  is  provided  for  taking  up  all  lost  motion  that  appears  length- 
wise in  the  mechanism.  The  worm  knob  is  secured  to  the  deflection 
worm  by  a  taper  pin,  the  periphery  being  straight  knurled  to  facilitate 
turning.  The  deflection  dial  is  held  on  the  front  slotted  end  of  the 
deflection  worm  by  the  locking  screw.  The  scale,  engraved  upon  the 
front  end,  is  graduated  into  100  equal  divisions,  numbered  every  10 
divisions.  The  shank  forms  a  body  for  the  instrument  and  provides 
seats  for  the  azimuth  worm-wheel  support,  deflection-worm  bushing, 
and  elbow.  The  front  surface  is  provided  with  a  T  lug,  which  fits 
into  a  corresponding  slot  in  the  upper  end  of  the  shank  of  the  rear 
sight.  Upon  the  rear  surface  is  dovetailed  the  deflection  index, 
which  is  retained  in  place  by  the  deflection-index  screw. 

The  arrow  engraved  upon  the  deflection  index  coincides  with  grad- 
uation on  the  rear  face  of  the  azimuth  worm-wheel  cover. 

The  eyepiece  consists  principally  of  the  reticule,  the  reticule  cell, 
achromatic  field  lens,  a  chromatic  eye  lens,  and  eye-lens  cell. 

The  achromatic  objective  lens  is  mounted  in  the  upper  end  of  the 
objective  lens  cell.  This  cell  is  secured  in  its  threaded  seat  in  the 
upper  end  of  the  elbow  by  two  objective  lens-cell  retaining  screws. 

The  elbow  is  screwed  in  the  lower  end  of  the  shank  and  secured  by 
the  four  elbow-retaining  screws  in  such  a  manner  that  its  projecting 
arm  is  horizontal  to  the  axis  of  the  instruments.  The  elbow  provides 
seats  for  the  lower  reflecting  prism  and  the  eye-lens  cell.  The  lower 
reflecting  prism  is  held  upon  its  bearing  surf  aces,  provided  in  the  elbow 
by  two  wedges,  which  in  turn  are  secured  by  the  two  wedge  screws. 
These  screws  are  retained  by  the  wedge-screw  lock  screw.  The  wedge- 
screw  cover  is  provided  to  retain  the  wedge-screw  lock  screws  in 
position.  The  wedge-screw  cover  is  secured  by  the  wedge-cover 
screw.  The  opening  of  the  elbow  upon  the  right  and  left  sides  are 
closed  by  the  elbow  covers,  which  are  locked  by  the  elbow-cover 
screws.  Upon  the  left  side  of  the  elbow  is  an  opening  through  which 
the  light  is  thrown  upon  the  reticule.  This  opening  is  covered  by 
the  window  to  protect  the  interior  of  the  eyepiece  from  dust  and 
dirt.     The  shutter  is  so  designed  as  to  slide  over  the  opening  in  the 


112 

elbow,  being  guided  by  the  shutter-stop  screw,  and  movement  limited 
by  the  elongated  slot. 

The  reticule  has  two  cross  lines  etched  on  its  surface  and  is  mounted 
in  the  forward  end  to  the  reticule  cell,  which  is  secured  in  the  eye-lens 
cell  by  the  reticule-cell  retaining  screw. 

The  achromatic  eye  lens  is  mounted  in  the  eye  lens  cell  and  is 
separated  from  the  achromatic  field  lens  by  the  lens  separator.  The 
achromatic  field  lens  is  held  within  the  eye  lens  cell  by  the  field  lens 
retaining  ring,  which  in  turn  is  locked  by  the  field  lens  cell  retaining 
ring  screw.  The  eye  lens  cell  is  secured  to  the  elbow  by  the  eye  lens 
cell  retaining  screw. 

All  interior  metallic  surfaces  exposed  to  the  refracted  light  are 
finished  with  dull  black  baking  enamel.  All  exposed  optical  ele- 
ments, covers,  and  non-rotating  joints  are  sealed  with  the  litharge 
cement  or  equal.  All  German  silver  graduated  surfaces  are  sand- 
blasted and  lacquered. 

THE    RANGE    QUADRANT. 

[Plate  XXV.] 

In  this  carriage  the  elevating  and  traversing  mechanisms  are  en- 
tirely independent  of  each  other,  and  the  laying  of  the  gun  may  be 
accomplished  for  indirect  aiming  by  assigning  to  one  gunner  the  lay- 
ing for  direction  and  to  a  second  that  for  range.  The  gunner  on  the 
left  of  the  piece  using  the  open  or  panoramic  sight  lays  for  direction 
only,  while  the  gunner  on  the  right  trail  seat  gives  elevations  by 
means  of  the  range  quadrant. 

The  range  quadrant  consists  of  the  quadrant  bracket,  rocker,  body, 
scroll,  gear,  range  disk,  and  range  and  cross  levels  with  suitable 
leveling  screws. 

A  quadrant-bracket  fastening  riveted  to  the  right  side  of  the  cradle 
has  dovetailed  guides  in  which  the  quadrant  bracket  fits  and  is  held 
by  a  spring  catch.  Two  bracket  fulcrums  screwed  into  arms  on  the 
bracket  project  into  bearings  in  the  ends  of  the  rocker,  assembling 
the  latter  to  the  bracket  and  at  the  same  time  permitting  it  a  motion 
of  rotation  about  an  axis  joining  the  centers  of  the  bracket  fulcrums 
or  trunnions.  As  assembled,  this  axis  of  motion  is  parallel  to  the 
axis  of  the  gun.  A  projection  below  the  rear  end  of  the  rocker  forms 
a  seat  for  a  leveling  screw,  the  axis  of  which  is  in  a  plane  perpendicu- 
lar to  the  axis  of  the  gun.  The  knurled  head  of  this  screw  projects 
to  the  right  and  its  threads  mesh  in  the  segment  of  a  worm  wheel  cut 
on  the  quadrant  bracket.  This  leveling  screw  is  thus  arranged  to 
rotate  the  rocker  on  its  trunnions  and,  in  conjunction  with  the  cross 
level  mentioned  below,  enables  the  quadrant  to  be  brought  into  a 
vertical  plane  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  gun.     This  construction  is 


1 4'- 


113 

necessary  to  correct  for  difference  of  level  of  wheels  and  to  give  true 
quadrant  elevations.  At  the  front  end  of  the  rocker  is  the  seat  for  a 
fulcrum  pin,  which  forms  the  center  of  motion  of  the  quadrant  body. 
At  the  rear  end  of  the  rocker  a  curved  arm  projects  upward  which  has 
circular  racks  cut  on  its  front  and  rear  edges.  This  curved  arm 
passes  through  a  slot  in  the  body  and  the  centers  of  the  racks  coincide 
with  its  center  of  motion. 

The  body,  as  stated  above,  is  pivoted  on  the  rocker.  Its  rear  end 
affords  a  housing  for  the  quadrant-elevating  gear  and  a  seat  for  the 
range  disk.  The  elevating  gear  consists  of  a  scroll  gear,  meshing 
with  the  rear  circular  rack  of  the  rocker.  The  scroll  gear  is  actuated 
by  a  knurled  handwheel,  which  projects  upward  and  to  the  rear. 
Turning  the  handwheel  rotates  the  body  on  its  fulcrum  pin,  moving 
its  rear  end  up  or  down  on  the  curved  arm  of  the  rocker.  The  scroll 
gear  is  pressed  against  its  rack  by  a  spring;  large  changes  of  position 
of  the  quadrant  body  may  be  made  by  pulling  the  handwheel  out  to 
disengage  the  gear  from  the  rack  and  then  moving  the  body  by  hand 
to  the  desired  position. 

The  range  disk  is  assembled  on  a  steel  shaft  seated  in  the  quadrant 
body;  this  shaft  carries  a  pinion  which  meshes  with  the  front  circular 
rack  on  the  curved  arm  of  the  quadrant  rocker.  The  range  disk  is 
held  on  the  shaft  between  two  steel  friction  disks.  The  outer  fric- 
tion disk  on  quadrants  is  split  radially  and  has  a  serrated  edge. 
This  combined  with  the  slight  spring  allowed  in  the  washer  forms 
an  adjustable  yet  secure  lock  for  the  range  disk.  A  nut  screwed  on 
the  shaft  clamps  the  disks  in  position,  and  a  lock  screw  in  the  end  of 
the  shaft  prevents  the  nut  from  unscrewing.  The  inner  friction  disk 
is  connected  to'  the  shaft  by  lugs  projecting  into  a  slotted  collar.  A 
spiral  spring,  the  tension  of  which  serves  to  take  up  any  lost  motion 
in  the  arrangement,  is  connected  at  its  outer  end  to  the  inner  friction 
disk  by  a  pin.  It  is  wound  around  the  hub  of  the  body  and  secured 
to  the  hub  in  a  slot  cut  to  receive  it. 

The  face  of  the  range  disk,  which  is  visible  on  the  right  side  of  the 
quadrant,  is  graduated  to  9,400  yards.  The  caliber  of  gun  for  which 
the  range  disk  is  made  is  engraved  on  the  face  of  the  disk. 

The  least  division  is  100  yards  below  500  yards  and  50  yards  above 
500  yards,  and  the  scale  is  dimensioned  at  each  500  yards.  Divisions 
smaller  than  50  yards  may  be  readily  made  with  the  eye.  The  range 
disk  is  always  in  gear  through  its  shaft  and  pinion  with  the  rack 
on  the  curved  arm  of  the  rocker,  and  any  change  in  position  of  the 
quadrant  body  with  reference  to  the  rocker  arm  is  registered  by  the 
disk. 

The  elevation  level  holder  is  seated  on  the  forward  part  of  the 
body,  with  its  front  end  pivoted  on  the  fulcrum  pin  of  the  latter. 


114 

Its  rear  end  is  finished  with  a  segment  of  a  worm  wheel,  cut  with  the 
fulcrum  axis  as  a  center,  which  meshes  with  a  vertical  micrometer 
screw  seated  in  the  body.  The  amount  of  the  relative  motion  of  the 
level  holder  and  body  is  measured  by  a  level  scale,  consisting  of  an 
ordinary  circular  scale  dovetailed  in  the  body  with  an  index  on  the 
elevation  level  holder  supplemented  by  a  level  micrometer  disk  on 
the  upper  end  of  the  micrometer  screw.  The  level  scale  is  graduated 
in  sixty-fourths  of  the  circumference,  and  one  complete  turn  of  the 
screw  moves  the  level  holder  through  one  of  these  divisions.  The 
level  micrometer  disk  on  the  head  of  the  micrometer  screw  has  100 
divisions,  so  that  one  of  these  divisions  corresponds  to  one  mil.  The 
divisions  of  the  circular  scale  are  marked  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  and  in  con- 
nection with  the  level  micrometer  disk  are  read  200,  300,  etc.,  plus  the 
indication  of  the  latter.  The  3  or  300  mark  corresponds  to  the  mean 
or  zero  position  of  the  elevation  level  holder.  The  level  holder  is 
fitted  with  two  spirit  levels  of  a  sensitiveness  of  0.1  inch,  which  equals 
five  minutes  of  arc.  The  longitudinal  or  range  level  is  located  so  that 
its  axis  is  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  gun  when  the  level  scale  is  set  at 
3  and  range  disk  at  zero. 

The  axis  of  the  transverse  or  cross  level  is  perpendicular  to  that 
of  the  range  level  and  also  to  the  plane  of  motion  of  the  quadrant 
body.  The  cross  level  in  connection  with  the  leveling  screw  enables 
the  quadrant  rocker  and  body  to  be  kept  vertical.  The  range  level 
in  connection  with  the  elevation-level  holder  and  its  level  screw  is 
used  as  a  clinometer  to  correct  the  range-disk  readings  for  angle  of 
site;  in  connection  with  the  quadrant  body  it  is  used  as  the  quadrant 
level.  For  purposes  of  reference,  these  levels  are  designated  as  the 
cross  level  and  the  range  level,  and  their  respective  screws  as  the 
leveling  screw  and  micrometer  screw;  the  scale  pertaining  to  the 
latter  screw  is  called  the  level  micrometer  disk.  The  range  level  is 
also  referred  to  at  times  as  the  quadrant  or  angle  of  site  level. 

The  range  quadrant  remains  in  position  on  the  cradle  during  firing. 
When  not  in  use  it  is  removed  from  the  cradle  and  carried  in  the 
range-quadrant  case  on  the  rear  face  of  the  main  shield.  To  remove 
range  quadrant  from  the  cradle,  release  the  spring  catch  and  slip 
the  quadrant  from  the  support. 

USE    OF   SIGHTS   AND   QUADRANTS. 

By  construction  and  method  of  mounting  with  longitudinal  and 
cross  levels  on  the  rear  sight,  the  panoramic  sight  forms  a  horizontal 
angle  measuring  instrument.  These  angles  are  read  directly  from  the 
deflection  scale  of  the  sight  in  units,  mils,  equivalent  to  ^jVo"  °f  a 
complete  circle,  or  360°. 


115 

USE    OF  THE    PANORAMIC    SIGHTS,    MODELS    OP    1904    AND    1915. 

For  direct  aiming:  Set  the  rear  sight  at  the  required  elevations  and 
correct  for  difference  of  level  of  wheels;  set  off  the  desired  deflection 
on  the  azimuth  circle  of  the  panoramic  sight;  bring  the  crosslines  of 
the  sight  upon  the  target  by  means  of  the  elevating  and  traversing 
devices  of  the  carriage.  For  imparting  the  approximate  initial  direc- 
tion the  line  sight  may  be  used  with  advantage. 

In  using  the  model  of  1915  sight  for  direct  fire  care  must  be  taken 
that  the  rotating  head  be  set  at  300  mils  and  the  deflection  mechanism 
at  0. 

For  indirect  aiming:  Set  the  rear  sight  at  the  required  elevation 
and  make  correction  for  difference  of  level  of  wheels;  set  the  azimuth 
circle  of  the  panoramic  sight  at  the  deflection  ordered.  Lay  the  gun 
for  deflection  by  directing  the  vertical  line  of  the  panoramic  sight  at 
the  auxiliary  aiming  point,  the  elevation  of  the  gun  being  given  by 
using  the  range  quadrant. 

The  angle  of  deflection  to  be  set  off  on  the  azimuth  circle  of  the 
panoramic  sight  is  the  same  as  the  angle  made  by  joining  the  target 
and  the  auxiliary  aiming  point  with  the  sight. 

RANGE  QUADRANT. 

To  give  quadrant  elevations  with  ilie  range  quadrant:  Set  the  range 
disk  for  the  desired  range  by  turning  the  quadrant-elevating  hand- 
wheel  and  correct  for  difference  in  level  of  wheels;  correct  for  angle 
of  site  on  the  scale  of  the  level  holder;  bring  the  bubble  of  the  range 
level  to  the  center  by  elevating  or  depressing  the  gun.  The  gun  will 
then  have  the  elevation  (corrected  for  angle  of  site)  corresponding 
to  the  range. 

CARE    OF    BIGHTS    AM>    ()[  ADRANT. 

Whenever  convenient,  and  especially  when  in  garrison  and  not  in 
use,  the  front  and  rear  sights  with  the  range  quadrants  and  pano- 
ramic sights  should  be  removed  from  the  carriages  and  kept  in 
some  dry  place,  as  in  the  barracks'  storeroom  or  office. 

CARE    OF    FRONT    AND    REAR    SIGHTS. 

For  traveling,  the  front  sight  is  covered  by  the  duck  cover  sup- 
plied for  the  purpose,  and  by  means  of  the  spring  catch  at  the  base 
of  the  bracket  it  is  turned  105  degrees  from  its  firing  position  and 
locked  to  the  front-sight-bracket  support.  The  sight  shank  is  with- 
drawn from  the  shank  socket,  covered  with  the  cover  for  rear-sight 
shank,  and  placed  in  the  packing  provided  for  it  in  the  trail  of  the 
carriage.  A  duck  cover,  called  the  cover  for  rear-sight  bracket,  is 
provided  to  protect  the  surfaces  of  the  shank  socket  and  should  be 
slipped  over  the  socket  when  the  shank  is  removed. 


116 

All  parts  of  the  sight  shanks  and  shank  sockets  should  be  kept 
(dean,  free  from  rust,  and  lightly  oiled.  When  stored  or  not  us 
for  short  periods,  they  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned  and  well  coal 
with  light  slushing  oil.  Should  any  part  become  rusted,  it  should  b( 
carefully  cleaned  by  softening  the  rust  with  coal  oil  and  rubbing 
with  a  soft-pine  stick. 

In  handling  all  parts  of  the  sights  care  must  be  exercised  to  avoid 
injuring  them  by  dropping,  striking  them  upon  or  with  other  parts, 
etc.  The  front-sight  bracket  must  not  be  used  by  the  cannoneers  as 
a  handle  to  assist  in  mounting  upon  or  dismounting  from  the  car- 
riage. 

To  clean  the  joint  between  the  bracket  and  the  shank  socket,  drive 
out  the  pin  from  the  end  of  the  leveling  screw  and  remove  the  level- 
ing screw.  Disassemble  the  bracket  from  the  shank,  clean  all  parts 
and  oil  them  with  sperm  oil.     Assemble  in  the  reverse  order. 

Oil  the  leveling  screw  from  time  to  time  through  the  oil  hole  pro- 
vided in  the  sight  bracket. 

For  instructions  for  the  replacement  of  level  vials  see  instructions 
given  under  the  heading  "Care  of  range  quadrant." 

CARE    OF  THE    PANORAMIC    SIGHT,    MODELS    OF   1904   AND    1915. 

These  sights  are  delicate  instruments,  and  must  not  be  subjected 
to  any  rough  usage,  jars,  or  strains.  In  firing  they  remain  in  posi- 
tion on  the  carriage;  in  the  field  when  not  in  use  they  are  kept  in 
the  padded  leather  cases  prepared  for  them  on  the  rear  of  the  main 
shield. 

To  obtain  satisfactory  vision,  the  glasses  must  be  perfectly  clean 
and  dry.  The  T  lug  on  the  sight  and  the  slot  forming  its  seat  should 
be  kept  lightly  oiled  as  a  preventive  of  rust.  The  worm  and  worm 
rack  should  be  oiled  with  vaseline.  When  dust  accumulates  on  the 
pointers  it  should  be  removed  by  a  fine  camers-hair  brush  in  the 
hands  of  an  experienced  person. 

To  clean  the  rotating-head  window  and  the  front  face  of  the 
rotating  head,  do  not  remove  the  rotating-head  window  from  the 
window  cell. 

To  clean  the  reticule  and  eyepiece  lenses,  remove  the  screw  hold- 
ing the  eyepiece  to  the  eyepiece  elbow  and  unscrew  the  eyepiece 
To  disassemble  the  lenses  remove  the  set  screw  on  the  underside  o.' 
the  eyepiece  and  unscrew  the  eye-lens  cell.  The  field  lens  is  held  in 
place  by  a  retaining  spring,  both  of  which  may  drop  out  as  soon  as 
the  eye-lens  cell  is  disassembled. 

In  assembling  note  that  the  flat  surface  of  the  fixed  lens  of  the 
eyepiece  is  placed  next  to  the  reticule.  Do  not  remove  or  change 
the  adjustment  of  the  reticule.  Its  rear  surface  may  be  cleaned  with 
a  camel's-hair  brush  after  the  eyepiece  has  been  removed. 


117 

In  panoramic  sights  of  serial  numbers  after  752  the  exposed  optical 
elements  and  all  nonmoving  joints  ar°  sealed  and  no  attempt  should  be 
made  to  remove  them. 

For  serial  numbers  873  and  up,  the  slight  change  in  the  appearance 
and  construction  of  the  elbow  and  rotating  head  is  made  for  the  pur- 
pose of  making  these  parts  dust  and  moisture  proof. 

CARE    OF    RANGE    QUADRANT. 

The  directions  for  the  care  of  the  range  quadrant  are  practically 
the  same  as  those  for  the  care  of  the  various  sights.  The  parts 
should  be  kept  clean,  free  from  rust,  and  bearings  lightly  oiled. 
When  stored  they  should  be  coated  with  light  slushing  oil. 

To  clean  the  micrometer  screw,  remove  the  screw  in  the  center  of 
the  micrometer  dial,  turn  the  micrometer  screw  until  the  dial  is 
forced  off;  drive  (away  from  gun)  the  taper  pin  holding  the  screw 
bushing.  Pull  out  the  screw  bushing,  clean,  oil  with  a  heavy  oil,  and 
assemble  in  the  reverse  order  and  adjust. 

Extra  glass  level  vials  assembled  in  brass  tubes,  to  replace  broken 
vials  in  sights  and  range  quadrants,  except  for  the  range  levers  of 
quadrants,  will  be  issued  on  requisition.  In  case  the  range  level  of 
the  range  quadrant  requires  replacement,  the  range  quadrant  will 
be  turned  in  to  an  arsenal  designated  by  the  armament  officer. 

Only  ordinary  tools,  such  as  a  hammer  and  a  punch  or  a  piece  of 
wire,  are  required  for  the  removal  of  pins  from  level  caps  in  order  to 
replace  vials.  All  pins  on  level  caps  are  driven  in  toward  the  center 
of  the  instrument.  They  should  be  driven  out  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion. Four  radial  screws  in  the  vial  tubes  are  used  for  adjusting  the 
tubes  in  their  holders. 

ADJUSTMENT   OF   SIGHTS   AND   QUADRANT. 

The  sights  are  correctly  adjusted  when,  at  zero  elevation  and  deflec- 
tion, the  line  of  sight  is  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  bore. 

The  range  quadrant  is  correctly  adjusted  when,  with  the  range 
disk  set  at  zero,  level  scale  set  at  300,  and  axis  of  gun  horizontal  and 
corrected  for  difference  of  level  of  wheels,  the  level  bubble  of  the 
range  level  stands  in  the  center  of  its  vial.  In  adjusting  sights,  the 
panoramic  sight  should  first  be  corrected.  If  the  rear  sight  is  ad- 
justed first,  it  will  require  readjustment  if  the  subsequent  adjustment 
of  the  panoramic  sight  causes  a  change  in  position  of  the  rear-sight 
range  strip. 

TO    ADJUST   THE    PANORAMIC    SIGHT,    MODEL   OF    1915. 

Should  backlash  or  lost  motion  appear  lengthwise  in  the  elevation 
device,  it  can  be  removed  by  loosening  the  elevation  worm  retaining- 
nut  screw,  setting  up  on  the  elevation -worm  retaining  nut  and  then 


118 

tightening  up  on  the  elevation-worm  retaining-nut  screw.  To 
remove  backlash  between  the  threads  of  the  elevation  worm  and 
worm  teeth  of  the  elevation  segment,  loosen  the  bushing  clamp  plug 
screw  which  releases  the  elevation-worm  bushing  clamp  plug,  and 
then  turning  the  elevation  bushing,  in  which  the  elevation  worm  is 
eccentrically  mounted,  so  as  to  bring  the  elevation  worm  closer  in 
contact  with  the  worm  teeth  of  the  elevation  segment.  The  eleva- 
tion-worm adjusting  clamp  plug  must  be  firmly  clamped  after  adjust- 
ing by  tightening  up  on  the  bushing  clamp  plug  screw  to  secure  the 
elevation-worm  bushing  against  rotation.  After  adjusting,  should 
the  zero  upon  the  elevation-worm  micrometer  head  not  coincide  with 
index  when  the  elevation  index  coincides  with  the  graduations  of 
the  scale  upon  the  rear  face  of  the  rotating  head,  it  can  be  easily 
remedied  by  the  loosening  up  on  the  locking  screw  and  turning  the 
elevation-worm  micrometer  head  until  the  zero  just  coincides  with 
its  index,  after  which  it  must  be  firmly  secured  by  tightening  up 
or  the  locking  screw. 

Backlash  which  may  occur  between  the  threads  of  the  azimuth 
worm  and  the  worm  teeth  of  the  azimuth  worm  wheel  is  taken  up 
automatically  by  the  spring  that  forces  the  throw-out  plunger  which 
seats  the  azimuth  at  its  left  end  in  towards  the  azimuth  worm  wheel. 
Tne  four  elongated  holes  in  the  azimuth  scale  afford  means  for  adjust- 
ing when  its  zero  does  not  coincide  with  the  arrow  head  upon  the 
upper  exterior  diameter  of  the  azimuth  worm  wheel  cover  when  the 
zero  of  the  deflection  scale,  upon  the  rear  of  the  azimuth  worm-wheel 
cover,  coincides  with  arrow  head  upon  the  deflection  index.  After 
this  adjustment  is  made  the  azimuth  micrometer  knob  should  be 
inspected  similar  to  that  elevation-worm  micrometer  head. 

Backlash  that  appears  between  the  threads  of  the  deflection  worm 
and  the  worm  teeth  of  the  deflection  worm  wheel  and  support  ring 
can  readily  be  removed  when  the  method  of  adjusting  similar  to 
that  of  the  elevation  device  is  followed  out. 

TO    ADJUST  THE    PANORAMIC   SIGHT,  MODEL   OF   1904. 

Direct  the  panoramic  sight  by  means  of  the  azimuth  micrometer 
knob  and  rear  sight  scroll  gear  until  its  line  of  sight  is  parallel  to  the 
axis  of  the  bore.  The  method  of  determining  when  this  condition  of 
parallelism  exists  is  described  hereafter.  Without  disturbing  the 
direction  of  this  line  of  sight  move  the  azimuth  micrometer  knob  of 
panoramic  sight  and  the  range  strip  of  the  rear  sight  until  the  zero! 
marks  come  opposite  their  respective  indices.  The  azimuth  microm- 
eter knob  may  be  moved  after  loosening  the  locking  screw  in  the  en( 
of  the  worm.  This  locking  screw  may  be  loosened  by  the  combined 
teat  wrench,  and  screw  driver  issued  for  the  purpose.  If  the  azimuth 
micrometer  knob  can  not  be  readily  removed,  grasp  the  sight  by  the 


119 

azimuth  micrometer  knob,  release  the  worm  from  the  worm  gear  of 
the  azimuth  circle  and  gently  tap  the  exposed  end  of  the  worm  with 
a  small  piece  of  wood  or  soft  metal. 

To  locate  the  index  opposite  the  zero  of  the  scale  loosen  the  four 
screws  that  hold  the  movable  index  cover  in  place  and  move  this 
cover  until  the  index  is  properly  located;  then  tighten  the  screws. 
Movement  of  the  range  strip  of  the  rear  sight  is  made  possible  by  a 
slot  in  the  shank  in  which  the  range  strip  screw  can  be  moved  when 
the  nut  has  been  loosened. 

TO    ADJUST    FRONT   AND   REAR    SIGHT. 

Set  the  rear-sight  shank  at  zero  elevation  and  move  the  peep  sight 
and  the  front  sight  until  the  line  of  sight  is  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the 
bore.  The  met  hod  of  determining  when  this  condition  of  parallelism 
exists  is  given  below.  Xow  shift  the  deflection  scale  on  the  rear  sight, 
after  loosening  the  two  screws,  until  its  zero  is  opposite  the  index  on 
the  peep  sight. 

Movement  of  the  front  sight  is  accomplished  by  turning  the  front- 
sighl  bracket  sleeve,  after  first  removing  the  split  pins. 

TO    ADJUST   THE    RANGE    QUADRANT. 

Klevate  or  depress  gun  until  its  axis  is  horizontal,  correct  for 
difference  of  level  of  wheels,  set  the  level  scale  of  the  quadrant  at 
300,  then  turn  the  quadrant  handwheel  until  the  range-level  bubble 
is  centered.  Now  turn  the  range  disk  of  the  quadrant  until  its  zero 
coincides  with  the  index.  The  range  disk  is  held  between  two  fric- 
tion disks  secured  by  a  nut  and  lock  screw  and  it  is  only  necessary 
to  unscrew  these  .to  release  the  disk  and  correct  its  position.  To 
test  the  horizontality  of  the  gun,  use  the  testing  level  issued  for  that 
purpose.  This  level  has  two  arms  perpendicular  to  each  other,  and 
a  level  vial  is  inserted  in  each  arm.  As  the  faces  of  the  breech  and 
the  muzzle  are  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the  bore,  the  horizontality 
of  the  axis  of  the  bore  may  be  determined  by  placing  one  of  the  arms 
of  the  testing  level  against  the  face  of  the  breech  or  muzzle  and  de- 
rating or  depressing  the  gun  until  the  bubble  in  the  level  of  the 
other  arm  is  in  the  center.  Then  apply  the  other  arm  to  the  same 
face,  and  the  bubble  in  the  first  arm  should  also  be  in  the  center  of  its 
vial.     If  not,  the  testing  level  requires  adjustment. 

VERIFICATION    OF  PARALLELISM    OF   LINES   OF   SIGHT   AND   AXIS    OF   BORE. 

The  adjustment  of  the  sights  and  range  quadrant  is  of  such  impor- 
tance and  should  be  verified  so  frequently  that  battery  commanders 
will  find  it  advantageous  to  make  permanent  arrangements  for  such 
verification.  The  leveled  supports  constituting  the  carriage  emplace- 
ment should  preferably  be  of  stone.  The  site  of  the  target  (fig.  1) 
10161—17 11* 


120 

should  be  prepared,  and  the  exact  locations  of  the  target  and  hori- 
zontal reference  points  permanently  marked.  If  these  arrangements 
are  properly  made,  subsequent  verifications  of  sights  and  quadrants 
will  become  a  simple  matter. 

A  target  of  dimensions  given  in  figure  1  is  placed  in  a  vertical 
position  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  sight,  at  such  a  height  that  the 
point  "bore"  is  at  the  same  height  as  the  axis  of  the  bore  of  the  gun. 
The  vertically  of  the  target  is  assured  by  a  plumb  line  attached  at  A, 
coinciding  with  the  vertical  line  A  B. 

The  carriage  is  placed  with  the  wheels  and  trail  resting  upon  solid 
supports  of  wood  or  stone,  the  surfaces  of  which  have  been  carefully 
leveled  so  as  to  bring  the  axle  axis  horizontal.     Now  direct  the  gun 


Figure  1. 

so  that  the  prolongation  of  the  axis  of  the  bore,  as  determined  by  the 
bore  sights,  pierces  the  target  at  the  proper  point;  the  lines  of  sight 
of  the  open  and  panoramic  sights  are  then  adjusted  in  direction  by 
the  means  explained  above  until  they  pierce  the  targets  in  the  points 
marked,  respectively,  "open"  and  "panoramic." 

The  axis  of  the  bore  is  determined  and  prolonged  by  means  of  bore 
sights.  In  the  absence  of  such  means  a  breech-bore  sight  may  be 
made  from  an  empty  cartridge  case  from  which  the  primer  has  been 
removed;  a  piece  of  paper  should  be  pasted  over  the  primer  seat  and 
a  pinhole  made  in  its  exact  center  to  serve  as  a  peep  sight.  If  the 
cartridge  case  does  not  completely  fill  the  bore,  it  should  be  shimmed 
all  around  with  tissue  paper  until  it  does  so.     For  a  muzzle-bore 


121 

sight  use  snould  be  made  of  the  traces  of  the  horizontal  and  vertical 
planes  containing  the  axis  of  the  bore,  which  are  marked  on  the 
muzzle  of  the  gun.  Fine  threads  or  hairs  stretched  across  the  muzzle 
to  coincide  with  these  lines  form  a  good  bore  sight,  and  the  ends  of 
such  threads  may  be  conveniently  fastened  to  a  cloth  strap  buckled 
around  the  muzzle  of  the  gun. 

In  the  field,  where  from  lack  of  time  or  proper  facilities  the  method 
just  given  can  not  be  followed,  the  adjustment  of  the  sights  may  be 
verified  by  bringing  the  lines  of  sight  at  zero  elevation  and  deflection 
to  bear  upon  some  sharply  defined  point  of  a  distant  object.  At  such 
a  range  (for  instance,  2,000  yards  or  more)  the  parallax  may  bo 
neglected,  and  if  the  sights  are  correctly  adjusted  the  lines  of  sight 
and  the  prolongation  of  the  axis  of  the  bore  will  sensibly  pass  through 
the  selected  aiming  point. 

ADDITIONAL  TE8T8. 

After  the  sights  and  range  quadrant  are  adjusted  they  should  be 
subjected  to  the  following  tests  to  insure  their  accuracy  at  extremes 
of  elevation  and  azimuth: 

(a)  With  carriage  level  and  gun  and  sights  at  zero  elevation  and 
deflection,  the  lines  of  sight  and  axis  of  bore  prolonged  pierce  the  tar- 
get (fig.  1)  in  the  proper  points. 

(b)  The  gun  is  then  moved  to  its  maximum  elevation;  as  the  sight 
elevation  is  altered,  the  lines  of  sight  should  follow  the  vertical  lines 
through  the  same  points  of  the  target  (fig.  1). 

(c)  With  conditions  as  in  (a),  the  gun  is  moved  upon  the  carriage 
to  its  extreme  positions  in  azimuth;  as  the  sight  deflections  are  now 
altered,  the  lines  of  sight  should  follow  the  horizontal  lines  through 
the  same  points  on  the  target  (fig.  1). 

(d)  With  conditions  as  in  (a),  the  range-quadrant  disk  registers  0. 
As  the  gun  is  elevated  and  the  sight  elevation  changed  to  bring  the 
line  of  sight  to  bear  upon  the  proper  point  of  the  target  (fig.  1),  the 
readings  of  the  range  disk,  quadrant  leveled,  should  agree  at  all 
ranges  with  those  of  the  elevation  scale  of  the  sight. 

By  construction  and  assemblage  the  sights,  if  correctly  adjusted, 
should  fulfill  the  above  conditions  with  substantial  accuracy.  If  error 
be  noted,  a  report  of  the  facts  of  the  case  with  the  cause,  if  known, 
should  be  made  to  the  Ordnance  Officer  charged  with  the  repair  of 
the  materiel  for  his  information  and  action. 

SPARE    SIGHTS   AND   QUADRANT. 

To  each  battery  is  issued  one  set  of  spare  sights,  consisting  of  one 
front  sight  complete,  one  rear  sight  complete,  one  panoramic  sight, 
and  one  range  quadrant.  These  parts  are  carried  in  a  special  chest 
in  the  battery  wagon.     One  set  of  bore  sights  (consisting  of  one  breech 


122 

and  one  muzzle  bore  sight)  and  one  level  for  use  in  adjusting  sights, 
etc.,  are  also  issued  to  each  battery. 

ADJUSTING    INSTRUMENTS. 

A  complete  detailed  description  of  the  method  of  disassembling 
and  adjusting  the  different  instruments  is  given  in  Ordnance  Office 
Pamphlet  No.  1795,  Instructions  for  the  Care,  Preservation,  Repair, 
and  Adjustment  of  Instruments  for  the  Fire-Control  Systems  for 
Coast  and  Field  Artillery.  Attention  is  invited  to  General  Orders 
No.  47,  War  Department,  March  24,  1905,  with  reference  to  the  care 
and  repair  of  panoramic  sights,  battery  commander's  telescopes,  and 
range  finders. 

No  disassembling  of  instruments  except  as  prescribed  herein  will 
be  permitted.  The  disassembling  of  telescopic  instruments  allowed 
herein  must  be  done  only  in  the  presence  of  a  commissioned  officer. 
Disassembling  as  permitted  in  pamphlet  1795  must  be  done  only  by 
officers  or  employees  of  the  Ordnance  Department. 

TARGETS. 

The  description  and  allowances  of  targets  and  accessories  for 
mobile  Artillery  are  given  in  Ordnance  Office  Pamphlet,  Form  No. 
1994,  " Mobile  Artillery  Targets  and  Accessories." 

GENERAL    INFORMATION. 

PAINTING   ARTILLERY   MATERIEL. 

The  paint  issued  for  this  purpose  is  of  olive-drab  color,  put  up  in 
5-pound  cans  ready  for  use,  and  is  applied  to  both  wood  and  metal 
parts.     If  the  paint  is  too  thick,  turpentine  should  be  used  as  a  j 
thinner,  but  not  to  greater  extent  than  2  per  cent  by  volume. 

All  steel  and  iron  nonbearing  surfaces  will  be  painted,  including 
that  portion  of  the  underside  of  the  gun  between  the  clips.     Wearing  j 
and  bearing  surfaces,  teeth  of  gear  wheels,  elevating  screws,  piston! 
rods,  cylinders,  counterrecoil  springs,  and  interiors  of  spring  cylinders 
will  not  be  painted. 

Articles  which  can  be  easily  cleaned  and  repainted  may  be  im- 
mersed in  the  solution.     It  is  forbidden  to  immerse  articles  which, 
can  not  be  entirely  repainted;  for  example,  ammunition  chests,  the 
joints  and  some  parts  of  the  interior  of  which  it  would  not  be  prac-* 
ticable  to  repaint. 

All  parts  to  be  painted  should  be  free  from  dirt  or  grease.  They 
may  be  washed  in  a  liquid  made  by  dissolving  one-half  pound  sal 
soda  in  8  quarts  of  warm  water,  then  rinsed  in  clean  water,  and 
wiped  thoroughly  dry. 

Where  the  materiel  is  in  fair  condition  and  only  marred  in  spots! 
the  marred  places  should  be  primed  with  olive-drab  paint,  second 


123 

coat,  and  permitted  to  dry.  Then  the  whole  surface  should  be 
sand  papered  with  No.  1J  sand  paper  and  a  coat  of  paint  applied 
and  allowed  to  dry  thoroughly  before  use. 

Where  the  materiel  is  in  bad  condition  all  parts  should  be  thor- 
oughly sand  papered  with  No.  2£  sand  paper,  be  given  a  coat  of  paint, 
and  be  permitted  to  dry  for  at  least  24  hours;  then  sand  paper  with 
No.  00  sand  paper,  apply  a  finishing  coat,  and  permit  the  parts  to  dry 
thoroughly  before  use. 

In  general,  two  coats  of  paint  per  year  will  be  sufficient  to  keep_ 
the  materiel  in  good  condition.  After  repeated  painting  the  paint 
may  become  so  thick  as  to  scale  off  in  places  or  give  an  unsightly 
appearance.     It  may  then  be  removed  for  repainting,  as  follows: 

Dissolve  1  pound  of  concentrated  lye,  powdered  form,  in  6  pints 
of  hot  water,  and  slake  in  enough  lime  to  give  the  solution  the  con- 
sistency of  paint.  Use  the  solution  freshly  mixed  and  apply  to  the 
parts  where  paint  is  to  be  removed  with  a  brush  or  with  waste  tied 
to  the  end  of  a  stick.  When  the  solution  begins  to  dry  on  the  surface 
use  a  scraper  to  remove  the  old  paint,  and  complete  the  cleaning  of 
the  surface  with  cloth  and  water.  If  one  application  is  not  sufficient 
to  loosen  the  paint,  apply  a  second  coat.  Before  painting  wash  the 
surface  with  sal-soda  water,  rinse  with  (dean  water,  and  t lien  wipe 
thoroughly,  as  described  above. 

OILS     FOB     Airni.l.LKY     MATKKIEL. 

For  the  service,  cleaning,  and  preservation  of  this  materiel  the 
Ordnance  Department  issues  hydroline  oil,  lubricating  oil  (or  engine 
oil  No.  1),  clock  oil,  sperm  oil,  coal  oil,  neat's-foot  oil,  and  light  slush- 
ing oil.  Each  of  these  oils  is  suited  for  the  particular  purpose  for 
which  it  is  issued,  as  stated  below,  and  care  should  be  taken  that  it 
is  not  used  for  other  purposes. 

The  hydroline  oil  is  for  use  in  the  recoil  cylinders  of  the  carriages 
and  for  no  other  purpose. 

The  lubricating  oil  (or  engine  oil  No.  1)  will  be  used  exclusively 
in  all  oil  holes  of  the  materiel,  and  in  lubricating  such  parts  as 
wheels  and  axles,  gun  and  cradle  slides,  pintle  bearing,  elevating 
and  traversing  mechanisms,  exterior  of  cylinders,  brake  bearings, 
hinges,  different  surfaces  of  breechblocks,  threads  of  breech  recess,  etc. 

Clock  oil  should  be  used  on  the  spindle  and  all  bearings  of  the 
battery  commander's  telescope,  bearings  of  the  panoramic  sight, 
and  fuze  setters,  and  on  the  observation  telescope,  field  artillery 
plotter,  sextant  telemeter,  and  worms  of  the  rear  sight.  In  all  cases 
clock  oil  should  only  be  used  when  the  instruments  mentioned  are 
disassembled  for  cleaning.  When  used  it  should  be  applied  by 
dropping  from  the  end  of  the  dropper  attached  to  the  end  of  the  cork. 


124 

The  sperm  oil  is  a  lighter  lubricant  than  the  engine  oil  No.  1,  and 
may  be  used  on  the  gears  of  sights,  fuze  setters,  parts  of  revolvers, 
etc.;  engine  oil  No.  1  may  also  be  used  on  such  parts. 

Coal  oil  is  used  by  the  Ordnance  Department  for  cleaning  pur- 
poses. In  the  field  it  may  be  used  for  lanterns.  Coal  oil  for  general 
illuminating  purposes  is  furnished  by  the  Quartermaster's  Depart- 
ment. 

Neat's-foot  oil  is  used  for  the  care  and  preservation  of  all  leather 
equipment,  and  should  be  applied  as  directed  on  page  101. 

Light  slushing  oil  is  prescribed  for  use  in  the  protection  and  preser- 
vation of  all  bright  or  unpainted  surfaces  of  steel  or  iron  on  ah  parts 
of  the  equipment  when  the  materiel  is  to  remain  unused  for  any 
appreciable  length  of  time.  Its  use  as  a  lubricant  for  mobile  artillery 
is  forbidden.  Before  applying  the  slushing  oil  to  any  surface,  the 
part  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned,  so  as  to  be  free  from  rust,  water, 
coal  oil,  lubricant  oil,  etc.,  as  their  presence  will  cause  rusting  under 
the  slushing  oil.  The  slushing  oil  should  then  be  applied  in  a  thin, 
uniform  coat,  since  this  is  ALL  that  is  necessaiy  to  give  good  protec- 
tion. Except  in  very  cold  weather  it  can  be  applied  by  using  a  paint 
brush  as  when  painting;  in  cold  weather  it  should  be  applied  by 
stippling — that  is,  lightly  tapping  the  surface  with  the  end  of  the 
sash  tool,  held  with  bristles  perpendicular  to  the  surface  to  be  cov- 
ered. It  can  be  applied  to  the  bores  of  gun  by  the  slush  brush  issued 
for  the  purpose.  In  cold  weather  it  should  be  warmed  before  use  for 
coating  the  bores  of  gun.  It  may  be  readily  removed  by  the  use  of 
burlap  or  waste  dipped  in  coal  oil. 

REPAIRS    FOR    FIELD    ARTILLERY    MATERIEL    ISSUED    TO    THE    UNITED 
STATES   ARMY   AND  THE   NATIONAL    GUARD. 

Instructions  relative  to  making  repairs  to  field  batteries  and  fur- 
nishing ordnance  stores  and  supplies  for  them  will  be  found  in  the 
General  Orders  issued  by  the  War  Department  from  time  to  time. 

Instructions  in  reference  to  the  care,  use,  and  repair  of  delicate 
instruments,  such  as  sights,  telescopes,  and  range  finders,  will  be 
found  in  General  Orders,  No.  47,  War  Department,  Washington, 
March  24,  1905,  and  in  O.  O.  pamphlet,  Form  No.  1795. 


INSTRUCTIONS    FOR   RIVETING. 

Whenever  a  rivet  is  broken,  loose,  or  needs  replacing  for  any  reason 
the  rivets  should  be  heated  to  a  light  yellow  (just  below  white)  color. 
They  may  be  heated  in  the  forges  furnished  with  the  battery  equip- 
ment or  in  a  permanent  blacksmith's  forge.  While  heating  keep  the 
rivets  covered  with  coals  in  order  to  prevent  scaling.  Rivets  one- 
fourth  inch  and  less  in  diameter  may  be  driven  cold  when  it  is  im- 


125 

practicable  to  heat  them.  Drive  them  hot,  however,  when  prac- 
ticable. Drive  all  rivets  greater  than  one-fourth  inch  in  diameter 
hot  in  all  cases.  Do  not  overheat  or  burn  the  rivets.  Remove  all 
scale  from  rivets  after  heating  and  before  driving.  Drive  the  rivets 
home  with  a  hammer  before  attempting  to  form  the  head.  Hold 
rivets  solidly  in  place  with  a  sledge,  crowbar,  and  fulcrum,  railroad 
iron  or  similar  heavy  piece  of  steel.  Partially  form  the  head  with  the 
face  and  peen  end  of  a  hammer.  When  the  head  is  practically  formed 
by  this  operation  use  a  rivet  set  for  final  forming  of  the  head.  The 
rivet  set  is  only  for  this  final  operation.  Loose  rivets  will  result  if 
they  are  not  peened  down  with  a  hammer  before  the  rivet  set  is  used. 
The  rivets  must  be  held  solidly  in  place  while  the  riveting  is  being 
done,  otherwise  loose  rivets  result. 

Before  starting  to  heat  the  rivets  the  pieces  to  be  riveted  should  be 
carefully  fitted  and  bolted  together.  If  the  holes  in  the  two  pieces 
are  not  in  perfect  alignment  the  cause  should  be  determined  and 
rectified  instead  of  attempting  to  drift  the  pieces  into  alignment. 
If  necessary  for  perfect  alignment  a  slight  amount  of  reaming  or  filing 
will  be  permitted.  In  no  case  should  a  rivet  hole  be  reamed  larger 
than  about  one  sixty-fourth  inch  in  excess  of  the  diameter  of  the  rivet. 
On  account  of  inaccessibility  it  is  sometimes  difficult  to  insert  a  rivet. 
In  such  cases  it  may  be  inserted  with  a  twisted  stiff  wire  or  with  a 
small  wooden  stick  split  at  the  end  to  hold  the  rivet.  Arrangements 
must  be  made  beforehand  to  back  up  or  hold  the  rivet  in  place  the 
instant  it  is  located  in  order  that  it  may  not  have  cooled  too  much 
for  proper  riveting.  Hot  riveting  is  preferable  to  cold  riveting  as  the 
head  is  more  easily  formed  when  hot  and  the  contraction  of  the  rivet 
in  cooling  gives  a  tighter  fit. 

SUGGESTIONS    FOR   CARE   AND   MAINTENANCE   OF   MATERIEL. 

Various  suggestions  in  reference  to  the  care  of  this  materiel  and 
hints  regarding  things  to  be  done  or  to  be  avoided  are  scattered 
throughout  the  text  of  this  handbook;  some  of  the  more  important 
are  here  condensed  for  more  convenient  reference.  Careful  compli- 
ance with  these  suggestions  will  avoid  delay  and  possible  injury  to 
personnel  or  materiel. 

The  breechblock  should  not  be  opened  for  at  least  one  minute 
after  a  misfire. 

All  work  upon  recoil  cylinders,  sights,  and  other  optical  equip- 
ment should  be  done  in  the  presence  of  a  commissioned  officer. 

The  recoil  cylinder  should  never  be  clamped  in  a  vise,  but  when 
necessary  to  hold  it  from  turning,  a  spanner  applied  to  front  end  of 
cylinder  should  be  used. 

Never  remove  the  spring-rod  nuts  when  the  piece  is  at  an  elevation. 


12G 

See  that  proper  kind  of  oil  is  used  in  cylinders  and  for  lubrication. 

Strain  the  oil  used  in  filling  the  cylinders  through  a  fine,  clean  cloth, 
and  be  sure  that  the  receptacles  used  in  handling  the  oil  are  clean. 

Take  every  precaution  to  keep  the  interior  of  the  cylinders  clean 
and  to  prevent  the  entrance  of  foreign  particles. 

All  unpainted  surfaces  should  be  kept  clean  and  free  from  rust,  but 
in  no  case  is  a  polish  required. 

In  assembling  the  gland,  be  sure  that  at  least  six  threads  of  the 
gland  are  engaged  with  the  threads  of  the  stuffing  box. 

Lash  parts  with  copper  wire  to  prevent  unscrewing. 

Before  firing,  inspect  to  insure  that  cylinders  are  properly  closed 
and  that  the  piston-rod  and  spring-rod  nuts  are  in  place. 

If  time  permits,  oil  slides  before  firing. 

If  the  gun  fails  to  return  fully  into  battery,  except  when  caused 
by  expansion  of  oil,  it  is  probably  due  (1)  to  dirt  on  slides  and  guides; 

(2)  to  cutting  of  sliding  surfaces  on  account  of  dirt  and  lack  of  oil; 

(3)  to  gland  being  screwed  up  too  tight;  (4)  to  dirt  or  foreign 
particle  in  the  cylinder,  and  especially  in  the  counter-recoil  buffer 
recess;  (5)  to  weakness  of  springs.  Ninety  per  cent  of  such  cases 
will  be  found  due  to  (1),  (2),  or  (3). 

To  relieve  the  elevating  and  traversing  mechanisms,  the  cradle 
should  be  locked  when  traveling.  A  definite  rule  can  not  be  given 
as  to  when  the  traveling  lock  should  be  used.  The  object  of  the 
traveling  lock  is  to  permit  the  gun  to  be  retracted  from  its  firing  posi- 
tion, thereby  relieving  the  carriage  axle  and  wheels  of  some  of  the 
weight  and  transmitting  it  to  the  carriage  limber. 

In  view  of  the  fact,  however,  that  with  the  gun  in  this  position  the 
weight  at  the  spade  is  excessive  for  limbering  and  unlimbering,  the 
discretion  of  the  battery  commander  should  determine  when  the  gun 
should  be  pulled  back.  For  long  marches  and  where  the  drills  would 
not  require  unlimbering,  the  gun  should  be  invariably  placed  in  the 
traveling  position. 

The  set  of  large  covers  now  issued  should  be  used  whenever  the 
gun  is  pulled  back  into  the  traveling  position. 

After  unlimbering,  release  elevating  and  traverse  lock  before 
attempting  to  elevate  or  traverse  gun. 

The  length  of  the  recoil  of  the  gun  during  firing  should  be  carefully 
observed  to  see  that  the  recoil  mechanism  is  working  properly. 

For  satisfactory  action  of  the  recoil-controlling  parts  it  is  necessary 
that  the  cylinder  be  filled  with  oil  in  the  exact  method  previously 
given  and  that  the  parts  be  kept  scrupulously  clean. 

Close  down  the  ends  of  the  recoil  indicator  guide  to  avoid  loss  of 
the  indicator. 

If  the  elevating  screws  do  not  house  in  traveling,  they  are  incor- 
rectly assembled. 


127 

Keep  hub  bolts  and  hub  bands  proporly  tightened. 

To  tighten  hub  bands,  screw  them  as  tightly  as  possible  with  the 
wrench  and  then  force  them  farther  by  striking  the  end  of  the  wrench 
with  a  hammer. 

Tires  on  wheels  should  be  reset  as  soon  as  the  wheels  have  lost  their 
initial  dish  given  by  shrinkage.  In  order  to  determine  when  this  dish 
is  lost  without  waiting  for  the  felloe  and  spokes  to  actually  become 
loose,  the  following  method  should  be  used : 

Place  a  straightedge  across  the  wheel,  resting  on  the  felloe  and 
passing  near  the  hub  flange.  Measure  the  distance  from  the  straight- 
edge to  a  spoke  near  the  felloe  and  one  near  the  hub  box.  If  the 
difference  in  these  two  distances  is  less  than  three-sixteenths  of  an 
inch  the  tire  should  be  reset. 

Cold-set  tires  are  much  inferior  to  hot-set  tires  in  that  the  dish  given 
by  the  setting  of  the  tire  is  lost  much  more  rapidly  when  cold  set. 
Cold  setting  should  therefore  be  resorted  to  only  when  it  is  impracti- 
cable to  have  the  tires  hot  set. 

Do  not  permit  brake  levers  to  be  released  by  a  kick  or  a  blow. 

Prevent  possible  injury  to  cannoneers  by  causing  them  to  stand 
clear  of  the  counter-recoil  spring  column  in  assembling  or  dis- 
mounting. 

In  moving  the  gun  on  or  off  the  cradle,  provide  ample  support  for 
the  breech  end,  so  that  the  gun  clips  are  in  prolongation  of  the  cradle 
guides;  if  this  is  not  done,  the  cradle  guides  may  be  ruined. 

Do  not  strike  any  metal  part  directly  with  a  hammer;  interpose  a 
buffer  of  wood  or  copper. 

Frequently  verify  the  adjustment  of  sights. 

Require  special  care  in  handling  sights. 

Be  sure  that  the  range  disk  of  the  quadrant  and  the  range  strip  of 
the  rear-sight  shank  is  graduated  for  the  particular  type  of  ammuni- 
tion used  by  the  battery. 

Do  not  unnecessarily  expose  ammunition  to  the  sun  or  load  it  into 
a  warm  gun  before  time  for  firing;  if  this  is  done,  erratic  shooting 
may  result. 

Battery  commanders  should  frequently  make  a  detailed  inspection 
of  all  of  the  vehicles  in  the  battery  to  see  if  any  parts  of  them  are 
broken  and  any  nuts,  screws,  split  pins,  etc.,  missing.  If  any  such 
defects  are  found,  he  should  immediately  take  steps  to  replace  broken 
or  missing  parts.  This  is  of  the  utmost  importance,  and  compliance 
with  these  instructions  will  do  much  toward  prolonging  the  life  of 
the  vehicles. 

It  has  been  found  that  the  apron  hinges  occasionally  become 
broken,  and  that  the  apron-hinge  pins  are  frequently  lost.  When- 
ever this  happens  the  hinges  or  hinge  pins  should  be  immediately 


128 

replaced,  for  if  this  is  not  done  the  apron,  which  is  a  very  expensive 
piece,  is  apt  to  become  cracked  or  broken. 

Whenever  the  lunettes  become  loosened  the  lunette  nuts  should  at 
once  be  tightened  up. 

All  wheels  and  pintle  bearings  should  be  frequently  oiled. 

All  nuts  are  secured  by  split  pins,  which  should  be  replaced  and 
properly  opened  when  nuts  are  screwed  home. 

All  working  and  bearing  surfaces  of  the  carriage  require  oiling. 
Those  not  directly  accessible  for  this  purpose  are  provided  with  oil 
holes  closed  by  spring  covers  or  handy  oilers. 

Smokeless  'powder  must  not  he  used  j or  hlank  cartridges. 

See  that  fuzes  are  set  at  safety  for  transport. 

Use  the  small  primer-inserting  press  for  inserting  primers  in  car- 
tridge cases  and  the  decapping  tools  provided  for  removing  old 
primers. 

In  all  requisitions  and  correspondence  the  correct  name  of  the 
part  referred  to  (if  known)  should  be  given.  If  the  name  of  the  part 
is  not  known,  submit  a  sketch  showing  the  location,  shape,  materiel, 
etc.,  sufficient  to  establish  definitely  the  identity  of  the  parts  in 
question. 

The  use  of  the  word  "complete"  in  requisitions  to  signify  a  com- 
bination of  parts  sometimes  leads  to  misunderstanding  of  the  exact 
parts  wanted.  The  tables  of  nomenclature  of  parts  have  been 
arranged  to  show  the  parts  included  under  the  terms  "one  trail, 
complete;  one  wheel,  complete,"  etc.,  and  should  be  carefully  studied 
before  requisitions  are  made  out,  to  insure  that  all  the  parts  wanted 
are  included  and  duplications  avoided.  For  example,  if  a  piston 
rod  is  wanted  the  order  should  state  whether  it  is  to  be  with  or  with- 
out the  nut.  If  all  details  are  itemized,  it  will  avoid  mistakes  and 
unnecessary  expense. 

SUPPLIES    IN    GENERAL. 

All  bits,  both  curb  and  snaffle,  are  made  of  27  per  cent  nickel  steel, 
a  practically  noncorrosive  metal. 

The  olive-drab  saddle  blanket  is  regulation  for  all  arms  of  the 
service. 

The  supply  of  ammunition  to  be  kept  on  hand  in  a  4.7-inch  gun 
battery  will  be  a  sufficient  amount  to  fill  all  the  ammunition  chests 
of  the  equipment,  and  in  addition  a  sufficient  number  of  rounds  to 
cover  the  needs  for  annual  target  practice. 

Pistol  arm  racks  are  issued  for  use  of  Field  Artillery  in  such  number 
as  may  be  required  to  hold  the  pistols  on  hand  in  the  battery.  Each 
pistol  arm  rack  holds  80  pistols. 


129 

The  allowance  of  electric  flashlights  for  each  battery  and  their 
apportionment  amongst  the  personnel  is  as  follows: 

5  with  hoods: 

1  for  the  chief  of  the  fifth  section. 

4  to  equip  each  gunner. 
16  without  hoods: 

1  for  the  battery  commander. 

1  for  the  reconnaissance  officer. 

2  to  equip  each  chief  of  platoon  in  the  firing  battery. 
4  to  equip  each  chief  of  gun  section. 

4  to  equip  each  No.  3  in  the  gun  sections. 
4  to  equip  each  No.  1  in  the  gun  sections. 

In  addition  3  flashlights  with  hoods  are  issued  to  each  regimental 
and  battalion  headquarters  for  use  with  instruments  and  range 
finders. 

Such  articles  as  may  be  needed  for  training  the  horse — the  cavesson, 
longing  rein,  running  rein,  etc. — may  be  readily  made  up  by  the 
battery  saddler  from  supplies  furnished  by  the  Ordnance  Department. 

For  the  training  of  enlisted  men  leather  heads  and  wooden  stands 
for  supporting  them  will  be  needed.  The  saddler  and  the  carpenter 
will  be  able  to  supply  these  by  means  of  the  tools  in  the  forge  limber 
and  battery  wagon. 

A  reloading  and  cleaning  outfit  for  4.7-inch  guns  for  removing 
fired  primers  from  and  cleaning  cartridge  cases  and  for  reloading 
blank  ammunition  is  furnished  to  each  battery. 

METHOD  OF  LOADING  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY  FOR 
TRANSPORTATION    BY    RAIL. 

The  flat  cars  usually  obtained  from  railroad  companies  vary  in 
length  from  34  to  44  feet.     Cars  longer  than  42  feet  are  unusual. 

In  loading  a  battery  on  cars  during  service  operations  it  is  very 
desirable  to  keep  complete  gun  sections  together  as  much  as  possible. 
Pursuing  this  idea,  a  4.7-inch  gun  battery  on  war  footing  may  be 
loaded  as  follows,  when  cars  at  least  38  feet  long  are  obtained: 

Four  cars,  each  to  contain: 

1  4.7-inch  gun  and  carriage. 

1  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  limber. 

2  4.7-inch  gun  limbers. 
2  4.7-inch  gun  caissons. 

One  car  to  contain: 

1  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  battery  wagon. 

1  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  forge  limber. 

2  4.7-inch  gun  limbers. 
2  4.7-inch  gun  caissons. 


130 


One  car  to  contain: 


1  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  store  wagon. 

1  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  store  limber 

2  4.7-inch  gun  limbers. 
2  4.7-inch  gun  caissons. 

A  4.7-inch  gun  battery  on  peace  footing  may  be  loaded  as  follows , 
when  cars  at  least  38  feet  long  are  obtained: 
Four  cars,  each  to  contain: 

1  4.7-inch  gun  and  carriage. 

1  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  limber. 

2  4.7-inch  gun  limbers. 
2  4.7-inch  gun  caissons. 

One  car  to  contain: 

1  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  battery  wagon. 
1  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  store  wagon. 
1  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  forge  limber. 
1  4.7-inch  gun  and  6-inch  howitzer  store  limber. 

This  car  will  be  only  about  three-quarters  filled  if  a  38-foot  car 
is  procured.  The  additional  space  may  be  utilized  as  the  battery 
commander  sees  fit. 

If  cars  less  than  38  feet  long  are  obtained,  one  limber  or  one  caisson 
will  have  to  be  omitted.  If  cars  44  feet  long  are  obtained,  one  addi- 
tional limber  or  caisson  can  be  loaded  on  each. 

In  loading  the  cars,  if  there  is  any  permanent  loading  platform 
along  the  railroad  tracks  in  the  vicinity,  the  vehicles  should  be  run 
onto  these  platforms  and  loaded  from  them.  If  there  is  no  permanent 
platform  in  the  vicinity,  it  will  be  necessary  to  build  a  temporary 
ramp.  This  should  be  built  at  the  end  of  the  cars.  When  loading 
vehicles  from  a  permanent  platform  on  the  side  of  the  cars  it  may 
be  necessary,  if  short  cars  are  obtained,  to  remove  the  pole  of  the 
last  limber  placed  on  the  car  in  order  to  get  it  onto  the  car.  The  pole 
should,  however,  be  replaced  in  its  socket  as  soon  as  the  vehicle  is 
placed  in  position. 

When  loading  the  cars,  care  must  be  exercised  to  load  them  so 
that  there  can  be  no  movement  of  the  vehicles  on  the  cars  longitudi- 
nally, transversely,  or  vertically.  All  wheels  and  trails  of  carriages, 
poles  of  limbers,  lunettes  of  caissons  and  wagons  must  be  secured 
to  the  bottom  of  the  car.     The  vehicles  are  secured  as  follows: 

3  by  4  inch  timbers  nailed  to  the  floor  of  the  cars  on  both  sides  of 
all  the  wheels  hold  the  wheels  securely  against  transverse  motion. 

3  by  4  inch  chocks  nailed  to  the  4  by  4  inch  pieces  which  lie  along 
the  sides  of  the  wheels  hold  the  wheels  against  longitudinal  motion 
on  the  cars. 

3  by  4  inch  timbers,  placed  over  the  felloes,  resting  on  the  floor 
between  the  two  lowest  spokes   and  bolted  to  the  floor  of  the  car 


131 

with  two  i-inch  bolts,  hold  the  wheels  against  vertical  motion. 
The  bolts  should  preferably  be  bolted  through  these  braces  on  the 
outside  of  the  wheels.  If  bolts  for  bolting  these  3  by  4  inch  cross- 
pieces  can  not  be  obtained,  the  crosspieces  should  be  nailed  down 
with  7  or  8  inch  spikes.  The  poles  and  lunettes  should  be  secured 
to  the  floor  by  nailing  one  3  by  4  inch  block  on  both  sides  of  each 
and  one  3  by  4  inch  piece  across  the  top  near  the  end  of  the  poles 
or  lunettes. 

The  trails  should  be  secured  to  the  floor  by  nailing  3  by  4  inch 
blocks  as  follows : 

1  on  each  side  of  the  trail. 

1  at  the  end  of  the  trail  in  prolongation  of  the  axis,  and 

1  across  the  top  near  the  end. 

All  of  the  lumber  used  on  the  cars  is  3  by  4  inch  stock.  To  load 
a  4.7-inch  gun  battery  on  war  footing  will  require  1,100  linear  feet 
of  3  by  4  inch  lumber,  a  battery  on  peace  footing  will  require  920 
linear  feet. 

For  carrying  all  harness  and  all  accessories  of  the  vehicles  which 
are  not  carried  in  compartments  of  these  vehicles  or  rigidly  attached 
to  them,  one  box  car  should  be  obtained.  The  material  in  this  box 
car  should  be  packed  in  boxes  if  on  hand.  In  case  no  box  car 
can  be  obtained,  all  of  the  harness,  etc.,  should  be  packed  in  boxes 
and  placed  on  the  flat  cars  near  the  vehicles.  These  boxes  must  be 
securely  fastened  to  the  floor  to  prevent  them  from  falling  off  of 
the  cars  or  from  striking  and  injuring  the  vehicles. 


EQUIPMENT. 

The  following  table  sets  forth  the  total  equipment  of  one  4.7-inch 
gun  battery  on  war  footing.  The  right-hand  column  shows  in  gen- 
eral where  each  article  should  be  carried,  but  the  battery  commander 
may  use  his  discretion  as  to  the  disposition  of  many  articles  for 
which  no  particular  fitting  or  receptacle  is  provided. 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY. 


War 
footing 
(4  guns 

and 
^cais- 
sons). 


Article. 


Where  carried. 


WHEELED  MATERIEL. 


Guns  and  gun  carriages 
Gun-carriage  limbers  . . . 

Caisson  limbers , 

Caissons , 

Forge  limber , 

Battery  wagon 

Store  limber 

Store  wagon , 


GUN  AND  GUN-CARRIAGE  ACCESSORIES. 


Bar  screw  drivers 

Breech  covers 

Covers  for  guns 

(overs  for  front  sights 

Cover  for  rear-sight  brackets 

Covers  for  rear-sight  shanks 

Dust  guards  for  wheels 

Elevating-gear  covers 

Hand  fuze  setters  with  cases 

Horizontal  oilers,  model  of  1913 

Lanyards 

Leather  pouches  for  spare  parts 

Muzzle  covers 

Oil-can  boxes 

Spanner  wrenches,  cylinder  head,  and  stuffing- 
box  gland. 

Sponges  and  rammers 

Sponge  covers 

3-pound  spools,  No.  20  annealed   bare    copper 

\\  iro. 
Tool  kits,  each  containing— 

1  cross  peen  hammer. 

1  large  bronze  drift. 

1  pliers  (wire  cutting). 

1  ranee  quadrant  wrench. 

1  right-ancle  screw  driver. 

1  screw  slot  wrench  and  blade. 

1  small  bronze  drift. 

1  small  punch. 

1  0.75-ineh  cold  chisel,  8  Inches  long. 

1  6-inch ,  3-square,  dead  smooth  fllo. 

1  8-inch  hand  smooth  file. 

1  10-inch  screw  driver. 

W  renches,  wheel  hub  and  pintle  yoke , 

Wrenches,  0.375  inch  and  0.5  inch 

Wrenches.  0.625  inch  and  0.875  inch 

Wrenches,  0.75  inch  and  I  inch 

Wrenches.  1.12^  inches  and  1.5  Inches 

Maneuvering  bar 


In  trail  tool  box 

On  guns 

On  gun  in  traveling  position . 

On  sights 


On  wheels 

On  elevating  gears. 

In  trail  boxes 

In  oil-can  boxes... 
In  trail  toolbox... 

do 

On  guns 

In  trail  toolbox... 
do 


On  trails... 
On  sponges. 


In  trail  tool  box 


On  trail 


Property 

classification. 


Class. 


IV 


IV 


IV 


tion. 


(132) 


133 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY- 

Continued. 


War 
footing 
(4  guns 

and 
12  cais- 
sons). 


Article. 


SPARE    PARTS   FOR   GUNS   AND    GUN   CARRIAGES. 


{For  guns.) 


Block  latches 

Block-latch  springs 

Firing  pins 

Firing-pin  springs 

Firing-spring  sleeves 

Handy  oilers 

Hinge-nin  catches 

Lever-latch  springs 

Locking  bolts,  nuts,  and  pins 

Locking-bolt  springs 

Sears 

Tray-latch  springs 

Trigger-shaft  detents 

Breech  mechanism,   complete,   including  block 
carrier  and  loading  tray. 

(For fuze  setters.) 


Where  carried. 


In  leather  pouch  for  spare 
parts. 


Range-ring  screws 

Stop -pin  screws 

Guide-plate  screws. . . 
Corrector-scale  screws. 

Range  indices 

Index  plungers 

Index  springs 

Oil-hole  screws 

Inde  x-bar  screws 


In  spare  breech  mechanism 
chest  in  battery  wagon. 


1  In  leather  pouch  for  spare 
j     paits 


In  leather  pouches  for  spare 
parts. 


( For  carriages. ) 


Apron-latch  (body)  pin  with  split  pin [  "  u"; 

Apron-latch  spring J 

Brake  lever  with  catch  and  spring  bracket. 


In  compartment   K,  store 
wagon. 

Brake-lever  springs 

Brake-rod  pins 

Brake-rod  spring 

Brake-segment  rack  with  bolts 


Brake  shoes . 


Brake-shoe  pins . 


Counter  recoil  springs,  inner 

Counter  recoil  springs,  middle 

Counter  recoil  springs,  outer 

Cylinder  cover  hinge  pins,  with  split  pins 

Cylinder  cover  swine  bolts  with  pins  and  nuts 

Elevating  and  traveling  lock  bolt  spring 

Elevating  screw  cover  with  split  pin 

Elevating  screw  cover  with  springs 

Elevating  pin 

Extension  rail  pins  with  split  puis 

Extension  rail  plunger  springs 

E  xtension  rail  latch  springs 

Filling  and  drain  plugs  (cylinder) 

Firing  mechanism,  complete 

Garlock's  waterproof  packing,  0.375  ring 


^In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 
chest,  store  wagon. 
5  inches  each,  leather  pouch 

for  spare  parts. 
In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 
In   compartment   H,  store 
wagon. 

Handy  oilers,  0.312  (A)  inch jUn  miscellaneous  spare  parts 

Handy  oilers,  0.375  inch /    chest,  store  wagon. 

»  Parts  required  by  batteries  having  carriages  with  serial  numbers  1  to  40,  inclusive, 
»  Parts  required  by  batteries  having  carriages  with  serial  numbers  above  40  only. 


Handle  return  spring 

Handspikes,  complete,  2  right,  2 left. 


In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 
chest,  store  wagon. 

In  compartment  E,  store 
wagon. 

In  compartment  O,  store 
wagon. 

In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 
chest,  store  wagon. 

In  compartments  Q  and  H, 
battery  wagon,  and  com- 
partment G,  store  wagon. 


In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 
chest,  store  wagon. 


Pro] 


operty 
incatioi 


IV 


Sec- 
tion. 


only. 


134 


STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY— 

Continued . 


War 
footing 
(4  guns 

and 
12  cais- 
sons). 

Article. 

Where  carried. 

Property 
classification. 

Class. 

Sec- 
tion. 

2 

1 

SPARE    PARTS    FOR    GUNS    AND    GUN    CARRIAGES— 

continued. 
( For  carriages)— Continued. 
Hub  liners 

Lock  washer 

Recoil  cylinder  lock  catch  and  lock  pin 

In  compartment  A,   store 
wagon. 

Tn  miscellaneous  spare  parts 
chest,  store  wagon. 

In  compartment  K,  store 

wagon. 
\Tn  miscellaneous  spare  parts 
|    chest,  store  wagon. 
In  compartment  K,  store 

wawn. 
In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 
Un  compartment   H,   store 
f    wagon. 

lln  miscellaneous  spare  parts 
chest,  store  wagon. 

On  battery  wagon,  the  two 
hub  caps  in  compartment 
H,  battery  wagon. 

In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 
chest,  store  wagon. 

Carried  equally  in  the  leather 
pouches  for  spare  parts. 

IV 

1 

50 

1 

Shaft  return  spring 

1 
i  13 

2  10 
22 

220 

Spade-edge  rivets 

do ^ 

Spade  points 

Spade-point,  rivets 

1 

12 
2 
2 

Spring  covers,  No.  1,  with  screws  and  washers.. 

Top  shield  brace  pins,  with  chains 

Top  shield  fastening  pins,  with  split  pins 

1 

Traversing  nut .".*.... *....*. 

1 

Trip  latch  spring 

2 

Wheels,  complete 

2 

Wheel  fastenings,  complete 

1 

Set,  crown  nuts,  standard,  consisting  of— 

24  0.375  inch  bv  16  threads 

26  0.5  inch  bv  13  threads 

52  0.625  inch  bv  11  threads 

36  0.75  inch  bv  10  threads 

6  0.875  inch  by  9  threads 

2  1.25  inches  by  7  threads 

21.5  inches  bv  6  threads 

2 12  0.5  inch  bv  13  threads 

3 

1 

Set,  crown  nuts,  special,  consisting  of — 

4  0.625  inch  bv  11  threads 

8  1  inch  bv  8  threads 

4  1.125  inches  bv  12  threads 

2  1.625  inches  bv  10  threads 

1 

Set,  hexagon  nuts,  standard,  consisting  of— 2  0.19 
inch  bv  30  threads 

1 

Set,  hexagon  nuts,  special,  consisting  of— 

2  0.187  (^)  inch  bv  26 threads,  F.  A.  standard. . 
2  0.242  inch  by  0.24  threads 

2  0.375  inch  by  16  threads 

1 

Set,  split  pins,  consisting  of— 

4  0.046  (A)  inch  by  0.312  (ft)  inch 

4  0.062  (ft)  inch  bv  0.562  (ft)  inch 

13  0.093  (ft)  inch  by  0.5  inch 

5  0.093  (ft)  inch  by  0.75  inch 

40  0.093  (A)  inch  bv  1  inch 

4  0.125  inch  by  0.75  inch 

8  0.125  inch  bv  1  inch 

60  0.125  inch  by  1.25  inches 

20  0.125  inch  bv  1.5  inches 

10  0.156  (^)  inch  by  1  inch 

90  0.156  (^)  inch  by  1.5  inches 

20  0.156  (ft)  inch  by  1.75  inches 

2  0.203  (^)inchbv  1.5  inches 

3  0.203  ( tf)  inch  bv  2  inches 

4  0.203  (||)  inch  by  2.25  inches 

15  0.203  (U)  inch  by  2.5  inches 

2  0.25  inch  bv  1.25  inches 

2  0.25  inch  by  1 .75  inches 

2  0.25  inch  by  2  inches 

2  0.25  inch  by  2.75  inches 

2  0.25  inch  bv  3  inches 

8  0.062  (ft)  by  1.125  inches 

20  0.25  inch  by  3.5  inches 

i  Parts  required  by  batteries  having  carriages  with  serial  numbers  1  to  40,  inclusive,  only. 
2  Parts  required  by  batteries  having  carriages  with  serial  numbers  above  40  only. 


135 


STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY— 

Continued. 


Article. 


TOOLS   AND    ACCESSORIES   FOE   GUN    CARRIAGE 
LIMBERS. 


Where  carried. 


Cyclometer  and  tally  pin On  one  of  the  four  limbers. 

I  Mist  guards  for  wheels On  wheels. 


Watering  buckets \n„  ,.,     ,, 

Pole  prop JOn  limbers. 

Neck  voke,  complete I~    limK«, 

Pin  letrce,  complete JOn  limber. 


Straps do 


SPARE  PARTS  FOR  GUN  CARRIAGE  UMBERS. 

Doubletree  pivot  and  nut 

Doubletree  hooks  with  screws  and  nuts 

Hub  liner 

Lock  washer 

Singletree 

Wheel,  complete 


In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 
In  compartment  D,  store 

wagon. 
In  compartment  A,   store 

wagon. 
In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 
In  compartment  K,  store 

wagon. 
On  store  wagon,  the  hub  cap 

in  compartment  F,  store 

wagon. 
Wheel  fastening,  complete j  In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 

TOOLS  AND  ACCESSORIES  FOR  CAISSON  LIMBERS. 


Property 

classification. 


Class. 


Axes 

Cartridge  hooks 

Dust  guards  for  wheels 

Hatchets 

I  anterns 

I  antern-bracket  pads 

Paulins,  12  by  12  feet 

Pickaxes 

Picket  ropes 

Pole  props 

Short-handled  shovels 

Spanners  for  60-inch  wheels 

Wat  ering  buckets,  canvas 

Wrenches,  0.025  in^h  and  0.75  inch 

Neck  vokes,  complcto 1^„  n_»wM 

Singletrees/complete }On  limber 

Straps do 

Lantern  straps i  On  lantern  bracket 


On  top  of  chests 

On  left  side  of  chests 

On  wheels 

On  right  side  of  chests 

On  front  of  chests,  in  brackets 

In  bracket 

On  top  of  chests 

On  right  side  of  chests 

On  top  of  chests 

On  front  of  chests 

On  left  side  of  chests 

On  intermediate  plates 

On  front  of  chests 

do 


SPARK  PARTS  FOR  CAISSON  LIMBERS. 


Cartridge  hooks In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 
Doubletrees I  In  compartment   K,  store 

wagon. 
Doubletree  pins  and  nuts I  In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 
Doubletree  hooks In  compartment   K,   store 

wagon. 
Hub  caps,  complete 
Hub  liners 


do 
In  compartment   A,   store 

wagon. 
Limber-prop  chains i  In  compartment  G,  battery 

wagon. 
Lock  washers |  In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 
Neck  yokes In  compartment   K,  store 

wagon. 
Picket  rope. 


Pintle  bearing  bolts  with  1  nut  strip. 


In  compartment  A,  battery 

wagon. 
In  compartment  A,   store 
wagon. 

Padlocks,  chains,  clevises,  and  bolt  snaps In  miscellaneous  spare  parts 

chest,  store  wagon 
Pintle,  with  bearing,  complete 


Tintle  latch. 
10161—17- 


■12* 


In   compartment   A,    store 

wagon. 
In  compartment   K,   store 

wagon. 


IV 


IV 


IV 


IV 


IV 


IV 


Sec- 
tion. 


IV 

9 

IV 

3 

IV 

9 

IV 

3 

IV 

9 

IV 

3 

IV 

9 

IV 

3 

IV 

3 

136 


STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY— 

Continued. 


War 
footing 
(4  giuis 

and 
12  cais- 
sons). 


12 
12 
12 
24 
12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
24 
216 


Article. 


Where  carried. 


2 
2 

300 


3 


SPARE  PARTS  FOR  CAISSON  UMBERS— COn. 

Pintle-latch  springs In  miscellaneous  spare-parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 

Pintle  springs  with  bolts  and  nuts do 

Poles,  complete 1    under    battery    wagon, 

1  under  store  wagon. 

TillSiiltnhFir,^8 I  In  miscellaneous  spare-parts 

nubiatchpS??:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::}  <***,«****&>. 

Pole  props In  compartment   K,  store 

wagon. 

Singletrees do 

Wheel  hook In  compartment  H,  store 

wagon. 

Wheels,  complete 


Wheel  fastenings,  complete 

TOOLS    AND    ACCESSORIES    FOR    CAISSONS. 

Lantern  straps 

Axes 

Cartridge  hooks 

Dust  guards  for  wheels 

Hatchets 

Lanterns 

Lantern-bracket  pads 

Oil  cans 

Paulins,  12  by  12  feet 

Pick  mattocks 

Picket  ropes 

Shovels,  long-handled 

Watering  buckets,  canvas 

Straps 

SPARE  PARTS  FOR  CAISSON. 

Apron  hinges  with  pins 


Apron  latch,  complete 

Apron-latch  bases  with  washers. 

A pron-latch  spring 

Brake  levers,  with  catches 


Brake  shoes. 


Brake-shoe  pins 

Caisson  prop  with  chain  and  hook. 
Cartridge  hook 


Connecting  poles,  complete . 

Connecting-pole  keys 

Hub  liners 


3     Lock  washers . 


1     Lunette . 


Lunette  pins 

Padlocks,  chains,  etevises,  and  bolt  snaps. 
Pintle,  with  bearings,  complete 


Pintle  latch. 


Pintle-latch  springs. 


Pintle  springs  with  bolts  and  nuts. . . 
Pintle  bearing  bolts  with  1  nut  strip. 
Split  pins  (assorted) 

Wheels,  complete 

Wheel  fastenings,  complete 


1  I  Caisson-prop  chain  and  hook. 


1  on  store  wagon  with 
hub  cap  in  compartment 
H,  store  wagon,  and  1 
in  store  at  post. 

In  miscellaneous  spare-parts 
chest,  store  wagon. 


On  lantern  brackets 

On  top  of  chests 

On  left  side  of  chests 

On  wheels 

On  right  side  of  chests 

On  front  of  chests 

On  front  of  chests,  in  brackets  \ 


Pror 


Between  intermediate  plates 

On  top  of  chests 

On  right  side  of  chests 

On  t  >p  of  chests 

On  left  side  of  chests. . 
On  front  of  chests 


In  miscellaneous  spare-parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 

do 

do 

do 

In  compartment   K,  store 

wagon. 
In  compartment   G,  store 

wagon. 
In  miscellaneous  spare-parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 
In  compartment   K,  store 

wagon. 
In  miscellaneous  spare-parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 

On  caissons 

do 

In   compartment   A,   store 

wagon. 
In  miscellaneous  spare-parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 
Li   compartment  A,  store 

wagon. 
In  miscellaneous  spare-parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 

do 

In   compartment   A,  store 

wag.n. 
In  compartment  K,  store 

wagon. 
In  miscellaneous  spare-parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 

do 

do 

In  miscellaneous  spare-parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 

In  store  at  post 

In  miscellaneous  spare-parts 

chest,  store  wagon. 
do 


Note  —Batteries  having  the  wooden  pole  will  have  the  following  spare  parts:  Four  pole  bodies, 
plete:  2  pole  covers;  2  pole  ferrules,  complete;  8  pole  pads. 
Batteries  having  the  wooden  neck  yokes  will  have  8  spare  neck  yokes. 


♦137 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY- 

Continued. 


War 

footing 
(4  guns 

and 
12  cais- 
sons). 


Article. 


TOOLS  AND  ACCESSORIES  FOR  FORGE  LIMBER. 


Ax 

Dust  guards  for  wheels 

Grindstone,  with  frame,  complete 

Hatchet 

Hub-liner  driving  tool 

Lever  jacks 

Lantern  

Lantern-bracket,  pad 

Paulin,  12  by  12  feet 

Pickax 

Picket  rope 

Pole  prop , 

Rot  of  blacksmith's  tools 

Shovel,  short-handled 

Wrench  tor  grindstone 

Watering  buckets,  canvas 

Snatch  block  for  U-inchrope 

8-inch  d   uble  tackle  block 

150  feet  manila  rope,  1  inch 

' 

Sin<ietrees 

Straps 


Where  carried. 


On  left  side  of 

On  wheels 

In  chest 

On  right  side  of  chest 

In  chest 

In  lower  compartment 

On  front  of  chest,  in  bracket 

In  bracket 

On  top  of  chest 

On  right  side  of  chest 

In  chest 

Under  foot  rest 

In  chest 

On  left  side  of  chest 

With  grindstone 


.do. 


yoke  complete \0    limber 

trees,  complete jun  limner. 


Lantern  strap On  lantern  bracket 

TOOLS  AND  ACCESSORIES  FOR  BATTERY  WAGON.     ) 

Kssa.b^,:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::}'->>«t  for  spare  sights 

Carpenter's  chest  with  tools In  compartment  B,  battery 

wag<  n. 

Chest  for  duplex  chain  block In  compartment  A,  battery 

wagon. 

Chest  for  spare  breech  mechanism \       j_ 

Chest  f  r  spare  sights / 

Duplex  chain  block,  Y.  &  T.,  2-ton In  chest  in  compartment  A. . 

Dust  guards  for  wheels On  wheels 

Forge  coal  bag In  compartment  A,  battery 

wagon 

Paulin,  12  by  12  feet 


Property 
classification. 


Class. 


Retracting  eyes 

Saddler's  chest  with  tools . 


In  compartment  B,  battery  ' 

wagon. 
In  compartment  A,  battery 

wagon. 
In  compartment  B,  battery 


Spring  compressors,  No.  4 

Spare  wheel-hub  covers On  spare  wheels 

Testing  level  and  chest In  compartment  A,  battery 

wagon. 

Vise On  right  side  rail  of  wagon.. 

Water  buckets,  galvanized  steel In  compartment  A,  battery 

wagon. 

Chain  sline In  wagon 

Cleaning  track j do 

Vise  handle  strap ; 

Strap 


TOOLS  AND  ACCESSORIES  FOR  STORE  UMBER. 


On  left  side  of  chest 

On  wheels 

In  chest 

On  right  side  of  chest 

On  front  of  chest,  in  bracket 
In  bracket 


Ax 

Dust  guards  for  wheels 

Filling  funnels,  cylinder 

Hatchet 

Lantern 

Lantern-bracket  pad 

Oil  cans,  5  gallons ;  In  lower  compartment 

Oil  cans,  7.5  gallons In  rear  intermediate  section. 

Paulin,  12  by  12  feet On  tcp  of  chest 

Pickax On  right  side  of  chest 

Picket  rope |  In  forward  intermediate  com- 
partment. 

Pole  prop I  Under  foot  rest 

Shovel,  short-handled On  left  side  of  chest 

Watering  buckets,  canvas !  In  forward  intermediate  com- 
partment. 


Neck  yoke,  complete j\0n  ,imh.r 

Singletrees,  complete ,|On  limber. 


Straps. 

Lantern  strap :  On  lantern  bracket. 


IV 

IV 
IV 

IV 
X 
IV 

IV 

IV 
IV 

IV 

IV 


rv 
rv 

X 

IV 

rv 
rv 

IV 
IV 

rv 

IV 

rv 

IV 
IV 

IV 
IV 


tion. 


138 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY- 

Continued. 


War 
footing 
(4  guns 

and 
12  cat*- 
sons). 


no 
*  l 

2 

«1 

2 

2 


Article. 


TOOLS  AND  ACCESSORIES  FOR  STORE  WAGON. 


B  ol  os 

Bolo  scabbards 

Chest  for  miscellaneous  spare  parts 

Cleaning  material  and  small  stores  chest. 
Crowbar 


i  Dust  guard  for  wheels 

]  Marking  outfit  for  stamping  metal . . 
1  Marking  outfit  for  stamping  leather. 
1     Paulin,  12  by  12  feet 


Seal  stamp.. 
Slush  brush. 


Spare  staff  coupling  caps 

Spare  wheel  hub  covers 

Stencil  outfit 

Ordnance  Department  insignia  stencil. 


Where  carried. 


Property 
n  cation. 


classi 


Tn  compartment  A,  store 

wagon. 
Tn  compartment   B,  store 

wagon. 
In  compartment    G,   store 

wagon. 

On  wheels 

In    cleaning   material  and 

small  stores  chest. 
In  compartment   B,  store 

wagon. 
In   cleaning   material  and 

small  stores  chest. 
In  compartment   H,  store 

wagon. 

....do 

On  spare  wheels 

YLn   cleaning   material   and 
/    small  stores  chest. 


MISCELLANEOUS     SPARE     PARTS  FOR    TOOLS    AND 
ACCESSORIES. 

Padlocks  with  chains,  clevises,  and  bolt  snaps 


Ax  helves 


Hatchet  handles 

Pickax  handles 

Shovel  handles,  long. 


Shovel  handles,  short 

SIGHTS  AND  QUADRANTS. 


Sights,  complete 

Panoramic  sights 

Range  quadrants 

Teat  wrenches  for  panoramic  sights. 


SPARE  SIGHTS  AND  QUADRANTS. 


Sight,  complete 

Panoramic  sight 

Range  quadrant 

Teat  wrench  for  panoramic  sight. 


In  battery  wagon 

In  compartment  K,   store 

wagon. 

....do 

....do 

In  compartment  H,  store 

wagon. 
In  compartment  K,  store 

wagon. 


Class. 


J.    VII 

}  IV 

IV 
IV 

}  x 

IV 
X 

I     IV 

}  x 


IV 


In  fastening  on  cradles 

In  case  on  shield 

In  case  on  right  side  of  trail. 
In  case  on  shield 


In  spare  sights  chest  in  bat 
tery  wagon. 


RANGE  FINDING  AND  FIRE-CONTROL 
EQUIPMENT. 


Battery  commander's  rulers,  wooden 

Aiming  circle  with  tripod  and  cases 

Battery  commander's  telescope  and  mount 


1  in  store  limber,  1  on  pack 
horse. 


1  meter  base  range  finder  and  tripod 

Prismatic  compass 

Leather  carrying  case,  with  straps,  for  B. 
C.  telescope  and  mount,  containing — 

1  earners-hair  brush 

1  pin  wrench. 

1  screw  driver 

1  te  vt  wrench 

Flash  lights  with  hoods 

Fhsh  lights  without  hoods 

Steel  tape,  100  feet 

Time  interval  recorders  with  chains , 

Tripod  for  B.  C.  telescope  with  case 

Map  and  plotting  board 

Protractor,  xylonite,  rectangular 

Ruler  for  solution  of  triangles ! .-  — 

Observation  tower 'On  caisson  in  fifth  section. . 


On  person  or  in  store  limber 

On  pack  horse 

1  in  store  limber,  1  on  pack 

horse. 
On  pack  horse 


In  store  limber  . 


in  store  limber; 
horse. 


on  pack 


IV 


Those  on  hand  may  be  retained. 


( Furnished  by  Signal  Corps.)* 
«  Metal  B.  C.  rulers  with  cases  are  no  longer  part  of  the  equipment. 
« Will  be  issued  when  available.  ,       „„'       ,        .  . .  .  „. 

»  One  meter  b'ise  ranee  finder  will  be  issued  as  soon  as  a  supply  is  available.    When  issued,  the  sextant 
telemeter  now  on  hand  in  some  of  the  oreani'.ations  will  be  turned  in. 
*  For  list  of  these  parts  see  unit  accountability  equipment  manual. 


139 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY- 

Continued. 


War 
footing 
(4  guns 

and 
12  cais- 
sons). 


H 


Article. 


Whore  carried. 


HARNESS. 


Ret,  2-horse  reel , 

Sets,  wheel  harness 

Sets,  lead  harness 

Harness  sacks '  Not  carried  in  the  field. 

Set,  pack  harness  and  special  pack  equipment ; 


On  horses 

On  horses,  one  is  spare. 


Spare  parts  of  harness. 

Breast  straps In  compartment  K,  battery 

wagon. 

Bridles  and  bits,  1  off  and  1  near do 

Steel  collars,  with  2  hame  tugs  each 1  in  compartment 

compartment  K. 
wa.^on 


Property 
classification. 

■  55. 


J,  4  in 
battery 


Cinchas,  artillery,  lead \In  compartment  K,  battery 

Cinchas.  artillery,  wheel /    wagon. 

Collar  straps In  compartment  J,  battery 

wagon. 

G  ri?|bba?s iIn  compartment  K,  battery 

iiaiierh^ds't'ans';;;;;::;::::;:::;::;:;;:;;;;::;;:)  was°n- 

Halter  tie  ropes In  compartment  H,  battery 

was  on. 
Martingales,  with  cincha  straps In  compartment  K,  battery 

wagon. 
Mogul  springs,  320  pounds In  compartment  G ,  battery 

wagon. 

Side  straps,  for  breeching IIn  compartment  K,  battery 

Stirrup  straps I    wagon. 

Traces,  load,  with  chains lln  compartment  A,  battery 

Tr:ncs,  wheel /    wagon. 

Whips,  artillery In  compartment  K,  battery 

wa<.'on. 
Collar  pads,  canvas In  compartment  J,  battery 

wagon. 

Curb  bits \In  compartment  K,  battery 

Curb  chains  with  hooks /    wagon. 

SPARE  PARTS  OF  STEEL  COLLARS. 


Bolts  for  bottom  of  collars,  with  nuts 

Bolts  for  extensions,  with  nuts 

Bolts  for  top  connections,  with  nuts. 

Bolts  for  trace  plates,  with  nuts  and  wash- 
ers. 

Buckle  latches 

Buckle  springs 

Draft  springs 

Pad  bolts,  wit h  nuts 

Pad  hooks,  with  collar  back  strap  connec- 
tions. 

Trace  plates  with  loops 


INSTRUCTION  EQUIPMENT. 


1     Common  shrapnel,  with  fuze.sectionalized. . . 
1     Common    steel    shell,    sectionalked,  with 
part  sectionalized. 

MISCELLANEOUS  EQUIPMENT. 


Reloading  and  cleaning  outfit,  consisting 
of— 
1  storage  chest,  containing— 

1  case  holder 

1  case-holder  stand 

1  cleaning  brush 

1  decapping  tool 

1  hammer 

1  powder  measure  (saluting) 

1  press  for  inserting  primer 

1  bushing 


fuze,   >Not  carried  in  field 


In  compartment 
wagon. 


A,  store 


IV 


IX 


IV 


IX 


In  miscellaneous  spare  parts  1      Iv 
chest,  store  wagon.  / 


»  This  set  of  pack  harness  and  special  pack  equipment  will  be  issued  to  carry  the  fire-control  equipment 
until  the  reel,  2-horse,  is  available. 
•  Not  part  of  harness. 


140 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY- 

Contiimed. 


Property 
classification. 


404 
75 


»Sar! 

«Un 

straps 


miscellaneous  equipment— continued. 

Drill  cartridges  with  the  following  spare  parts— 

16  rotating  pins 

16  stop  pins 

1  graduating  ring  with  felt  washer 

4  locking  screws 

2  point  nut  screws 

Pistol  cleaning  kit 

Ann  racks  for  automatic  pistols 

(For  targets  see  O.  O.  pamphlet  No.  1994.) 

AMMUNITION. 

Shell,  rounds 

Shrapnel,  rounds 

Cartridge  cases ,  saluting 


Not  carried  in  field 


Where  convenient . 
Not  carried  in  field. 


PERSONAL  EQUIPMENT. 

The  equipment  of  the  enlisted  men  of  Field 

Artillery  will  he  as  follows: 
(a)  For  each  enlisted  man- 
Can,  bacon,  model  of  1913 

Canteen  model  of  1910 

Canteen  cover,  dismounted 

Cartridges,  ball,  pistol,  or  20  cartridges,  ball, 

revolver 

Cup,  model  of  1910 

Fork 

Knife 

Magazines,  pistol,  extra,  if  pistol  is  used 

Meat  can 

Pistol  or  revolver 

Pistol  belt  or  revolver  cartridge  belt  without 
saber  ring. 

Pistol  holster  or  revolver  holster 

Spoon 

Pouch  for  first-aid  packet 

First-aid  packet  (Medical  Department)  fur- 
nished by  Quartermaster  Corps — 

Idem  ification  tag 

Shel  u>r  tent,  half 

Sheh  )r-tont  pole 

Shelter- tent  pegs 

(6)  For  eac>  enlisted  man  individually  mounted, 
in  addition  to  (a) — 

Curry  omb 

Horse  brush 

Link 

Saddle,  McClellan,  Field  Artillery 

Saddlebags,  pair 

Spurs  pair 

Spur  straps,  set 

Brid  .e,  Field  Artillery 

(c)  For  each  driver,  in  addition  to  (c) — 

Currycomb 

Horse  brush 

Spurs,  pair 

Spur  straps,  set 

(d)  For  each  cannoneer,  not  mounted,  in  addition 
to(o)- 

Can,  condiment 

Haversack,  model  of  1910 


JTn  ammunition  chests 
Not  carried  in  field 


►Carried  by  man 


•On  horse. 


jCarriedonman. 
On  horse 


}....do 

JCarriedonman. 

Vcarriedby  man. 


IV 


vr 


IX 


VII 


IX 

VII 
IX 

VII 

IX 


IX 


TX 


IX 
IX 


IX 
IX 


IX 


V  these  articles  are  supplied  the  canteen,  cavalry  and  canteen  strap,  cavalry,  may  be  used, 
die  to  be  equipped  with  1  stirrup  guidon  socket  per  battery  or  2  per  regimental  headquarters, 
il  the  mo  lei  of  1910  haversack  is  supplied,  the  haversack,  old  model,  and  2  canteen-haversack 
may  be  used. 


141 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY- 

Continued. 


War 

footing 
(4  puns 

and 
12  cais- 
sons). 


Article. 


Carried  on  horse. 


HOESE  EQUIPMENT,  FOE  EACH  HOESE. 

Halter  tie  rope 

Hal  ter  headstall 

Feod  bag 

drain  bag 

Sadd  le  blanket 

Surcingle 

Horse  cover 

CONTENTS  OF  SADDLEE'S  CHEST. 

Awl  blades, harness, assorted 

Awl,  peeing 

Awl.  seat,  handled 

Carriage,  pricking,  3  wheels 

Compass,  6  inch 

Creaser,  double,  lignum-vitse 

Claw  tool 

Edge  tool,  No.  1 

Edjretool,  No.  2 

Extra  blades,  with  followers,  for  draw 

Gage,  draw,  brass 

patent,  awl,  rosewood 

Hammer  No.  3.  riveting 

Handle,  pc<,r,  awl,  with  wrench 

Knife,  round 

Knife,  splitting,  6-inch 

Noclle  c.ise,  leather 

Noodle,  glovers'  No.  3,  paper 

Needles,  harness  No.  4  papers 

Needles,  harness  No.  5,  papers 

Needles,  hinuss  No.  8,  papers 

Needles,  sacking,  assorted 

Nippers,  cutting,  10-inch 

Oilstone,  unmounted 

Pliers,  6-inch 

Punches, hand,  round,  assorted 

Punch,  revolving 

Rivet  sot 

Rule,  boxwood,  2-foot,  4-fold 

Screw  driver,  3-inch  blade 

Sewing  palm ,  leather 

Shears,  10-inch  bent  trimmers 

Shoe  knife,  square  point 

Shoe  knife,  broad  point 

Slicker,  steel 

Thimbles 

In  addition  to  the  stores  enumerated  above, 
certain  of  the  articles  in  the  list  of  saddlor's  ma- 
terial,six  months'supply.arecarried  in  this  chest. 

CONTENTS  OF  CAEPENTEE'S  CHEST. 

Carpenter  tools. 

Bench  ax 

Bags,  canvas, for  small  stores 

Bevel, 8  inch 

Bits,  augor 

Bit,  wood  countersink 

Bit .  expansive,  2  cutters 

Bits, screw  driver 

Brace .  ratchet  10-inch  sweep 

Chisels,  socket,  framing 

Dividers,  wing,  10-inch 

Drills  twist 

File.  10-inch,  flat,  bastard 

Files,  saw,  4  and  6  inch  (3  of  each) 

Gage,  marking,  brass,  thumbscrew  shoe  and  face . 

i  Part  of  harness  for  all  draft  horses. 


Where  carried. 


On  horse 

Not  carried  in  field. 


In  saddler's  chest  In  battery 

wagon. 


In  carpenter's  chest  in  bat- 
tery wagon. 


Propert 


property 
lassihcation. 


IX 


142 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY - 

Continued. 


CONTENTS   OF   CARPENTER'S   CHEST— COn. 


Gouges,  socket  firmer 

Hammer,  claw,  adze  eye 

Handle,  tool,  containing  10  tools 

Handles,  file,  aluminum  alloy 

Knilo,  drawing,  9-inch  blade 

Mallet.  2\  by  5  inches,  maple,  hickory  handled 

Nai  1  set 

Oiler 


Oilstone,  unmounted 

Pinter,  small,  8-inch 

Plane,  jack,  wood 

Plane,  smoothing,  wood 

Plate,  auger  handle 

Rasp,  wood.  10-inch 

Reamer,  half  round,  for  wood  or  soft  metal . 

Rule,  boxwood,  2-foot,  4-fold 

Saw,  crosscut,  24-inch 

Saw,  rip,  24-inch 

Saw  set 

Screw  driver,  5-inch  blade,  10-inch 

Spokeshave,  adjustable 

Square,  steel,  12-inch  body,  8-inch  tongue.. 

Tape  line,  linen 

Vise,  table,  2}-inch 

Wrench,  screw,  12-inch 


BLACKSMITH'S  TOOLS. 


Anvil,  100  pounds 

A }  >rons 

Bags,  canvas,  lor  nails 

Leather  shoeing  box 

Cold  chisel,  8-inch 

Chisel,  handled,  for  hot  iron 

Chisel,  handled,  for  cold  iron 

Drills,  fiat 

File,  flat,  12-inch,  bastard,  double  cut 

Flatter,  handled 

Fore  punch  and  creaser 

Forge,  Empire,  portable,  modified  for  Army  use. 

Hand  hammer,  2-pound 

Riveting  hammer,  1  pound  2  ounces 

Shoeing  hammer,  10-ounce 

Sledge,  11-pound 

File  handle,  aluminum 

Hardie,  0.75  square  shank,  1.25  bit 

Cutting  nippers,  14-inch 

Clinching  iron 

Shoeing  knives 

Toe  knife 

Oiler 

Shoeing  pincers,  12-inch 

Fritchel,  0.75  inch  flats 

Punch,  round,  0.375  inch  diameter, 

Punch,  round,  0.312  (A)  inch  diameter 

Punch,  nail 

Punch,  square 

Rake,  fire 

Shoeing  rasp 

Ratchet  drill  for  square  shank  drills 

Rivet  sets,  sizes  -rV.  \,  j,  £.  and  |  inch 

Rule,  boxwood,  2-foot,  4-fold 

Screw  plate,  taps,  and  dies,  with  tap  wrench, 
include  wooden  chest. 

Shovel,  fire 

Square 

Tongs,  horseshoer's 

Tongs  for  0.25  inch  iron 

Tongs  for  0.5  inch  iron 

Whetstone,  farrier's 

Wrench,  forge 

Wrench,  screw,  12-inch 


In  carpenter's  chest  in  bat- 
tery wagon. 


In  forge  limber  chest. 


On  forge  limber. 


In  forge  limber  chest. 


143 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY- 

Continued. 


War 
footing 
(4  guns 

and 
12  cais- 
sons). 


Article. 


Where  carried. 


5 
100 

too 

5 
5i 

17 


100 


MATERIALS  FOR  CLEANING  AND  PRESERVATION. 

(Six  months'  supply,  all  expendable.) 

Black  adhesive  tape,  8-ounce  roll In   cleaning   material   and 

small-stores  chest. 
Borax,  pounds In  compartment  J,  battery 

wagon. 
Brush,  camel's  hair,  No.  1  round !  In   cleaning   material  and 

small-stores  chest. 

Brushes,  sash,  No.  3 do 

Brushes,  sash.  No.  5 do 

Brush,  varnish,  No.  4-0 In  compartment  J,  battery 

wagon. 

Brushes,  varnish,  No.  5-0 do , 

Brashes,  varnish,  No.  0-0 do , 

Burners,  lantern 1 

Cloth,  emery,  No.  J,  quire f    smSiU_sto?es  chest> 


1     Cloth,  emery,  No.  0,  quire. 


Cloth,  emery,  No.  00,  quire 

Cosmic,  No.  80,  soft,  quarts In    compartment    J,    store 

wagon. 

Chamois  skins \In   cleaning   material  and 

Dressing,  russet  leather,  boxes /    small-stores  chest. 

Q lobes,  lantern do 

La  valine,  10-ounce  cans Un   compartment   J,   store 

Lye,  powdered,  cans,  1  pound,  approximate /    wagon. 

Naphthaline,  pounds 

Oil,  clock,  ounce In   cleaning   material  and 

small-stores  chest. 
Oil,  hydrohne,  gallons In  cans  on  caisson  and  store 

limber. 
Oil,  linseed,  boiled,  gallons 1  in  compartment  J,  store 

wagon. 
Oil,  linseed,  raw,  pint In  cleaning    material   and 

small-stores  chest. 

Oil,  lubricating  (engine  No.  1),  gallons '  In  caisson  and  store  limbers. 

Oil,  neat's-foot,  gallons 6  in  compartment  J,  store 

wagon. 
Oil,  slushing,  light,  gallons 2  in  compartment  J,  store 

wagon. 
Oil,  sperm,  gallons '  1  In  compartment  J,  store 

wapon. 
Oil,  coal,  gallons In  cans  on  store  limber 


Property 
classification 


Paint,  olive  drab,  second  coat,  pounds \o  in  compartment  J,  store 

Paint,  olive  drab,  third  coat,  pounds /     wagon. 

Paint,  rubberine,  gallons 

Petrolatum  (vaseline),  ounces  (in  tin  box) In   cleaning   material  and 

small-stores  chest. 
Polish,  Gibson's  soap,  16-ounce  cans |  In    compartment   J,    store 


Primer,  brown  enamel,  quarts 

Sal  soda,  pounds j  20  in  cleaning  material  and 

small-stores  chest. 

Sandpaper,  No.  2\,  quire ] 

Sandpaper,  No.  H,  quire j  [In   cleaning   material  and 

Sandpaper,  No.  £,"  quire [    small-stores  chest. 

Sandpaper.  No.  00,  quire J 

isa^fi^::::::::::::::::::::::::::::lKssrtm"t  h 

Soap,  saddle,  Frank  Miller's,  pounds )         6     ' 

Sponges,  5  inches \  In  compartment  A, 

Sponges,  large,  4  or  6  inches ;  I    wagon  in  hub  liners. 

Turpentine,  gallons 

Waste,  cotton, pounds |  In  compartments  A,  C,  G, 

H,  K,  store  wagon. 

Wicks. 'antern..... ........ jlln  cleaning   material  and 

Batteries  eveready  Tungsten [    small-stofes chest. 

Bulbs,  2.7  volt,  Mazda J 


store 


store 


Class. 


Sec- 
tion. 


i  Only  one  of  these  items  will  be  issued  to  an  organization. 


144 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY- 

Continued. 


War 

footing 
(4  guns 
'and 
^cais- 
sons). 


Article. 


SADDLER'S  MATERIAL. 


(Six  months'  supply,  all  expendable.) 


Awl  blades,  harness,  assorted 

Awl  hafts,  patent,  No.  146,  with  wrench; 

Buckles,  bar,  1-inch,  Saalbach ,  bronze 

Buckles,  bar,  tongueless,  f-inch,  brass 

Buckles,  bar,  tongueless,  1-inch,  brass 

Buckles,  bar,  tongueless,  l$-inch,  brass 

Buckles,  center  bar,  §-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  center  bur,  4-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  center  bar,  f-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  center  bar,  1-inch ,  bronze 

Buckles,  center  bar,  lj-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  center  bar,  lg-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  roller,  |-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  roller,  f-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  roller,  |-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  roller,  1-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  roller,  H-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  roller,  H-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  satchel, "j-inch,  bronze 

Buckles,  wire,  £-inch,  brass 

Buckles,  wire,  f-inch -. 

Buckles,  wire,  f-inch,  brass 

Cheeks,  "D,"  bronze 

Conway  loops,  f-inch,  bronze 

Duck,  cotton,  olive-drab,  22-inch,  No.  1,  yards... 


End  buckles,  1-inch,  bronze,  with  clip. 

End  clips,  f-inch,  brass 

End  clips,  1-inch,  brass 

End  clips,  H-inch,  brass 

Foot-staples,  high,  bronze 

Foot-staples,  low,  bronze 

Foot  -staples,  semicircular,  bronze 

Hooks,  back  strap,  M.  I.,  with  roller. . 
Hooks,  breast  strap,  M.  I.,  with  roller. 

Hooks,  end,  double,  brass  wire 

Hooks,  end,  single,  brass  wire 

Hooks,  side  strap,  wheel 


Leather,  bridle,  sides. 


Where  carried. 


In  saddler's  chest . 


In   canvas   bag   for    small 
stores,  battery  wagon. 


In  compartment  A,  battery 
wagon. 

In   canvas   bag   for   small 
stores,  battery  wagon. 


•In  saddler's  chest. 


Leather,  collar,  backs 

Leather,  harness,  backs,  pounds. 

Leather,  latigo,  sides 


In   canvas   bag   for   small 
stores,  battery  wagon. 

In  saddler's  chest 


Nails,  saddle 

Needles,  Glover's,  No.  3,  paper 

Needles,  harness,  No.  4,  paper 

Needles,  harness,  No.  5,  paper 

Needles,  harness,  No.  6,  paper 

Ornaments,  brow-band,  copper 

Ovals,  saddle,  brass 

Ovals,  saddlebag,  brass 

Pins,  screw,  brass,  f-inch,  No.  2,  gross 

Rings,  J-inch  diameter,  rifle,  scabbard,  and  saddle- 
bag, bronze. 

Rings,  H-inch  diameter,  saddle 

Rings,  18-inch  diameter,  back  strap,  bronze 

Rings,  1  J-inch  diameter,  throat  strap  and  breech- 
ing, bronze. 

Rings,  2-inch  diameter,  halter,  bronze,  style  2... 


In   canvas    bag   for   small 
stores,  battery  wagon. 

2  in  compartment  K,  bat- 

terv  wagon. 
do 

50  in  compartment  K,  bat- 
tery wagon. 

In  compartment  K,  battery 
wagon. 


In  saddler's  chest . 


Property 
classification. 

Sec- 
ass-     tion. 


.do. 


..do. 
.do.. 


Rings,  4-inch  diameter,  quarter  strap 

Rings,  "D,"  0.85  by  1  inch,  feed  bag,  M.  I. 

Rings,  "D,"  f  by  lfc  inch ,  with  clasp 

Rings,  "D,"  If  by  2  inch,  with  roller 

Rings,  "P,"  1.69  by  2  inch ,  with  roller 


.do. 


In   canvas   bag   for   small 
stores,  battery  wagon. 

do 

In  saddler's  chest 

do 

do 

do 


IX 

X 

IX 


10 


10 


10 


145 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY 

Continued. 


War 
footing 
<4  guns 

and 
12  cais- 
sons). 


Article. 


saddler's  material— continued. 

Rivets  and  burs,  brass,  f-inch,  No.  12,  belt,  pound 
Rivets  and  burs,  brass,  *-inch,  No.  10,  belt,  pound 
Rivets  and  burs,  brass,  |-inch,  No.  10,  belt,  pound 
Rivets  and  burs,  brass,  1-inch,  No.  8,  oval  head, 
pound. 

Rollers,  lead  rein,  steel 

Rope,  J-mch,  halter,  manila  hemp,  feet 

Screws,  brass,  1-inch,  No.  6,  wood,  gross 

Sheepskins,  with  wool  on 


Where  carried. 


In  saddler's  chest . 


Shields,  saddle,  lHnch,  brass 

Shields,  saddle,  llj-inch,  brass 

Shields,  saddle,  12-inch,  brass 

Snap  hooks,  canteen,  Cavalry,  bronze 

Snap  hooks,  Covert,  J-inch,  M.I 

Snaps.  Covert's  1-inch,  M.  I 

Snap  hooks,  German,  1-inch  M.  I,  bronzed. 

Snap  hooks,  sack,  1-inch 

Snap  hooks,  swivel,  1-inch,  No.  16,  M.  I 

Snap  hooks,  German,  1-inch,  M.  I,  bronzed. 

Squares,  halter,  style  2,  bronze . 


Strap  loops,  coupling,  J-inch,  for  bridle,  bronze.. 

Strap  loops,  feed  bag,  1  by  J-inch,  brass,  wire 

Stud  hooks,  brome 

Studs  saddle  bag,  brass,  style  1 

Tacks,  copper,  No.  12,  i-pound,  paper 

Tacks,  copper,  No.  20,  i-pound,  pajxr 

Thimble,  aluminum-lined,  steel,  J-inch 

Thread,  carpet,  No.  18,  olive-drab,  pound 

Thread,  shce,  No.  3,  brown,  pound 

Thread,  shoe,  No.  10,  brown,  pound 

Wax,  stitching,  brown,  winter,  pounds 


Webbing,  olive-drab,  cotton,  heavy,  f-inch,  yards 

Webbing,  olive-drab,  cotton,  heavy,  1-inch,  yards 

Webbing,  olive-drab,  halter,  lj-inch,  yards 

Webbing,  olive-drab,  jute,  3J-inch,  yards 


For  polo  equipment. 


Buckles,  wire,  *-inch,  brass 

Buckles,  wire,  f-inch,  brass 

Buckles,  wire,  f-inch,  brass 

Buckles,  wire.  |-inch,  brass 

Buckles,  nickle-plated,  stirrup  strap,  lf-inch. 

Buckles,  nickel-plated,  girth,  1-inch 

Rings,  J-inch  diameter,  bronze 

Web,  linen,  straining,  3J-mch,  yards 


Web,  linen,  straining,  6-inch,  yards. 


In  compartment  J,  battery 
wagon. 

In  saddler's  chest 

2  in  compartment  K,  bat- 
tery wagon. 


In  saddler's  chest . 


In   canvas    bag   for   small 

stores,  battery  wagon. 
do 


...do. 


In  saddler's  chest . 
.do 


.do. 


.do. 

.(i.. 

.do. 

.do. 


In  compartment  F,  battery 

wagon. 
In  compartment  A,  battery 

wagon. 

....do 

....do 

....do 


Prope 


roperty 
sincatioi 


X 

IV 
X 

IX 


In  saddler's  chest . 

....do 

....do 


.d.). 
.do. 

.do. 

.do. 


In  compartment  J.  Battery 

wagon. 
— do 


Sec- 
tion. 


X 

10 

IX 

I 

X 

10 

IX 

5 

IX 

5 

IX 

5 

1(1 


146 

STATEMENT  OF  TOTAL  EQUIPMENT  OF  ONE  4.7-INCH  GUN  BATTERY- 

Continued. 


No. 

Article. 

Where  carried. 

Property 
classification. 

Class. 

Sec- 
tion. 

3 

RESERVE  SUPPLIES  FOR  WAR  SERVICE.* 

Buckles,  bar,  tongueless,  g-inch 

X 

rv 

IX 
IX 

X 

IX 

X 

IX 

rv 

X 

IX 
IV 
IX 

X 

IV 
IX 

X 

fi 

Buckles,  bar,  toiv-Micless.  l-inch 

12 

Buckles,  center  bar,  $-inch 

?, 

Buckles,  center  bar,  |-inch 

4 

Buckles,  center  bar,  |-inch 

4 

B  uc!  lcs,  center  bar,  1 J  -inch 

4 

Buckles,  center  bar,  lj-inch 

4 

BucHes,  rol ler ,  ^-inch 

10 

7 
1? 

Buckles,  roller,  f -inch 

Buckles,  rollor,  1  i-inch 

.do... 

9 

Buckles,  wire,  |-inch 

? 

Burners,  lantern 

1 

Cheok  "D" 

1 

Chamois  skin 

fl 

Conway  loops.  J-inch 

4 

Drossinsr,  russet  leather 

5 

End  buckles 

2 

Olol  es,  lantern 

.  .do... 

2 
2 
4 
4 

ITooks,  back  strap 

IToo's,  callar  strap 

ITooks,  doul  le,  brass  wire 

TIoo'  s,  end,  brass  wire 

\....do 

8 

do 

.  .do 

1 

5 

g 

L..do 

? 

Leal  her,  collar,  backs 

40 
1 

10 

Leather ,  L  tigo,  side 

Li 

3 

Nails,  saddle 

5 

1 

Oil ,  clock,  ounce 

....do 

4 

Oil ,  coal .  gallons 

19 

Oil,  hvdroline,  gallons 

1? 

Oil,  lubricating  (engino  No.  1),  gallons 

Oil,  noat's-foot,  gallons 

10 

20 

...do 

? 

Oil,  slushing,  light,  gallons 

1 

Oil,  sperm,  gallon 

3 

Ornaments,  brow  band 

5 

? 

Rings,!  'ncn  diameter,  saddlebag 

....do 

....do 

8 

Rinirs,  l{  inch  diameter,  saddle 

4 

Rings,  2  inch  diameter,  halter 

4 
4 

Rings,  4  inch  diameter,  cincha  strap 

Rings,  4  inch  diameter,  quarter  strap 

8 

3 

Rings  "  l>,"  1  inch  diameter,  feed  bag 

1 

Ri .  ots  and  burs,  brass  .'.-inch,  No.  10,  pound 

1 

Rivets  and  burs,  brass  |-inch,  No.  10,  pound j 

Sal  soda,  pounds ! 

10 

25 

do 

...do 

2 
3 

Snap  hook,  haversack,  1-inch 

Snap  hook,  feed  bag 

1 

8 

1? 

Squares,  halter 

....do 

5 

40 

Soap,  castile,  pounds 

[....do 

L. 

4 

60 

Soap,  saddle,  Frank  Miller's,  pounds 

10 

HI 

3 

Strap  loops,  feed  bag 

8 

2 

Studs,  saddlebag 

do 

5 

1 

Tacks,  copper,  12-ounce,  paper 

1 

Tacks,  copper,  20-ounce,  paper 

1 

Thread,  carpet,  No.  is,  olive-drab,  pound 

1 

1 

30 

10 

Waste,  otton,  pounds 

1 

Wax,  stilehimr,  brown,  pound 

2 

Wicks,  lantern 

I 

i  No  material  will  be  drawn  from  this  supply  for  making  repairs  and  replacements  except  in  sudden  calls 
for  field  service  if  necessary  to  replace  missing  items  of  the  regular  supplies.  To  avoid  deterioration,  all 
perishable  articles  should  be  replaced  by  similar  ones  received  with  the  regular  6  months'  allowance. 


INDEX. 


A. 

Pape. 

Adjusting  instruments 1 22 

Ammunition 18 

Ammunition,  allowance  of 26 

Ammunition,  blank: 

Care  of  cartridge  case  for 29 

Precaution 28 

Preparation 27 

Ammunition  chest,  limber 73 

Apron,  caisson 75 

Apron,  carriage 53 

Apron  latch 53 

Axle  (caisson  and  caisson  limber) 73 

Axle  (carriage) 42 

Axle  (carriage),  to  dismount 62 

Axle  (carriage  limber) 68 

Axle  (forge  and  store  limber,  battery  and  store  wagon) 85 

Axle  bearings,  caisson  limber 73 

Azimuth  pointer 50 

R. 
Battery  wagon : 

Description 91 

Nomenclature  of  parts 88 

Block  carrier 14 

Block  latch 15 

Bolt  snaps 95 

Brake  (battery  and  store  wagon) 93 

Brake  (caisson) 76 

Brake  (carriage) 52 

Brake,  to  adjust 61 

Brake,  to  dismount 61 

Brake  beam  (caisson) 76 

Brake  beam  (carriage) 52 

Brake  cross-brace 91 

Brake  lever  (caisson) 77 

Brake  lever  (carriage) 53 

Brake  rod 52 

Brake  segment 52 

Brake  shaft  (caisson) 76 

Brake  shaft  (carriage) 52 

Brake  shaft  bracket 52 

Brake  shoe 52 

(147) 


148 

Breech  mechanism:  rage. 

Action 15 

Description 10 

To  dismantle 17 

C. 
Caisson,  model  of  1908: 

Description 75 

Nomenclature  of  parts 69 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 69 

Caisson,  model  of  1916: 

Description 79 

Nomenclature 77 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 77 

Caisson  prop 76 

Care  and  maintenance  of  materiel,  suggestions  for 125 

Carriage: 

Action  of ; 49 

Assembling -. 55 

Description. 41 

Dismounting 55 

Nomenclature  of  parts 35 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 34 

Carriage  parts,  care  and  cleaning  of . 62 

Carpenter's  chest 94 

Cartridge  case 18 

Chest  (battery  and  store  wagon) 92 

Chest  (forge  limber) 85 

Chest  (store  limber) 87 

Chest  doors  (caisson  limber) 74 

Collar,  steel 97 

Collar-lifting  device 99 

Combination  fuze,  F.  A - 22 

Compartments  (battery  and  store  wagons) 92 

Connecting  pole  body  (caisson) 75 

Contents 5 

Counter  recoil  buffer 46 

Cradle,  complete 44 

Cradle,  to  dismount 60 

Cradle  band,  front 45 

Cradle  band,  rear 46 

Cyclometer 95 

Cylinder  head 46 

D. 

Diaphragms,  limber 7S 

Doubletree 68 

Drill  cartridge 33 

Dust  guard 49 


149 

E. 

Page. 

Elevating  and  traversing  lock 51 

Elevating  bevel  gear 50 

Elevating  bevel  gear,  to  dismount 60 

Elevating  bevel  pinion 50 

Elevating  bevel  pinion,  to  dismount 60 

Elevating  gear  bracket 50 

Elevating  mechanism: 

Action  of : 50 

To  assemble 60 

Elevating  pinion  shafts 50 

Elevating  screw,  to  dismount 60 

Elevating  screws  cover 51 

Elevating  yoke  side 50 

Elevating  yoke  transom 50 

Equipment,  list  of 7 

Equipment,  table  of  total,  of  one  battery 132 

Extension  rail,  to  assemble 55 

Extension  rail,  to  dismount 55 

Extension  rail  body 45 

Extension  rail  carrier 45 

Extractor 15 

F. 

Firing  bracket 48 

Firing  device 48 

Firing  handle 48 

Firing  handle  shaft 48 

Firing  lock  case 14 

Firing  mechanism  (carriage),  action  of 48 

Firing  mechanism  (gun) : 

Description 12 

To  dismantle 16 

Firing  pin 12 

Firing-pin  spring 12 

Flash  lights,  allowance  of 129 

Flasks 42 

Foot  rest  (forge  and  store  limbers) 86 

Forge  limber: 

Description 85 

Nomenclature 80 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 80 

Frame  (battery  and  store  wagons) 91 

Frame  (carriage  limber) 67 

Fuzes 22 

G. 

General  information 122 

Gland: 

Adjustment 58 

To  assemble 58 


150 

Gun:  Page> 

Care  of 17 

Care  in  dismounting 55 

Description 9 

To  dismount 55 

To  mount 55 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 9 

H. 
Hand  fuze  setter: 

Adaptability  to  other  guns 33 

Adjustment 33 

Description 31 

Operation 32 

Harness,  Artillery 95 

Hinge  pin 15 

Hub  liner,  to  remove 61 

I. 

Inner  counter  recoil  springs 47 

Inner  elevating  screw 50 

Intermediate  plates 73 

L. 
Leather: 

Black,  care  of 101 

Care  and  preservation  of 99 

Reasons  for  oiling 99 

Russet,  care  of 100 

Limber,  caisson: 

Description 73 

Nomenclature  of  parts 69 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 69 

Limber,  carriage: 

Description 67 

Nomenclature  of  parts 65 

Weights,  dimensions  of 65 

List  of  plates 7 

Lock  bolt 51 

Lock-bolt  casing 51 

M. 

Main  shield 53 

Marking  on  ammunition  packing  boxes 26 

Method  of  loading  a  battery  for  transportation 129 

Middle  rail  (forge  and  store  limbers) 86 

Middle  counter  recoil  spring 47 

Misfires  and  hangfires 34 

O. 

Oils  for  artillery  materiel 1 23 

Oil  can,  caisson 76 

Oil  can,  store  limber 87 

Operating  lever 14 

Operating  lever  latch 15 

Outer  counter  recoil  springs 47 

Outer  elevating  screw 50 


151 
P. 

Page. 

Padlocks 95 

Painting  artillery  materiel 122 

Panoramic  eight  case 54 

Pintle,  caisson  limber 74 

Pintle,  carriage  limber 67 

Pintle  bolt,  carriage  limber 68 

Pintle  bearing 44 

Pintle  bearing  support,  caisson  limber 74 

Pintle  yoke 44 

Pintle  yoke,  to  dismount 62 

Piston,  to  remove 57 

Piston  rod 47 

Piston  rod,  to  remove 57 

Piston  rod  head 47 

Pole 68 

Pole  clamp  (forge  and  store  limbers) 86 

Pole  socket  (caisson) 75 

Pole  socket  (caisson  limber) 74 

Pole  socket  base 74 

Powder  charge 20 

Plates,  list  of 7 

Primer,  110  gr.,  percussion 19 

Primer,  saluting,  percussion 19 

Projectiles 20 

Prop  (battery  and  store  wagons) 92 

Q. 

Quadrant,  range: 

Adjustment  of 117 

Care  of 117 

Case  for 54 

Description 112 

Spare 121 

To  adjust 119 

Use  of 114 

R. 

Range  table 29 

Recoil  indicator 49 

Recoil  indicator  throw,  to  remove 55 

Recoil  cylinder: 

Care  and  cleaning  of 62 

Description 46 

To  assemble 56 

To  dismount 56 

To  drain 56 

To  fill 56 

Reloading  and  cleaning  outfit 124 

Repairs  for  Field  Artillery  rnatenel 124 

Riveting,  instructions  for 1 

10161—17 13* 


152 

s. 

Page. 

Saddler's  chest 94 

Sear 13 

Semple  tracer 21 

Shell 20 

Shield: 

Description 53 

To  dismount ." 60 

Shoulder  guard 54 

Shrapnel 21 

Sights: 

Additional  tests  for 12L 

Adjustment  of 117 

Care  of 115 

Spare 121 

Use  of 114 

Verification  of  parallelism  of  lines  of 119 

Sight,  front: 

Care  of 115 

Description 101 

To  adjust 119 

Sights,  line 101 

Sight,  panoramic,  model  of  1904: 

Care  of 116 

Description 103 

To  adjust 118 

Use  of 115 

Sight,  panoramic,  model  of  1915: 

Care  of ,.'. 116 

Description 106 

To  adjust 117 

Use  of 115 

Sight,  rear: 

Care  of 115 

Description 102 

To  adjust 119 

Spade 43 

Spare  wheel  fastenings 93 

Spring  compressor 54 

Spring  cylinder 44 

Spring  rod 47 

Spring-rod  yoke 48 

Spring  stirrup,  inner 47 

Spring  stirrup,  outer 47 

Spring-stirrup  head,  inner 47 

Spring-stirrup  head,  outer 47 

Spring  system : 

To  assemble 58 

To  dismount 59 

Store  limber : 

Contents 87 

Description 87 

Nomenclature  of  parts 80 

Weights,  dimensions,  etc 80 


153 

Store  wagon :  Page- 
Description  91 

Nomenclature  of  parts 88 

Stuffing  box 46 

Stuffing  box,  to  pack 57 

Supplies  in  general 128 

T. 

Targets 122 

Top  carriage  (carriage  linfber) 67 

Top-carriage  rail  (carriage  limber) 67 

Top  shield 53 

Trail: 

Description 42 

To  dismount \ 62 

Trail  prop 44 

Traveling  lock 52 

Traveling-lock  frame 52 

Traveling-lock  legs 52 

Traversing  bracket 49 

Traversing  bracket,  to  dismount 62 

Traversing  gear,  to  dismount 60 

Traversing  handwheel 49 

Traversing  nut 49 

Traversing  screw 49 

Traversing-screw  bracket 49 

Trigger  fork 13 

Trigger  shaft 14 

Trunnion  band 45 

W. 

Wheels: 

Description 41 

To  remove 61 

Wheel  fastening •. 42 

War  Defartment, 

Office  of  the  Chief  of  Ordnance, 

Washington,  September  16, 1917. 
November  19, 1910. 
Kevised  September  15, 1917. 
Form  No.  1771. 
Ed.  Sept.  15-17—5000. 

O 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


I 


